Home

MRS-1608 Operation Manual (English)

1. Input section Display section Track parameter section Control section A reg i Sam io our o ooooooooono Colle m cc i Clo OC mg Jf TE gt 1608 aen Jo 22 P3 ee Effect Ius section C JC JE Je em ce J sees A on Jf oss sons DDODODOOCO e ge 1 M Dose IE c9 cS ee Bue E aie dnt Lp n ILE s ies siis eie jn Rhythm section Fader section Transport section Input section INPUT controls 1 8 PEAK indicators 1 8 CLIP indicator 5 REC LEVEL control s BTRACK RECORDING key ON OFF keys section TUNER key BYPASS key INPUT SOURCE key DIST key ACO BASS SIM key BYPASS TUNER Eu CLEAN key BASS key ae J Jw SIM CLEAN DIST PASS ALGORITHM keys Jw C Cer
2. KICK SNARE CLOSEDHAT OPENHAT TOM1 TOM2 TOM3 RIDE CRASH EXTRACYMBAL EXTRA1 EXTRA2 Tracks 1 14 HINT You can mix the signals from the INPUT jacks into the bounce recording f you select only one mono track as the bounce destination the signal mixed to mono will be recorded e f necessary you can play back all tracks 1 16 and bounce the signal onto an empty V take of a selected track Making bounce settings Before using the bounce function you may have to make certain settings Specifying playback mute for the recording track s By default the bounce destination recording track s will be muted To play back a track while you bounce record onto another V take of that track use the following procedure to change the internal setting so that the recording track s will also play back 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY BOUNCE on the display and press the ENTER key 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BOUNCE REC TRACK on the display and press the ENTER key The current setting is shown RECTERCK The indications have the following meaning MUTE The recording track s will be muted default setting PLAY The recording trac
3. Parameter Setting range Description LFO TYPE MONO STEREO Selects the LFO phase Mn monaural or St stereo DEPTH 0 10 Adjusts the depth of the effect RATE 1 30 Adjusts the speed of the effect PRE DLY 1 30 Adjusts the pre delay time EFX LVL 0 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect sound TIME 1 10000 T 4x4 T 1 4 Parum d d time in 1 ms steps The T x setting results in sync with the FB 0 10 Adjusts the amount of feedback DAMP 0 10 Adjusts the cut amount of the delay sound s high range PAN OR acu Adjusts the stereo position of the delay sound REV SEND 0 30 Adjusts the send level of the delay sound to reverb REVERB module Type Parameter HALL PRE DLY DECAY EQ HIGH EQ LOW E R MIX Simulates the acoustics of a concert hall ROOM PRE DLY DECAY EQ HIGH EQ LOW E R MIX Simulates the acoustics of a room SPRING PRE DLY DECAY EQ HIGH EQ LOW EFX LVL Simulates a spring type reverb machine PLATE PRE DLY DECAY EQ HIGH EQ LOW EFX LVL Simulates a plate reverb Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description PRE DLY 1 100 Adjusts the pre delay time DECAY 1 30 Adjusts the reverb time EQ HIGH 12 6 Adjusts the high range level of the effect sound EQ LOW 12 6 Adjusts the low range level of the effect sound E R MIX 0 30 Adjusts the volume of early refle
4. 139 Insert 138 139 Effect parameter 139 142 Applying the insert effect only the monitor Effect patch 202 146 Effect related troubleshooting information 189 Changing the insert 140 Effect section 12 Changing the patch 145 EQ HIGH 29 80 Editing a patch 142 EQ LOW 29 80 Selecting a patch 141 EQ MID 29 80 Signal 139 Erase Storing swapping a 145 Erasing a 168 Erasing a range of data Track editing 52 EL Erasing a V take 62 Level 182 Erasing bass sequence 95 Locate 37 Erasing drum sequence play 94 Erasing rhythm song events 109 BM EE cA NS 104 Major Minor Everit cn nean ov asx avatars diete 104 109 Entering chord information for a pattern 100 Pitch compensation for a range 55 BF Selecting a sound or scale to play with pads 91 Factory
5. 202 Insert Effect notene ore rinia EEr E e a 202 Send return Effect 208 Rhythm Pattern 209 Drum Kits 22 ulclole rc mv mc 211 Bass Programs 211 Instrum nts 212 MIDI note number chart 214 Phrases one as 215 MRS 1608 Hard Disk Contents 217 Compatibility with MRS Series 217 MIDI implementation 218 MIDI implementation chart 219 INDEX 5x v ease EIER E 220 6 ZOOM MRS 1608 Introduction Thank you for selecting the ZOOM MRS 1608 MultiTrak Recording Studio simply called the MRS 1608 in this manual The MRS 1608 is a fascinating product with the following features Bi Brings together everything you need for complete music production The MRS 1608 provides all the functionality you need for professional music production hard disk recorder drum bass machine sampler digital mixer effects CD R RW drive and more From creating the rhythm tracks to multitrack recording mixdown and burning an audio CD the MRS 1608 lets you do it all E Recorder with 16 tracks x 10 virtual takes The recorder section provides 16 audio tracks mono x 8 stereo x 4 plus a stereo master track for mixdown Because each track has ten virtual tracks V takes you can record multiple takes for import
6. 174 VAM AEE Me Tuo Sampin sodass 124 Importing a WAV AIFF file Phrase 70 Solo function 84 Write Song Position Pointer 172 sepe eur 74 106 187 n e 49 Start Stop Continue 172 Writing a phrase to a track 73 Status 26 Step input Rhythm 94 95 ZOOM MRS 1608 223 The FCC regulation warning for U S A This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separatio
7. 185 Manual 22 Fade in out mene sut acre e E 46 Editing a range ofa sample PME eee ee 127 Marker 46 Performing fade in out for a range ofdata 53 Deleting d iaces coetu 47 Fader 13 Shifting a marker 47 FAST input 74 106 Storing a 46 Finalize eke eae 158 Using the marker function to separate tracks 155 70 124 161 217 EE ee SR 1093 1 181 Master tack Dia DAC siiin e Front panel se DE Ars 14 E 16 Mastering effect 33 MEAS X sede edie ate e ahaa Walaa 71 BH Metronome 119 Hard disk MIDI sendas e MEE 170 Contents of hard disk 217 Changing MIDI Ld Hard disk 184 Control Change captas AA EAF DU HARMONY noctes hem neon e n nmn 57 MIT enenrerfor drunitibgo s program ausos 1 MIDI Time Code 173 Program Change LEID 173 Song Position Pointer
8. 172 Import Start Stop Continue 172 importing 90 Timing Clock 172 Importing fron Another project s sse ce 149 MIDI 171 MESNINE phas age aiaa 98 MIDI implementation 218 Importing a project 166 MIDI implementation chart 219 Importing a Mom SEV EN feu cat 163 MIDI IN 170 ZOOM MRS 1608 INDEX MIDI QUT jack eR 170 Program 170 173 MIDI related troubleshooting information 189 line eM NCC 165 MIXOOWRn inre 33 41 rti mec thee REP 104 MIXE qe 11 29 77 PIN cage Be 104 Move Punch In Out gt xr hr ee er Ry xus 39 Moving range of 51 Auto 40 Moving a V take 63 Manual 39 MRS series compatibility 217 EQ BN Quantize 93 96 98 Note on off ish E ERI REESE FRU aiios 170 BR BHO Real time input Octave Bass sequence real time input 95 Selecting a sound or scale to play with Drum sequence real time input
9. PRIS 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section to the character you want to change and turn the dial to select the new character For information on available characters refer to page 36 To return to the main screen after editing the name press the EXIT key several times 168 ZOOM MRS 1608 Protecting a project This operation lets you write protect the currently loaded project which disables project storing and editing When protect is ON the following operations will be impossible Erasing a project e Editing or recording on the recorder Changing the V take Editing a patch including module on off Recording or editing a rhythm pattern or rhythm song Saving deleting scenes making marker settings etc Creating a phrase loop Creating sample data for the pad sampler function 1 Reterto steps 1 2 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication PROJECT PROTECT on the display Then press the ENTER key The screen for setting the protect status to ON OFF is shown on the display 2 Turn the dial to select ON protect enabled or OFF protect disabled When a project is loaded for which protect is ON a lock symbol is shown in the top right of the display Lock symbol A change in the protect status becomes active immediately To return to the main screen after making the setting press the EXIT key several times Reference Pro
10. 166 Creating a new project 166 Checking the project size available hard disk capacity ois coed eh 167 Duplicating a 167 Erasing project 168 Changing the project name 168 Protecting a project 169 Reference MIDI 170 About MIDI s iair rne 170 What you can do using MIDI 170 Making MIDI related settings 171 Basic procedure 171 Setting the drum kit bass program MIDI channel od 171 Turning Timing Clock messages on or off 172 Turning Song Position Pointer messages on or tic tie Seed eee eae ers 172 Turning Start Stop Continue messages on or Off ee s See lack b NELLE 172 Turning Program Change messages on or Offic Saag do ha ass Geers 173 Turning MIDI Time Code MTC messages on or Offic rst ware eunt usados s tae eee ui dd ead 173 Using the SMF player 17 Reading an SMF into a project 174 Selecting the SMF output destination 175 SMF playback 176 Reference Other Functions 177 Playing several projects continuously sequence 177 Creating a playlist 177 Playlist playback
11. Ha 1 Copy destination drum kit number Copy destination drum kit name 5 Turn the dial to select the drum kit number to be used as copy destination To execute the copy press the ENTER key The drum kit setting is copied and the display returns to the drum kit selection menu To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 116 ZOOM MRS 1608 Adjusting the volume of each pad with the faders While playing a rhythm song or rhythm pattern you can adjust the volume for each pad in the currently selected drum kit by using the faders This is useful to adjust the volume of each instrument before mixdown 1 From the main screen press the RHYTHM key so that the key lights up 2 Press the DRUM key in the rhythm section and then the KIT PROG key The drum kit selection screen appears on the display 3 Press the DRUM MIXER key The key lights up and the display shows the currently selected pad bank pad number and volume setting Pad bank number Pad number Current volume setting 4 While playing the rhythm song rhythm pattern operate the faders to adjust the respective volume for each pad While the DRUM MIXER key is lit the 12 faders of the fader section are assigned to pads 0 9 x Pad 0 1 2 e e e e Pad 9 X
12. MARKER 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the trimming range start point data before the point specified here will be erased Press the ENTER key The display indication changes to Trm Src END Trim Src EHTI MEASURE BEAT TI 8 223 035 4 Te oe 4 Specify the trimming end point using the same procedure as in step 2 data after the point specified here will be erased If you press the PLAY We key the specified range will 52 ZOOM MRS 1608 be played D Press the ENTER key The indication TRIM SURE appears on the display To execute the trimming operation press the ENTER key When the trimming operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Fade in fade out of specified data range You can fade in or fade out the audio data over a specified range n gt ald NOTE The fade in out command does not simply alter the track volume Rather it rewrites the waveform data and is therefore not reversible once executed 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing to select the track Vtake for fade in or fade out and press the ENTER key The indication Fade Src START appears on the displa
13. 178 Using the tuner function 179 Using the chromatic tuner 179 Using other tuner types 180 Changing the function of the foot switch 181 Preventing digital copying of a master disc or master tape 182 Switching the level meter display type 182 Using an option card to connect to a computer eee eee ere I x exa 183 Hard disk maintenance 184 Basic maintenance procedure 184 Test restore integrity of data on internal hard disk SCanDIsSk xh E kDa D gp PRU 184 Returning system file data to factory default Factory Initialize 185 Returning the entire hard disk to the factory default All Initialize a 185 Hard disk maintenance using the supplied CD ROM 186 Specifications 187 Troubleshooting 188 Problems during playback 188 Problems during recording 188 Problems with effects 189 Problems with the rhythm section 189 Problems with MIDI 189 Problems with CD R RW drive 190 Other problems 190 Appendix 2 191 Effect Parameters 191 Insert Effect llle 191 Send return Effect 201 Effect Patch
14. 94 Pb aoe eS 89 90 Rear 14 Option 183 Connections 16 OrgChord 2 RES 100 Recorder socera ramin a na a aa 10 35 OFgBOoOt esis rarest eid aphid akon A matus 100 Recording 24 78 Qut point ie 40 Recording related troubleshooting Overdubbing 28 informations esua aaa EE EA 188 Recording BP Let s TeCcOrd i ou ode EC es ORC 21 Pad bank tok inus 89 MixdoWn c Reds 33 121 28 Sampler program 121 Recording the first 24 Using a rhythm pattern to play the pad Register 91 134 Repeat 37 Using the pads to play the pad sampler 133 Reese caa 147 Pad Reverse Changing the pad sensitivity 118 Reversing a range of audio data Track editing 54 Changing the sound and other settings for Rhythm 87 acli pad scade tec be kee oa was 114 Assigning a name to a rhyth
15. 15 Connections You can use either GUITAR BASS INPUT jack 1 or INPUT jack 1 and either GUITAR BASS Headphones INPUT jack 2 or INPUT jack 2 If both jacks are connected the GUITAR BASS INPUT jacks 1 2 are given priority Headphones Headphones eO eoeoe eo Headphone amplifier Front panel 262 6 The STEREO SUB OUT jack normally carries the same f N signal as the MASTER OUTPUT connectors You can J therefore also use it as a second headphone jack By changing an internal setting the jack can be made to carry a Headphones mix that is separate from the MASTER OUTPUT with level pan adjustments for each track input allowing use as a monitor send or effect send The output level can be adjusted with the knob at top right e The MASTER PHONES jack is intended as a stereo headphone jack It carries the same signal as the Headphones MASTER OUTPUT connectors The output level can be adjusted with the knob at top right You can connect the separately available Expression pedal foot pedal ZOOM FP 01 FP 02 to this jack for adjusting the effect parameter value ZOOM FP 01 FP 02 iiis P Foot switch ZOOM FS 01 You can connect the separately available foot switch ZOOM FS 01 to this jack for playback start stop co
16. Claves TMAmbi3 TMHard1 TMHard2 TMHard3 TMAco1 TMAco2 TMAco3 TMBend1 TMBend2 TMBend3 TMSynth CHHLive OHHLive CHHStdio CHHClear OHHClear FHHAco1 CHHBend OHHBend Gamelan Odaiko ChuDaiko Oedo Temple Engine Sonar Minor Major 213 Appendix MIDI note number chart Note number Pad Bank 1 Bank 2 Bank 3 0 KICK 36 35 61 1 SNARE 38 40 60 2 CLOSED HAT 42 44 68 3 OPEN HAT 46 54 67 4 TOM 1 50 48 64 5 TOM 2 47 45 62 6 TOM 3 43 41 63 7 RIDE 51 52 59 8 CRASH 49 57 70 9 EXTRA CYMBAL 53 55 69 X EXTRA 1 37 56 65 EXTRA 2 Instrument name 39 58 66 Instrument name Sticks Ride Cymbal 1 Claves Metronome Click Ride Bell Metronome Bell Tambourine Kick Drum 2 Splash Cymbal Kick Drum 1 Cowbell Side Stick Crash Cymbal 2 Snare Drum 1 Vibraslap Hand Clap Ride Cymbal 2 Snare Drum 2 High Bongo Low Tom2 Low Bongo Closed Hi Hat Mute High Conga Low Tom 1 Open High Conga Pedal Hi Hat Low Conga Mid Tom 2 High Timbale Open Hi Hat L
17. 1 Refer to steps 1 5 of Basic steps for V take editing to select the exchange source track V take Bring up the indication EXCHG on the display and press the ENTER key The exchange destination track V take is shown on the display EXCHG Im 1 1 2 Use the cursor left right keys and the dial to select the exchange destination V take and press the ENTER key The indication EXCHG SURE appears on the display 3 To carry out the exchange operation press the ENTER key once more When the exchange operation is completed the unit returns to the V take selection menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Track Editing Importing a V take from another project You can import any V take from another project into a specified track V take of the current project Any audio data on the destination V take are overwritten by the imported V take Track in import source project Import destination track 1 Reter to steps 1 5 of Basic steps for V take editing to select the import destination track V take and to bring up the indication IMPORT on the display Then press the ENTER key The name of the import source project is shown on the display IMPORT PR IE t Import source project name FRE
18. MTLO4 HIP18 2204 ENDINGO2 THRSO1 HIP19 2205 ENDINGO3 THRS02 HIP20 2206 ENDINGO4 PUNKO1 HIP21 2207 ENDINGO5 PUNKO2 HIP22 SHFLO1 ENDINGO6 FUSO1 HIP23 SHFLO2 ENDINGO7 FUSO2 DANCO 1 SHFLOS COUNT FUSOS DANCO2 SHFLO4 I BR BE BEB DD DO PDO DY PY DY PD PY NY PY PY NINI NINININI AllMute FUS04 DANCOS SHFLO5 FUSO5 DANCO4 SKA01 EMPTY FUSO6 DANCO5 SKA02 METRO34 FUSO7 DANCO6 FUSO8 DOP DO PO PTD DY imm mmm m m DY DO DY DO PO m DY PO PD DY PD PO mnm nm AI nm nm HOUSO1 DOPED PTD NINININI DY IO IO IO IO ITO IO IO IO IO IO PO IO IO IO IO IO LIO DY NINININI DY PY DY NINININI IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO IO LIO IO IO IO ISO SKA04 DOP MLM MO MED PO DY BPP PO DY PY DY DP PY PO NINININI BLD P PTD PO NINININI PO PO DY PD PO PY PY DO PINI NINININI NINI nm 210 METRO44 ZOOM MRS 1608 Appendix STANDARD ANALOG CLASSIC Name Name Standard DryFunk Basic
19. 9 sound Rhythm pattern source Drum kit bass program NOTE When an SMF is played in the above condition the rhythm song or rhythm pattern of the MRS 1608 will be played at the same time If you do not want to play the drum bass sound set the DRUM BASS status keys to OFF or select an empty rhythm song rhythm pattern The next diagram shows a setting example for using the MRS 1608 as an SMF player with a combination of internal and external sound sources In this example MIDI channel 9 of the SMF playing information is sent to the bass program MIDI channel 10 to the drum kit and the other MIDI channels to the MIDI OUT connector ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference MIDI External sound source CH 1 8 11 16 SMF CH 9 10 MIDI OUT Internal 94 sound Rhythm pattern Source Rhythm song NOTE When an SMF is played in the above condition the SMF playing information and the rhythm song or rhythm pattern information of the MRS 1608 will be sent to the internal drum kit bass program at the same time To use the drum kit bass program only for the SMF you must first select an empty rhythm song rhythm pattern e f the SMF contains Program Change or Control Change messages these will alter the corresponding parameters of the internal sound sources tone volume pitch Pitch Bend messages affect only the bass program l From the main screen press the UTI
20. Importing a sampler program from another project If desired you can import a sampler program that was created for another project into the current project To do this proceed as follows HINT The imported program will overwrite the sampler program currently selected for the pad sampler To keep a current program create a new empty program first and then import the sampler program from the other project 1 From the main screen press the RHYTHM key in the display section so that the key lights up 2 Press the DRUM and BASS keys in the rhythm section simultaneously Both keys light up In this condition the pad sampler can be used 3 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The display changes as follows UTILITY SPL 4 Verify that the indication UTILITY SPL PRG is shown and press the ENTER key The sampler program menu appears SPL PRG SELECT 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SPL PRG IMPORT on the display and press the ENTER key The display changes as follows In this condition you can select the project from which to import the sampler program 136 ZOOM MRS 1608 Import source Import source project name project number Turn the dial to select the project and press the ENTER key A sampler program from the selected project is shown IMPORT SPL FRG Program name Program number 7 e Turn t
21. The setting range is C B in semitone steps 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication DUO HARM SCALE on the display Then turn the dial to select the scale type and the pitch shift direction The following settings are available Maj Up Create harmony a major third up Min Up Create harmony a minor third up Maj Dn Create harmony a major third down Min Dn Create harmony a minor third down TWO SCALE Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication FEELING on the display Then turn the dial to select the speed with which the created harmony will reach the target pitch The setting range is 0 30 The larger the value the smoother the transition to the harmony TWO FEEL IH 7 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SOURCE LVL on the display and turn the dial to set the volume for the edit source The setting range is 0 127 A setting of 100 results in an unchanged level TWO SOURCE LVL 1 HINT When the SOURCE LVL parameter is set to zero the edit source will be muted and only the generated harmony is written to the track 8 To set the pan value for the edit source use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SOURCE Pan on the display and then turn the dial to adjust panning for the source The setting range is L100 fully left 0 center R100 ful
22. e TRIM Retain only a specified range of audio data and erase the rest e FADE I O Fade in out Perform fade in fade out over a specified audio data interval e REVERSE Reverse a specified range of audio data TimStrch Time Stretch Compress Change the duration of the entire audio data on a track without changing the pitch e PitchFix Apply pitch compensation to a specified range of audio data e HARMONY Harmony Generate Add 3 part harmony to a specified range of audio data e DUO HARM Duo Harmony Add 1 part harmony to a specified range of audio data 4 Press the ENTER key The screen for selecting the track and V take for editing appears The display shown below is an example for selecting the COPY command in step 3 Src TR 1 1 5 Use the cursor up down keys or the status keys and the dial to select the track 1 16 MASTER and V take number Src TR 5 1 On this screen V takes that are not currently selected can also be selected for editing For commands other than PitchFix HARMONY and DUO HARM when track 16 is selected turning the dial further to the right lets you select odd even track pairs track 1 2 track 15 16 etc or the master track shown as M ZOOM MRS 1608 49 Reference Track Editing NOTE You can also press the status keys for two adjacent odd even numbered mono tracks together to select these tracks
23. or bass program This section explains how to select the drum sound combination or the bass program octave scale to assign to the pads HINT The drum kit bass program can always be played with the pads regardless of the lit flashing out status of the RHYTHM key Playing a drum kit with the pads When playing a drum kit you can switch between three pad banks combination of drum sounds giving you a total of 36 sounds Reference Rhythm 1 From the main screen press the DRUM key The key lights up and a drum kit to play can be selected In the default condition of a project pad bank 1 is selected 2 Usethe BANK OCTAVE key in the rhythm section to switch the pad bank If you press the BANK OCTAVE key while a drum kit is selected the pad bank selection screen appears Fadi Drum eee FadBarnk 1 Pad bank number 3 Turn the dial to select the desired pad bank 1 3 The sounds assigned to the pads are switched immediately 4 uitthe pads to play Switch the DRUM status key between on and off as necessary and use the DRUM fader to adjust the volume 5 To play a specific pad repeatedly roll play press the STEP key in the rhythm section to bring up the following indication on the display EallFlaus SHC When you turn the dial at this screen the interval for roll play can be set as follows 2 4 8 4 quarter note 2 8 LIAC TEES half triplet
24. 2 Press the POWER switch on the rear panel of the MRS 1608 The indication GOODBYE SEE YOU appears on the display and the unit is turned off When a synthesizer or other electronic instrument is connected turn power to that device off after the MRS 1608 Caution You must use this method to turn off the power of the MRS 1608 Never turn off the power by disconnecting the AC adaptor plug from the DC 12V jack or by unplugging the AC adaptor from the AC power outlet In particular you must never turn the power off by unplugging the AC adaptor while the HDD ACCESS indicator is lit Doing so may damage the internal hard disk causing all data to be lost permanently ZOOM MRS 1608 19 Listening to a Demo Song When shipped from the factory the internal hard disk of the MRS 1608 contains two demo songs To listen to them proceed as follows Selecting the demo song On the MRS 1608 song data are managed in units called projects A project encompasses recorded audio data rhythm and effect settings and other information When you load a project the complete state in which that song was saved will be reproduced To load a demo song project from the hard disk proceed as follows 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT key in the display section The indication PROJECT SELECT appears on the display 2 Press the ENTER key Projects stored on the hard disk are shown in
25. 5 Use the cursor up down keys the keys the track parameter section to select a track parameter and adjust other parameters in the same way When a parameter is displayed pressing the corresponding key in the track parameter section toggles the parameter between on and off The parameters that can be selected for tracks 1 8 and tracks 9 10 15 16 are listed in the table on the next page HINT n the default condition of a project the SUB OUT SEND LVL and SUB OUT SEND PAN parameters are turned off For information on how to control these parameters see page 82 Some track parameters level EQ panning balance send return effect intensity etc can also be used for the drum bass track and input signals 29 Quick Tour Track parameter list Parameter Corresponding key Display Setting range Description EQ HI GAIN EQ HI FREQUENCY EQ HIGH key 12 12dB Adjusts high frequency range boost cut 500 18000 Hz Adjusts center frequency for high frequency range boost cut Adjusts mid frequency range boost EQ MID GAIN 12 1208 cut EQ MID Adjusts center frequency for mid FREQUENCY EG MIDI Key 01800049 frequency range boost cut EQ MID 01 10 Adjusts Q value bandwidth for Q FACTOR mid frequency EQ EQ LOW GAIN 12 12 DM lo
26. C Major D Major are programmed in a rhythm song the following harmony is created Source track GMaj CMaj DMagj e efit Gs 5 T T Ln 1 Generate harmony A NE Source track CMaj D Maj Write target track HINT Depending on the pitch of the source material and the rhythm pattern rhythm song setting the results of this command may be unpredictable When generating harmony using the rhythm song chords must be programmed for the rhythm song beforehand When no conversion is programmed as chord type in the rhythm song no harmony can be created at this point When generating harmony using chord information of the rhythm pattern the harmony is created for the same chord throughout NOTE For the harmony generate function to work properly the audio data should represent single notes recorded without applying delay reverb chorus or other effects ZOOM MRS 1608 57 Reference Track Editing 1 Selectthe rhythm pattern or rhythm song to be used for harmony generation When the selection is finished press the EXIT key to return to the main screen NOTE Make sure that the selected rhythm pattern rhythm song comprises suitable chord information 2 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing to select the track V take for harmony generation and press the ENTER key The indication
27. HINT When the SOURCE LVL parameter is set to zero the edit source will be muted and only the generated harmony parts are written to the track Tosetthe pan value for the edit source use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SOURCE Pan on the display and then turn the dial to adjust panning for the source The setting range is L100 fully left 0 center R100 fully right NOTE When the destination is a mono track the pan setting will have no effect 7 Usethe cursor left right keys and the dial to adjust the level and panning for the harmony parts CHORUS 1 3 in the same way By setting the LVL parameter to zero you can mute the respective part 8 To adjust the speed with which the created harmony parts will reach the target pitch use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication HARMONY FEELING on the display and turn the dial The setting range for the FEELING parameter is 0 30 The larger the value the smoother the transition to the harmony HARMONY IMG 7 58 ZOOM MRS 1608 9 Press the cursor down key to cause the counter indication to flash Then use the cursor left right keys and the dial to specify the start point for harmony generation You can also use the MARKER M4 gt gt keys ZERO M4 key and REW 44 FF keys to locate the point HINT The manual and automatic punch in punch out functions can also
28. INSERT EFFECT group Any ALGORITHM key CHORUS DELAY group CHORUS DELAY key e REVERB group REVERB key e MASTER FADER group MASTER status key When a group is enabled the respective key is lit and when the group is disabled the key is flashing HINT The on off setting for the TRACK PARAMETER group can be made for each track individually You can use the cursor up down keys to enable or disable all groups together except MASTER FADER group 3 When the setting is complete repeatedly press the EXIT key The main screen returns The settings made here are stored as part of the project 86 ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Rhythm This section explains the functions and operation of the built in rhythm section of the MRS 1608 About the rhythm section The rhythm section of the MRS 1608 uses internal drum sounds and bass sounds to generate rhythm accompaniment It can be used instead of a metronome by playing simple rhythm patterns or you can program a sequence of rhythm patterns and chord progression into the rhythm accompaniment for an entire song The rhythm section is made up of the following components Drum kits and bass programs The sound created by the rhythm section is produced by a drum kit and a bass program The drum kit is a combination of 36 drum percussion sounds such as kick snare hihat and conga A combination of drum percussion sounds and drum kits for u
29. Insert effect 1 Set the insert effect position to the input mixer 2 At the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display UTILITY TR EDIT 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY REC SRC on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows You can now select one of the following two signal types to be recorded on the track WET The input signal that has passed through the insert effect will be recorded on the track default setting DRY Only the unprocessed input signal will be recorded on the track Even in this case however the insert effect will be applied to the signal appearing at the MASTER OUTPUT jacks 4 Turn the dial to change the setting to DRY 5 When you have finished adjusting settings press the EXIT key several times The unit returns to the main screen NOTE The UTILITY REC SRC setting is stored for each project Before you begin recording other parts be sure to change the setting back to WET 146 ZOOM MRS 1608 Using the send return effect This section explains how to select and edit patches for the send return effect chorus delay reverb About the send return effect patches The reverb and chorus delay send return effects are separate and independent Reverb and chor
30. MultiTrak Recording Studio MRS 1608 v JJ MASTER SOLO Teac RECORDING C LDJEJEJEJEJEJEDEDEDIE CJ LJ T6 0 T Operation Manual ZOOM Corporation Reproduction of this manual in whole or in part by any means is prohibited USAGE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS In this manual symbols are used to highlight warnings and cautions for you to read so that accidents can be prevented The meanings of these symbols are as follows AN This symbol indicates explanations about extremely dangerous matters If users ignore this symbol and handle the device the wrong way serious injury or death could result Warning N This symbol indicates explanations about dangerous matters If users ignore this symbol and handle the device the wrong way bodily injury and damage to the equipment could result Caution Please observe the following safety tips and precautions to ensure hazard free use of the MRS 1608 Power requirements The MRS 1608 is powered by the sup
31. SweeperX Adds sharp sweep to one shot percussion FXgroove Rhythm machine sound N Lo amp Hi Boosts highs and lows and attenuates midrange N Lo Boost Emphasizes low end by pitch shifter FanFan Sound like talking into a fan A Alien Space creature sound for vocal Simulates analog multi track recording Duet Adds a child voice to female vocal or a female voice to male vocal N X Active Emphasizes attack Psyche Vocal gimmick effect in psychedelic style DeepDLY Delay for vocals useful when cutting shouts or sound o HeGas Duck voice after inhaling helium gas EMPTY DUAL MIC algorithm z F Name Comment Recommended L R input Vo Vo 1 For duets Vocals Vo Vo 2 Chorus for main vocal Vocals Vo Vo 3 For harmony Vocals AG Vo 1 Creates a street like character Acoustic guitar Vocal AG Vo 2 Different from AG Vo 1 in vocal character Acoustic guitar Vocal AG Vo 3 Aggressively modifies vocal character Acoustic guitar Vocal ShortDLY Short delay sound with effective doubling Microphones FatDrum For drum recording with single point stereo mic Microphones BothTone Tuned for male on L channel and female on R channel Vocals Condnser Simulat
32. T drive are aligned J m 5 e 4 Front Panel Fastenthe CD R RW drive with the four supplied panhead screws Then reattach the bottom plate with the screws removed in step 2 NOTE Use only the dedicated CD R RW drive CD 01 or CD 02 made by ZOOM Corporation ZOOM Corporation will not accept any responsibility for damage or third party claims arising from using any other drive 18 ZOOM MRS 1608 Power On Off This section explains the procedure for turning the MRS 1608 on and off Turning power on 1 sure that the MRS 1608 and peripheral equipment is turned off 2 Make sure that AC adapter instrument and monitor system or headphones are correctly connected to the MRS 1608 For information on connections refer to page 15 At this time the volume setting of the connected instrument and monitor system should be minimum When a synthesizer or other electronic instrument is connected turn power to that device on before the MRS 1608 3 Press the POWER switch on the rear panel Power to the MRS 1608 comes on the unit performs a self test and system settings are read Wait until the following indication appears on the display This is called the main screen MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER 4 Turn on the connected monitor system Turning power off shutdown 1 Turn power to the monitor system off
33. gt on the first line of the display turn the dial to move current point and then bring up the chord information input Screen again Em Am B7 Em Am 1 2 29 4 PATERNA PATTERNS 1234123412341234 HINT At a point where no chord information is input lt is shown to the left of the ROOT or CHORD indication This means that the immediately preceding information continues to be valid 8 Input the remaining chord data in the same way Measure 1 2 Reference Rhythm If you have made a mistake or want to make a change proceed as follows To change chord information Move to the location at which the chord data is input use the cursor up down keys to switch the display to ROOT or CHORD and turn the dial to change the chord information To delete chord information Move to the location at which the chord data is input use the cursor up down keys to switch the display to ROOT or CHORD and press the DELETE ERASE key The chord data root and chord will be deleted and the display will change to ROOT or lt CHORD 9 When you have finished press the STOP Bi key The unit returns to the rhythm song selection screen By pressing the PLAY We key in this condition you can check the rhythm song with the new chord information To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Entering other information A rhythm so
34. written Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Phrase 1 Phrase 2 An example for entering the formula O 1 2 x 8 is shown below QEAVE p 9 a 3 P ma E 74 ZOOM MRS 1608 HINT If the formula does not fit on two lines the indication scrolls by one character each If you use the cursor keys to move the input position the line scrolls accordingly If you make a mistake during input correct it as follows Inserting a number or symbol Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing position to where you want to insert a new number symbol Then enter the new number symbol Deleting a number or symbol Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing position to the number or symbol that you want to delete Then press the DELETE ERASE key When formula input is completed specify the track V take to which the phrase loop is to be written as audio data HINT The entered formula will be stored as part of the project also after writing the phrase loop This allows you to later call up the formula edit it and write the data again After writing the phrase loop it is not possible to write only a part of the data or add a phrase to the loop To make changes enter the new formula from the beginning to the end and then perform the writing operation Writing a phrase loop to a track This section explains how to create a phrase
35. Boost For hi fi finish Power Powerful low range Live Adds a live feel WarmMst Adds a warm feeling TightUp Adds a hard feeling 1930Mst Mastering with 1930 s sound LoFi Mst Lo fi mastering 2 S a BGM Mastering for background music ak RockShow Makes a rock style mix live E Exciter Lo fi mastering with slight distortion in mid and upper range A Clarify Emphasizes high end range E VocalMax Brings vocals to the foreground E RaveRez Special sweep effect using sharp filter A N FullComp Strong compression over full frequency range E ClearPWR Power tuning with emphasized midrange ClearDMS Enhances clarity and spaciousness Boosts overall sound pressure level EMPTY ZOOM MRS 1608 207 Appendix Send return Effect CHORUS DELAY No 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Name Comment Vocal Chorus adding color to vocals GtChorus Chorus for weak guitar sound Doubling Versatile doubling Echo Showy analog style delay Delay3 4 Dotted 8th note delay in syne with rhythm tempo Delay3 2 Dotted quarter note delay in sync with rhythm tempo FastCho Fast rated chorus DeepCho Versatile deep chorus ShortDLY Versatile short delay DeepDBL Deep doubling SoloLead Kee
36. EDIT key The screen for registering projects in the playlist appears The indication END OF LIST denotes the end of the playlist When the playlist is empty the indication END OF LIST appears at the beginning of the list 5 Turnthe dial to select the project to register at the beginning of the project The display indication changes as follows Project number and project name Number and name of the project registered in the playlist Playback number Position in the sequence where the project will be played MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER V take duration Length of the V take selected for the master track of the project in hours H minutes M seconds S and milliseconds MS NOTE Projects in which an unrecorded V take is selected for the master track cannot be registered in a playlist If the name of a desired project does not appear on the display check the V take selected for the master track e f the V take is less than 4 seconds long the master track cannot be registered in the playlist ZOOM MRS 1608 177 Reference Other Functions Press the cursor right key The display indication changes as follows The END OF LIST indication has moved to the second position In this condition you can select the second project to play 7 e Turn the dial to select the next project to play Use the same procedure to select projects for subsequent positions A m
37. PATTERN 0 PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 PATTERN 1 PATTERN2 7555551 An example for creating the rhythm pattern sequence 0 1 x 4 2 is shown below x p z 0 CA KICK E CEH p step 1 H 1 Reference Rhythm HINT If the formula does not fit on two lines the indication scrolls by one character each If you use the cursor left right keys to move the input position the line scrolls left and right accordingly For FAST input leading zeros are omitted For example pattern 001 is shown as 1 and pattern 050 as 50 The formula entered with FAST input is saved as part of a project By calling up the formula later you can edit it or use it to write the song NOTE The FAST method can only write a song in one go from beginning to end Entering rhythm patterns partly into the song is not possible To edit a rhythm song that was written with this method edit the formula and then write the entire song again or use step input 1 Press the SONG key and then the RHYTHM key to switch the rhythm section to rhythm song mode 2 Press the EDIT key The rhythm song mode edit menu appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication EDIT FAST on the display and press the ENTER key FAST input is now possible 4 Use the keys and pads of the rhythm section to enter the formula for creating the rhythm song Formu
38. PATTERN C Deleting entered rhythm pattern information Use the cursor left right keys to move to the position of the rhythm pattern information that you want to delete and press the DELETE ERASE key When rhythm pattern information was deleted the previous pattern will remain valid until the point where the next rhythm pattern information is input Delete PATTERN A Vv PATTERNA lt PATTERN Deleting a specific measure Use the cursor left right keys to move to the start position of the measure that you want to delete Press the cursor up key to bring up the indication on the display and press the DELETE ERASE key The confirmation DELETE appears Press the ENTER key The measure at the current position is deleted and subsequent rhythm pattern information moves forward When a measure at the beginning of a rhythm pattern for example first measure of a 2 measure pattern is deleted that measure only is deleted and the indication changes to PTN for the second measure Delete 1 measure PATTERN A PATTERNB PATTERND PATTERNC Y PATERNA PATTERNB PATTERNC Using FAST for pattern information input The FAST Formula Assisted Song Translator method developed by ZOOM uses simple formulas to specify rhythm pattern playback from start to end The follo
39. Repeatedly pressing the status keys for stereo tracks selects the odd numbered track even numbered track and stereo track in sequence When a single track has been selected as editing source for a command other than HARMONY DUO the editing target will also be a single track When two tracks or the master track have been selected as editing source the editing target will also be two tracks or the master track The currently selected V take for each track will be the target Press the ENTER key The subsequent steps will differ depending on which command was selected See the sections for the respective commands 7 When the editing command has been executed repeatedly press the EXIT key to return to the main screen NOTE After executing an edit command for rewriting the audio data on a track the original data cannot be restored To retain the condition before editing use the capture and swap functions p 65 for that track Copying a specified range of data You can copy the audio data of a specified range to a specified position on a specified track V take This action will overwrite the existing data at the destination location The copy source data will be unchanged Copy source track Copy target track 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing to select the copy source track V take and press the ENTER key T
40. Rhythm pattern name While this screen is shown the RHYTHM key in the display section is flashing This indicates that currently the Quick Tour rhythm section is being set up While the RHYTHM key is flashing or out the recorder and the rhythm section are always synchronized p 87 3 Turn the dial or use the cursor up down keys to select a pattern to use as guide rhythm 18 B oii 1 044 Up to 511 rhythm patterns can be used in a project 475 of these are preprogrammed For the other patterns EMPTY is shown When you turn the dial to select another rhythm pattern while a pattern is playing the new pattern will start after the current pattern has finished When you select a new pattern with the cursor up down keys the new pattern begins playing immediately In this example we will select a simple rhythm pattern as guide rhythm for use during recording If you select for example the rhythm pattern number 510 a quarter note metronome sound is heard 4 Press the PLAY P key in the transport section Lol e The selected rhythm pattern is played repeatedly in sync with the recorder operation The TEMPO key flashes according to the current tempo setting HINT f you press and light the RHYTHM key while the recorder is stopped you can play the rhythm pattern by itself During play the pads corresponding to the currently produced sound of the dr
41. When accessing a disc in the CD R RW drive which has audio files in a certain folder turn the dial to display the folder name When a folder is selected the indication Folder is shown in the right side of the display Folder name 124 ZOOM MRS 1608 When you press the ENTER key in this condition the files inside the selected folder are displayed Turn the dial to select the desired file By pressing the EXIT key you can return to the next higher level 4 When the file has been selected press the ENTER key Depending on the sampling frequency of the imported audio file the following applies Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz The indication IMPORT SURE appears on the display When you press the ENTER key the audio file is imported When the process is complete the sample selection screen appears again Sampling frequency other than 44 1 kHz When you press the ENTER key a selection screen for conversion to 44 1 kHz resampling appears Turn the dial to set resampling to ON or OFF When you press the ENTER key the indication WAV AIFF SURE appears Press the ENTER key once more to start the import process When the process is complete the sample selection screen appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT The name SAMPLxxx is automatically assigned to the imported sam
42. When searching for a note to erase set quantize to the same value as the smallest value used during recording or to a smaller value Otherwise the start of a note may be missed 11 when you have finished step input press the STOP W key The REC 0 key goes out and the rhythm pattern selection screen appears again By pressing the PLAY gt key you can check the rhythm pattern that you recorded ZOOM MRS 1608 99 Reference Rhythm 12 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Entering rhythm pattern chord information When you have recorded a rhythm pattern and you later set the chord information root chord type the bass phrase in a rhythm song will be transformed based on the original chord information of that rhythm pattern HINT For patterns not used in a rhythm song or for which no bass sequence is input this procedure is not necessary 1 Fromthe main screen press the PATTERN key in the rhythm section The rhythm pattern selection screen appears and the RHYTHM key flashes 2 Turn the dial to select the pattern for which to specify chord information root type and press the RHYTHM key so that the key is constantly lit In this condition you can create and edit rhythm patterns 3 Press the EDIT key The rhythm pattern edit menu appears on the display 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication EDIT OrgRoot on the displa
43. key In this condition you can select the source project from which to import Project name Project number ZOOM MRS 1608 117 Reference Rhythm 5 Turn the dial to select the source project and press the ENTER key The subsequent steps differ depending on which selection was made in step 4 When ALL was selected Verify that the indication IMPORT SURE is shown on the display Proceed to step 7 When PATTERN was selected The source rhythm pattern is shown on the display Turn the dial to select the desired rhythm pattern and press the ENTER key You can now select the target pattern Proceed to step 6 Turnthe dialto select the import target and press the ENTER key The indication SURE appears on the display 7 To carry out the import process press the ENTER key When all patterns songs have been imported the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears again If a single pattern was imported the display of step 5 returns again To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Editing various settings of the rhythm section This section explains how to edit various settings that affect the entire rhythm section such as adjusting the pad sensitivity or adjusting the volume of the metronome Basic procedure T
44. key to begin recorder playback 5 When you come to the punch in point press the REC 0 key or press the foot switch The REC 0 key lights up and track recording begins from that location When you come to the intended punch out point press the REC 0 key or the foot switch once more The REC 6 key goes out and the MRS 1608 switches from recording to playback 7 To stop the recorder press the STOP W key 8 To check the newly recorded content locate to a point before the punch in point and press the PLAY gt key ZOOM MRS 1608 39 Reference Recorder Using auto punch in out Auto punch in out is a function that lets you specify beforehand the region to be re recorded Punch in will occur automatically when you reach the starting location In point and punch out will occur automatically when you reach the ending location Out point This is convenient when you cannot operate the MRS 1608 because you are playing the instrument yourself or when very fast playback record switching is required In order to perform auto punch in out you must first specify the In point the point where the recorder switches from playback to record and Out point the point where the recorder switches from record to playback and then perform the recording operation In point Track Playback Recording Playback Out point l Raise the fader of the track on which you want to perfor
45. Cv 3 MARK key EQ LOW key MARKER M4 key 1 L MARKER P key c STORE key Cr CHORUS DELAY SEND key EXIT key p EDIT key REVERB SEND key SUB OUT SEND 3 SUB OUT SEND key key 3 V TAKE key ENTER key Cursor keys SOLO Fader section Status keys 1 8 9 10 15 16 MASTER STRACK RECORDING MASTER mi Transport section 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 s0 11142 1314 15 16 17 8 ZERO M4 key REW 44 key FF gt gt key HI KICK SNARE CLOSEDHAT OPENHAT TOM 2 RIDE CRASH EXTRACYMBAL EXTRA EXTRA2 STOP B key ETE NN Me REC 0 key PLAY gt key Faders 1 8 9 10 15 16 MASTER ZOOM MRS 1608 13 Parts of the MRS 1608 Rear panel PHANTOM ON OFF switches INPUT jacks 1 8 a a a a BALANCE UNBALANCE impur A om fo NZ Oe Em wWm 3 e
46. E Effect parameter Setting value HINT To change the effect type repeatedly press the cursor up key to display the effect type name and then turn the dial Turn the dial to change the setting For details on the effect types that can be selected for reverb or chorus delay and on the range of each effect parameter refer to the appendix at the end of this manual 7 e Repeat steps 5 6 as necessary to edit other effect parameters 8 When you have finished editing press the EXIT key The send return effect patch select screen appears again NOTE Keep in mind that if you select another patch without first storing the edited patch the changes will be lost To keep the results of your editing session refer to the following section Storing swapping send return effect patches A patch that you have edited can be stored in any location of the same send return effect You can also store an existing patch in another location to create a copy of that patch Interchanging the position of patches swapping is also possible 1 e Atthe send return effect patch select screen press the STORE key The currently selected patch goes into the store standby condition In this condition you can perform the store or swap operation STORE Patch number 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication STORE TO or SWAP TO 3 Turn the dial to select the number of
47. ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 8 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Loading an audio CD into a project The MRS 1608 can read audio data from an audio CD inserted in the CD R RW drive and record these data on any track V take of the internal recorder The data can then be played and edited in the same way as other tracks This is convenient to use drum or guitar phrases from a sampling CD Data can be read only as entire audio CD tracks Specifying a range is not possible To use only a part of a track perform trimming of unwanted portions after loading p 52 NOTE The audio data are written to the currently selected V take of the target track If required select the appropriate V take beforehand Material subject to copyright CD analog record tape video broadcast etc is subject to legal restrictions regarding copying Mixed mode CDs or copy controlled CDs cannot be loaded l Insert the disc from which to load audio data into the CD R RW drive 2 Perform steps 2 5 of Playing an audio CD p 157 to bring up the CD player screen and select the desired track of the CD 3 Press the REC 06 key The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select the target for the audio data READ DST TR 1 2 4 Use the status keys or the dial to select the track for recording the data Only
48. From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY PHRASE on the display and press the ENTER key The phrase screen appears 3 Turn the dial to select the phrase to delete 4 Press the DELETE ERASE key in the rhythm section The indication DELETE SURE appears on the display 5 To carry out the delete process press the ENTER key once more The phrase is deleted and the phrase screen appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Writing a phrase loop to a track Phrases contained in a phrase pool can be played in a specified order repeated automatically and written as a phrase loop to a specified track V take After writing the phrase loop the target track V take will contain actual audio data which can then be played and edited in the same way as regular audio data Phrase A Phrase B Phrase Phrase D V take Write Audio data ZOOM MRS 1608 73 Reference Phrase Looping Using FAST input for the phrase loop When creating a phrase loop the FAST Formula Assisted Song Translator method developed by ZOOM can be used to specify phrase sequence and number of plays The keys and pads of the rhyt
49. If you continue playback to the end of the V take all audio data of that track V take are stretched or compressed HINT It is also possible to change the stretch compress ratio during playback At the point where you want the time stretch compress function to end press the STOP W key The indication TimStrch SURE appears on the display 7 To execute the time stretch compress operation press the ENTER key When the time stretch compress operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT To apply time stretch compress only to a part of the song such as a drum pattern or guitar riff use the copy function and trimming function to create a V take of the desired length first Reference Track Editing Compensating the pitch of a specified range This editing command lets you specify a KEY and SCALE and align all audio data in a specified range to the nearest note in that scale PitchFix Instead of the scale it is also possible to use a phrase from a bass sequence as reference for pitch compensation HINT The edited audio data after pitch compensation will overwrite the existing data NOTE For pitch shift to operate correctly the audio data should represent single notes recorded without applying delay reverb chorus or other effects 1 Refer to steps 1
50. ON OFF keys together you can select a combination of any two inputs Non adjacent inputs can also be selected The lower numbered input is assigned to the L channel and the higher numbered input to the R channel HINT If you have selected two inputs for the effect the inputs will be shown together on the display in the format INx y where x y is the respective input number 4 When the insert position selection is completed press the EXIT key The main screen returns Insertion to track output immediately before MASTER fader 1 At the main screen press the INPUT SOURCE key in the effect section The current insert position is shown on the display 2 Turn the dial to select the insert position The status key of the selected track or the MASTER status key lights up in orange These keys can also be used to select the insert position If you press the adjacent status keys of an odd numbered and even numbered input in succession track x 2 is selected ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Effects 3 When the insert position selection is completed press the EXIT key to return to the main screen Selecting the patch for the insert effect This section explains how to select the patch for the insert effect 1 Press one of the ALGORITHM keys in the effect section Select the key that corresponds to the desired algorithm The respective key lights up and the display shows the
51. Pat xxx where xxx is the pattern number is automatically assigned You can edit this pattern name as necessary 1 Fromthe main screen press the PATTERN key so that the key lights up The rhythm pattern selection screen appears and the RHYTHM key flashes 2 Turn the dial to select the pattern and press the RHYTHM key The RHYTHM key is now constantly lit and a rhythm pattern can be created or edited 3 Press the EDIT key The rhythm pattern edit menu appears on the display 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication EDIT NAME on the display and press the ENTER key ZOOM MRS 1608 101 Reference Rhythm In this condition you can edit the rhythm pattern name 5 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing position to the character you want to change and turn the dial to select a character For information on available characters refer to page 36 6 Repeat step 5 until the name is as desired 7 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Editing rhythm patterns This section explains how to copy existing rhythm patterns or erase them to return them to the blank condition Copying a rhythm pattern You can copy a rhythm pattern to another pattern number This is useful to create variations of a rhythm pattern 1 Fromthe main screen press the PATTERN key so that the key lights up The rhythm pattern selection s
52. Playing the pad sampler sounds in a rhythm pattern This section explains how you can use the pad sampler sounds during real time input and for playback of a rhythm pattern HINT e You can also use a pattern created in this way in a rhythm song The intensity with which you hit the pads will also be recorded NOTE The pad sampler and drum kit bass program cannot be used concurrently To use a rhythm pattern or rhythm song with drum bass together with the pad sampler record the rhythm pattern play on an audio track first gt 44 1 From the main screen press the DRUM and BASS keys in the rhythm section simultaneously The rhythm section sound is switched to the pad sampler 2 Press the PATTERN key in the rhythm section and press the RHYTHM key in the display section Both keys light up and rhythm pattern input and editing becomes possible The display shows the currently selected rhythm pattern PAD BANK OCTAVE 1 3 Turn the dial to select an empty rhythm pattern 4 Press the ZERO 4 key to return to the beginning of the rhythm pattern If necessary adjust the number of measures time signature and the quantize setting of the rhythm pattern p 93 5 it necessary use the DBANK OCTAVE key and the dial to select the pad bank After selecting the pad bank press the EXIT key to return to the previous screen 134 ZOOM MRS 1608 Press
53. Repeat this step to enter marks at all other points where you want to change the mix 2 Save the mix setting to be used at the start of the song as well as all other mix settings to be used in the middle of the song as scenes 3 While the recorder is stopped press the ZERO M4 key in the transport section to move to the recorder start position The beginning of the song counter zero location already contains the mark number 00 You can assign the starting scene to this mark 4 Press the MARK key When you press the MARK key at a location where a mark symbol is shown a screen will appear in which you can assign a scene to the corresponding mark MARE ED SCEHE amp 5 58 i 32410 NOTE If you press the MARK key at a location where no mark symbol is shown a new mark will be assigned to that location 5 Turn the dial to select the number of the scene you want to assign to this mark and press the ENTER key The scene will be assigned to the mark ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Mixer 1 Scene number HINT To cancel a scene assignment turn the dial until the display indicates Use the MARKER 44 gt gt keys to locate the next mark at which you want the mix to change and assign a scene in the same way Z When all desired scenes have been assigned move to the start position of the recorder and start playback Each time the song reaches a mark
54. Simple wet overdrive sound Mellow Lead sound with a sweet tone MultiDst Strong all round sound Bright Crisp sound Melody Tastefully seasoned sound for melodies V Blues Vintage blues sound BlueFngr Bluesy sound for finger picking HDR Drv Wet hard rock sound Cry Lead Zoom s original cry effect sound ZakWah Lead sound with auto wah LA Std L A studio style big chorus sound TheRing Ring modulator simulation JimVib Remade famous vibrato Creamy Mild fuzz EMPTY ACO BASS SIM algorithm 2 o Name Comment AcoSIM 1 Simulates unadorned acoustic guitar sound AcoSIM 2 Simulates acoustic guitar with beautiful chorus AcoSIM Shimmering detuned sound with no modulation FullSize Simulates acoustic guitar with full sized body Light12 Light 12 string guitar sound BsSIM 1 Simulates a tight picked bass BsSIM 2 Chorus bass simulation for melody lines BsSIM 3 Auto wah bass simulation O N o0 FingBass Flanging sound often used in 1980 s fusion UniSolo Guitar and bass unison sound EMPTY BASS algorithm 2 Comment BS Pick Tight sound for playing with a pick BS Od Retro distortion sound BS Drv Hard distortion sound BS Fingr All round sound for finger picking BS
55. Tight Funk 1 Reggae 1 2 o Ooo N oO oO A OI N 2 OIN 2 o Name LiveRock Standrd1 EpicRock Modern 1 Live 1 Live 2 Studio Standrd2 Epic 1 No 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Punch Near Room 1 Analog 1 Analog 2 Room 2 Analog 1 HipHop 1 HipHop 2 HipHop 3 Techno 1 Epic 2 Analog 2 Snap Pop Brush Techno 2 Modern 2 Reggae 2 Techno 3 Modern 3 Loose Percuss Brush Funk 2 SFX Benddown Percuss Minor7 Percuss SFX Major7 SFX Minor7 Major7 i E A E ES o A N Bass Programs Name 2 1 o Finger Pick Slap AcostcBS Synth BS TechnoBS BSHrmnic TechAnlg AnaTouch Lo Sine HrmnicBS Saw Wave Square ZOOM MRS 1608 211 Appendix STANDARD Name BDTight BDAcsk1 BDAcsk2 BDClsic1 CYMCrsh1 CYMCrsh2 CYMSpls1 ANALOG Name CYMSpls2 CYMRide1 CYMRide2 CYMCup BDClsic2 BDStdrd1 BDStdrd2 BDStdrd3 BDDgAnat1 BDDgAna2 EXRim1 EXRim2 EXCwbel EXClap1 BDHard BDReso BDAnalg1 BDAnalg2 BDDgAnat1 BDDgAna2 BDPunch BDAttack EXClap2 EXMu
56. Turn the dial to select the ON setting D PRTCT OFF D PRTCT ON MRS 1 608 OUTPUT MRS 1 608 OUTPUT DIGITAL jack DIGITAL jack Mixdown Mixdown oo MD DAT recorder MD DAT recorder Digital copying Digital copying is possible is not possible Y MD DAT recorder MD DAT recorder 5 return to the main Screen press the EXIT key several times Switching the level meter display type The level meter below the display can indicate the level of the signal after passing through the level controls faders post fader or the signal before passing through the level controls faders pre fader You can change the setting as follows HINT When sending the signal of a given track input to the STEREO SUB OUT jack the signal before the fader is sent By switching the level meter to the pre fader setting you can monitor the signal level sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY SYSTEM on the display and press the
57. You can also set the volume and panning for each pad 1 Fromthe main screen press the RHYTHM key in the display section and then press the DRUM key and BASS key in the rhythm section simultaneously Both keys light up and the pad sampler can be used 2 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The rhythm utility menu appears UTILITY SPL FRG 3 Verify that the indication UTILITY SPL PRG is shown and press the ENTER key The sampler program menu appears SPL PRG SELECT 4 Verify that the indication SPL PRG SELECT is shown and press the ENTER key The display changes as follows You can now select a sampler program to load into the pad sampler Reference Pad Sampler 5 Turnthe dial to select the sampler program and press the ENTER key The selected sampler program is loaded into the pad sampler When loading is complete the unit returns to the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen NOTE An unused program number cannot be selected To create a sampler program from scratch you must first create a new program p 128 Press the KIT PROG key in the rhythm section When you press the KIT PROG key at the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen a menu for making settings for each pad appears Pad bank FAD 1 8 EMPTY Sample name Pad number If no sample has been assigned to the displayed pad the sample name fie
58. channels ZOOM MRS 1608 77 Reference Mixer Recorder section Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 Tracks 9 40 r Tracks 11 12 Tracks 13 14 4 From directly after MASTER fader lt Master track 4 To directly before MASTER fader Tracks 15 16 Bass program Drum kit Rhythm section DRUM BASS E MASTER OUTPUT To master track Track mixer Assigning input signals to recording tracks This section explains how to adjust the sensitivity for signals input from the INPUT jacks 1 8 and GUITAR BASS INPUT jacks 1 2 and how to send them to tracks in the recorder section l Make sure that the instrument or mic that you want to record is connected to the respective INPUT or GUITAR BASS INPUT jack NOTE You can use either GUITAR BASS INPUT jack 1 or INPUT jack 1 and either GUITAR BASS INPUT jack 2 or INPUT jack 2 If both jacks are connected the GUITAR BASS INPUT jacks 1 2 are given priority 2 From the main screen press the ON OFF key of the input to which the instrument or microphone is connected so that the key is lit in red Input selection is performed with the ON OFF keys in the input section If you press an ON OFF k
59. m e Je oe emm ame MIC key MASTERING key DUAL MIC key 8X COMP EQ key CHORUS DELAY PATCH SELECT REVERB keys V A keys LINE key ZOOM MRS 1608 12 Parts of the MRS 1608 Rhythm section Display section SONG key Display BASS key PATTERN key DRUM BASS DRUM key status keys DRUM BASS SONG PATTERN Lj tJ DELETE ERASE key INSERT COPY key r 1r KIT PROG key DRUM MIXER key BANK OCTAVE key ko Pm i UTILITY TRACK 101 key EDIT key Pads RECORDER key m m RHYTHM key EFFECT key PROJECT key STEP key DRUMI BASS key TEMPO faders Control section LCD CONTRAST control NEW PROJECT key HDD ACCESS indicator Track parameter section a CD R RW key nI 3 USB key BOUNCE 1 AUTO PUNCH IN OUT key L5K EQ HIGH key SCENE key Ge LU A B REPEAT key EQ MID key CLEAR key
60. no playing information is entered but the step advances by an interval corresponding to the current quantize value This becomes a rest see illustration below 1 Atthe rhythm pattern screen select an empty rhythm pattern number If the RHYTHM key is flashing press it so that it is constantly lit 2 Press the DRUM key In this condition drum kit sounds are assigned to the pads on the top panel 3 As necessary press the BANK OCTAVE key to select the pad bank which contains the sound you want to input When the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the previous screen 4 Press the REC 0 key The key lights up and the display indication changes as follows In this condition step input is possible Quantize value H M s MEASURE BEAT TICK aad 1 Tt Measure Beat MARKER The first line of the display shows the quantize value and the counter shows the current position is shown in measures beats ticks 5 Use the cursor up down keys to select the quantize value This setting becomes the length of the note you want to enter The setting can be changed at any time during step input Reference Rhythm n PE Quarter note SEEN Eighth note 12 Eighth triplet note 16 Sixteenth note default 24 Sixteenth triplet note 32 Thirty second note Ln NE tick 1 48 of quarter note HINT The quantize value setting is linked to the quantize
61. pitch bend value Number 0 F 1 Note On messages can be recorded into a rhythm pattern 2 Transmitted Messages Status Description BnH BnH CnH F1H F2H F8H FAH FBH FCH 07H 7BH pp dd sl 00H sh Note Off kk note number Note Off kk note number Note On kk note number vv velocity Channel Volume vv volume value All Notes Off Program Change pp program number MTC Quarter Frame dd data Song Position Pointer shsl song position Timing Clock Start Continue Stop NOTE n MIDI Channel Number 0 3 System Exclusive Messages No SysEx messages are recognized transmitted 218 ZOOM MRS 1608 Appendix MIDI implementation chart HardDisk Recorder Date 10 Feb 2004 Model MRS 1608 MIDI Implementation Chart Version 1 00 Transmitted Recognized Function Basic Default Memorized Channel Changed Default 3 Messages x Altered Note 12 75 Number True voice eckckckckckckckck ck kokck ck ck ko Velocity Note ON Note OFF After Key s Touch Ch s Pitch Bend Volume Control Expression Change All Sounds Off Reset All Ctrls Prog Change True ek ke de de e de de e e ke de ke e e ke System Exclusive Otr Frame 30 frame non drop System Song Pos Song Sel Common Tune System Clock Real Time Commands Aux Local ON OFF 11 Notes OFF Mes Active Sense sages Reset Notes MTC quarter fra
62. press the EXIT key The tuner is turned off and the insert effect and send return effect will revert to the original condition HINT If required you can change the reference pitch A 440 Hz The procedure is the same as for the chromatic tuner Reference Other Functions Changing the function of the foot switch With the default settings of a project a foot switch connected to the FOOT SW jack can be used to control play stop of the recorder To use the foot switch to control manual punch in out recording p 39 use the following procedure to change the internal setting 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY SYSTEM on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows SYSTEM FOOT SH 3 Make sure the indication SYSTEM FOOT SW is shown on the display and press the ENTER key The function currently assigned to the foot switch will be displayed FOOT SH PLY_STP 4 Turn the dial to select or PUNCH IO The settings are as follows e PLY STP Each push of the foot switch toggles between play and stop of the recorder section PUNCH IO The foot switch can be used to perform manual punch in out Pressing the foot switch has the same effect as pressi
63. refer to p 80 The lit out status of the REVERB or CHORUS DELAY key shows the on off status of that module Each push of the key toggles the status 3 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key Editing a send return effect patch This section explains how to edit a send return effect patch I e Press the REVERB key or CHORUS DELAY key in the effect section 2 Use the PATCH SELECT W A keys or the dial to select the patch to edit SEHD CHO TeepCho Ho T Press the EDIT key The display will indicate EDIT and a screen will appear in which you can edit the patch When the EDIT key is pressed the effect type selected for that send return effect is shown CHORUS Effect type ZOOM MRS 1608 147 Reference Effects 4 To change the effect type turn the dial When the effect type is changed the effect parameters will also change accordingly TELA HINT If the contents of a patch have been changed the EDIT indicator in the upper part of the display will change to EDITED When the setting is returned to the original condition the indicator reverts to EDIT 5 Use the cursor up down keys to select the effect parameter that you want to edit The first line of the display shows the effect type and the second line shows the name and current value of the effect parameter EDIT
64. reversing and press the ENTER key The indication Rvrs Src START appears on the display MEASURE 8 801 1 Blane 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the reversing start point 3 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes to Rvrs Src END Src MEASURE BEAT MARKER 4 Use the same procedure as in step 2 to specify the reversing end point If you press the PLAY We key the specified range will be played D Press the ENTER key The indication REVERSE SURE appears on the display To execute the reversing operation press the ENTER key When the reverse operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Changing the duration of a specified range of data You can change the duration of the specified range of audio data on a track without changing the pitch time stretch compress The stretched or compressed data can be written over the old data on the same track or pasted on another track while leaving the source data unchanged Time stretch compress E AB cDE NOTE The editing start point for time stretch compress is always from the beginning of the V take The point where you stop playbac
65. 1608 a a a a ef oe op po Se a po po St po po S po po a St a St op S Sa ato St op a St Sf a a al 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 2 1 1 aj p po po po lp 209 Appendix LATNs2Va POPO1 HOUSO02 REGGO1 LATNs2FA POPO2 HOUS03 REGGO2 LATNs2VB HOUS04 REGGO3 LATNs2Vb POP04 1 REGGOA LATNs2FB 5 2 AFROO1 MidEs1VA POPO6 AFROO2 MidEs1Va POPO7 4 AFROOS MidEs1FA POPO8 5 AFRO04 MidEs1VB 9 TECHO6 AFROO05 MidEs1Vb POP10 TECHO7 AFROO6 MidEs1FB po a a POP11 TECHO8 AFROO7 Name POP12 TECHO9 AFROO8 Standard RnBo1 TECH10 LATNO1 ROCKO1 RnBo2 DnBO01 LATNO2 ROCKO02 RnBOS3 DnB02 LATNO3 ROCKO3 RnB04 DnBO03 4 ROCK04 RnB05 DnB04 LATNO5 ROCKO05 RnB06 DnB05 LATNO6 ROCKO6 RnB07 DnBO06 LATNO7 R
66. 3 BAND COMP Lo Fi module Parameter SENS MID SENS LOW Type MLT CMP XOVERLO XOVER HI SENS HI MIX HIGH MIX MID MIX LOW Divides the signal into three frequency bands and specifies the compression and the mix amount each CHARACTR COLOR DISTORTN DRY LVL Degrades the audio quality of the sound TONE EFX LVL Lo Fi Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description XOVER LO 50 16000 Adjusts the frequency for bass midrange division XOVER HI 50 16000 Adjusts the frequency for midrange treble division SENS HI 0 24 Adjusts the compressor input sensitivity for the treble range SENS MID 0 24 Adjusts the compressor input sensitivity for the midrange SENS LOW 0 24 Adjusts the compressor input sensitivity for the bass range MIX HIGH OFF 24 6 Adjusts the treble mix amount MIX MID OFF 24 6 Adjusts the midrange mix amount MIX LOW OFF 24 6 Adjusts the bass mix amount CHARA 0 10 Specifies the character of the filter COLOR 1 10 Adjusts the color DIST 0 10 Adjusts the degree of distortion TONE 0 10 Adjusts the tone EFX LVL 0 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect sound DRY LVL 0 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the direct sound ZOOM MRS 1608 199 Appendix NORMALIZER module Type Parameter GAIN Set the input level of the 3 BAND COMP Lo Fi module NORMLZR Parameter description
67. 7 1 2 700M CORPORATION INPUTS INPUT INPUTS weurs 5 O wr INPUT INPUTT MultiTrak Recording Studio MIRS 1608 OUTPUT POWER switch MIDI OUT connector DIGITAL LINE INPUT 7 8 jacks Expansion board slot PMTPSITJAGR DC 12V jack MIDI IN connector MASTER OUTPUT jacks Front panel Input output section CD R RW drive bay Input output section MASTER PHONES level control STEREO SUB OUT level control GUITAR BASS INPUT controls 1 2 T 8 6 BASE asd MASTER SUB OUT INPUT 1 INPUT2 FOOTSW EXPPEDAL PHONES PHONES STEREO SUB OUT jack EXP PEDAL jack FOOT SW jack ZOOM MRS 1608 14 When connecting stereo output devices such as a synthesizer or CD player connect the L output of the external device to the odd numbered INPUT jack and the R output to the even numbered INPUT jack To supply 48V phantom power to a condenser mic connect the mic to the INPUT 3 4 or 5 6 jacks and set the corresponding PHANTOM ON OFF switch to ON Connect your instrument microphone audio devices and MIDI devices as shown in the following diagram Synthesizer or sampler etc 0000 0000 0000 R L Dynamic or condenser microphones The INPUT 1 8 jacks accept either XLR plugs or mono phone plugs balanced unbalanced ZOOM MRS 1608 being pulled out i
68. CD R RW key in the control section The CD R RW menu appears 3 Verify that the indication CD R RW AUDIO CD is shown on the display and press the ENTER key HINT Erasing a CD RW disc is also possible from the backup menu gt p 161 After you bring up the indication BACKUP CDRW ERS on the display and press the ENTER key the disc can be erased in the same way as described below 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication AUDIO CD CDRW ERS on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 5 Use the cursor up down keys to select one of the following CD RW disc erase methods NORMAL Default setting Information from all areas of the disc is erased This takes longer than the QUICK erase operation but all contents of the disc are reliably erased This method is recommended Required time is max 74 minutes for a 650 MB disc and 80 minutes for a 700 MB disc QUICK Only the track information on the CD RW disc is erased This requires less time than the NORMAL erase operation ZOOM MRS 1608 159 Reference Creating a CD Press the ENTER key The display now shows the indication CDRW ERS SURE 7 To carry out the erase process press the ENTER key once more The erasing operation starts When the operation is finished the display shows CDRW ERS COMPLETE By pressing the EXIT key instead of the
69. CD ROM R RW disc inserted in the CD R RW drive and use it as a phrase If the optional UIB 02 card is installed in the MRS 1608 you can also copy audio files from the hard disk of a computer to the hard disk of the MRS 1608 and then use such files as a phrase Project Phrase pool 3 Phrase Phrase Phrase Phrase CD ROM R RW Phrase Audio track NOTE After loading all audio files are played with a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz If necessary files with other sampling frequencies can be converted resampled to 44 1 kHz Discs that do not comply to ISO 9660 Level 2 specifications will not be recognized CD R or CD RW discs that have not been finalized will not be recognized 3 Phrase from another project You can load any phrase from a project stored on the internal hard disk of the MRS 1608 HINT It is not possible to directly load an audio track from an audio CD as a phrase You must first read it into a track 1 16 of the MRS 1608 160 and then load the audio track into the phrase pool Once you have loaded phrases into the phrase pool you can specify various parameters such as playback range and volume level and then you can specify a playback sequence and number of times each phrase is played The result can then be written to any track V take as a phrase loop Project Phrase pool Phrase hrase hrase hrase Jio
70. ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 182 ZOOM MRS 1608 SYSTEM FOOT SH 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY LVL MET on the display and press the ENTER key The current level meter setting will be displayed MET rit The settings have the following meaning POST default setting The meter shows the level of the signal after passing through the faders and REC LEVEL control PRE The meter shows the level of the signal before passing through the faders and REC LEVEL control 4 Turn the dial to change the setting 5 return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Reference Other Functions Using an option card to connect to a computer If the optional USB board UIB 02 is installed in the MRS 1608 the internal hard disk of the MRS 1608 can be recognized by a computer Windows Macintosh as an external hard disk This allows audio data transferring project backup etc To make this possible connect the computer and MRS 1608 with a USB cable and switch the MRS 1608 to USB mode as described below HINT The UIB 02 supports Windows 98 98SE Me 2000 XP and MacOS 9 1 9 2 MacOS X Depending on the computer and the operating system driver installation may be required For details see the on line manual supplied with the UIB 02 1 Verify that the recorder is stopped Then connect the option board to a
71. ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Assigning a name to a rhythm song You can edit the name of any rhythm song as follows 1 From the main screen press the SONG key so that the key is lit 2 Press the RHYTHM key The key lights up and a rhythm song can be created or edited 3 Turn the dial to select the rhythm song whose name you want to edit and press the EDIT key The rhythm song edit menu appears EDIT FROM TEBHSF S 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication EDIT NAME on the display and press the ENTER key The rhythm song name is shown The flashing section indicates the character that can be changed ZOOM MRS 1608 113 Reference Rhythm 5 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and turn the dial to select a character For information on available characters refer to page 36 Repeat step 5 until the name is as desired 7 When the name has been input press the EXIT key The rhythm song name is changed and the display returns to the rhythm song edit menu To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Creating your own drum kit You can create your own original drum kit by assigning sounds with specific settings for volume pitch panning etc to the pads and giving the kit a unique name It is also possible to copy an existing drum kit and edit only
72. In this step you will learn how to record another instrument on track 2 while listening to the content you recorded in step 2 Adding parts in this way is called overdubbing 3 1 Making settings for input sensitivity and insert effect As in step 2 adjust input sensitivity and recording level and make settings for the insert effect l Connect the next instrument you want to record and press the ON OFF key so that it is lit in red 2 Adjust input sensitivity and recording level in the same way as in step 2 1 3 Select the algorithm and patch for the insert effect in the same way as in step 2 2 4 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the main screen 3 2 Selecting a track and recording Now you re ready to record the second instrument on track 2 while playing the content of track 1 and the guide rhythm 1 Repeatedly press status key 2 until the key is lit in red Track 2 is now in the recording standby condition Verify that the status key 1 and the DRUM BASS status keys are lit in green 2 Set the MASTER fader to 0 dB and use fader 2 to adjust the monitoring level If necessary set the recorder to playback and operate faders 1 2 and the DRUM BASS faders to adjust the monitor level balance between tracks 3 To begin recording press the ZERO M4 key to return to the beginning of the song Then hold down the REC 6 key and press the PLAY P key After the pre co
73. MIDI keyboard or a computer to send play information Note On Off messages to the MIDI IN connector of the MRS 1608 to play various sounds of the rhythm section When creating a rhythm pattern you can use an external MIDI keyboard instead of the pads on the MRS 1608 to input play information You can send Note On Off messages from the MRS 1608 when hitting the pads or when playing a rhythm song rhythm pattern These can be used to play an external MIDI sound source Send sync information The MIDI OUT connector of the MRS 1608 can supply MIDI Timing Clock MIDI Clock and MIDI Time Code information to a MIDI sequencer or other external MIDI device Playback and other transport operations as well as locate operations can be synchronized Send receive program change information The MRS 1608 can receive Program Change messages from an external MIDI device to switch the sound of the rhythm section The MRS 1608 can also send out Program Change messages when the sound is switched allowing an external device to perform synchronized switching Send receive control change information Via the MIDI IN connector the MRS 1608 can receive Control Change messages from an external MIDI device to control the level of the drum bass track Via the MIDI OUT connector the MRS 1608 can send out Control Change messages according to drum bass level information contained in a rhythm song SMF playback The MRS 1608 can read SMFs
74. OUTPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT connectors and record the song on an external recorder or use the internal master track of the MRS 1608 to record The master track is a dedicated pair of stereo tracks that is separate from the normal audio tracks When you select the master track as recording track the signal after the MASTER fader is recorded The content recorded on the master track can later be used as source material for creating an audio CD R L a DIGITAL MASTER OUTPUT OUTPUT To master track DRUMBASS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MASTER 3 fl This section explains the mixdown procedure when you select the second method i e recording on the master track 5 1 Using the mastering insert effect By applying the insert effect immediately before the MASTER fader you can process the stereo mix signal for mixdown If you select the MASTERING algorithm at this time you can use the mastering effect for processing the stereo mix NOTE While the insert effect is inserted immediately before the MASTER fader you cannot use the effect for processing during recording or for post processing of a track To apply the insert effect to the stereo mix proceed as follows ZOOM MRS 1608 Quick Tour Changing the insert position of the insert effect l From the main screen press th
75. RW disc that has been completely erased 2 From the main screen press the CD R RW key in the control section The CD R RW menu appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication CD R RW BACKUP on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 4 Verify that the indication BACKUP SAVE is shown on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select the project to be backed up Project name Project number Reference Creating a CD 5 Turn the dial to select the project and press the ENTER key This selects the project that will be backed up The display now shows the space required for the backup in MB megabytes Press the ENTER key The name of the folder to be used for backup appears A folder is a hierarchical unit that will be created on the backup media when the backup is executed data for one project are stored in the same folder When the backup is executed a new folder is created on the CD R RW disc with the name PROJxxx where xxx is the project number This name can be edited FdrHanmae PRO TEIS 1 7 To change the store destination folder name use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and then turn the dial to change the character The following characters can be used Numerals 0 9 Letters A Z Sy
76. Repeatedly press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key to call up the desired command The following editing commands are available e ERASE Erase the audio data on a specified track V take e COPY Copy the audio data of a specified track V take to another track V take e MOVE Move the audio data of a specified track V take to another track V take e EXCHG Exchange Exchange the audio data of a specified track V take with the data of another track V take IMPORT Import any track V take from another project saved on the hard disk HINT If necessary you can also change your selection of track and V take from this screen D Press the ENTER key The subsequent steps will differ depending on which command was selected in step 4 See the sections for the respective commands When the editing command has been executed repeatedly press the EXIT key to return to the main screen NOTE After executing an edit command for rewriting the audio data on a track the original data cannot be restored To retain the condition before editing use the capture and swap functions p 65 for that track Erasing a V take You can erase the audio data on a specified V take The V take is returned to the non recorded condition Erase gt 1 Refer to steps 1 5 of Basic steps for V take editing to select the track V take to erase and to bring up the indication ERASE on the display Then press the ENTER ke
77. Slap Crisp slap sound BS Comp Sound with attack controlled by picking dynamics BS Edge Tight sound with an edge BS Solo Chorus sound for melodies A N BS Octve Sound with an upper octave mixed in BS Wah Funky bass with auto wah EMPTY ZOOM MRS 1608 203 Appendix MIC algorithm z Comment Vo Stnd Standard vocal effect Vo Rock Rock vocal effect Vo Balld Ballade vocal effect with detuned chorus Vo Echo Vocal echo Vo PreC1 Smooth listenable sound for condenser mics Vo PreC2 Adds depth for condenser mics Vo PreD1 Improves definition for dynamic mics Vo PreD2 Makes sound fatter and wetter Vo Robot Robot voice as in SF movies AG Live Sound for mic recording with a live feel not only for guitar AG Brght Bright and crisp sound for mic recording 2 S AG Solo Gorgeous solo sound AG Edge Acoustic guitar recording sound with enhanced edge E AG Strum Acoustic guitar recording sound for strumming A ForWind Sound with distinctive mid range E Crisp sounding short delay E o ForPiano Enhances depth and definition A AG Mix 1 Enhanced sound for strumming E AG Mix 2 Enhanced sound for arpeggio
78. T 4x4 T 1 4 CURVE 0 10 Adjusts the attack curve EXCITER 1 5 Adjusts the frequency PS FIX WAH 1 50 Adjusts wah effect center frequency LowBoost 0 10 Emphasizes the low frequency range SIZE 1 10 Adjusts the spatial width WET LVL 0 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect sound DRY LVL 0 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the direct sound ZOOM MRS 1608 193 Appendix Selects the changing width OFF Frequency stays constant PEDAL Use the expression pedal to change the frequency R MODE UP Minimum maximum DOWN Maximum minimum HI Setting value gt maximum LO Minimum setting value Selects the control waveform Up Saw Rising sawtooth wave Up Fin Rising fin wave DownSaw Falling sawtooth wave R WAVE DownFin Falling fin wave TRI Triangle wave TRIxTRI Second power triangle wave SINE Sine wave SQUARE Square wave Adjusts the control waveform cycle 1 2 Eighth note 1 Quarter note R SYNC 2 Half note 3 Dotted half note 1b 4b 1 measure 4 measures Selects the pitch change type 1 Semitone lower original 2 Original semitone lower 3 Doubling detune original 4 Detune original doubling 5 Original 1 octave higher 6 1 octave higher original 7 Original 2 octaves lower TYPE 8 2 octaves lower original 9 1 octave lower origina 1 octave higher original 10 1
79. To erase the performance of all pads While holding down the DELETE ERASE key press the DRUM status key While you are holding down both keys the performance of all pads is erased from the drum sequence Drum sequence lt DELETE ERASE DRUM Snare P DA dd DA D Y A A A Kick J 5 5 7 When you have finished real time recording press the STOP W key Rhythm pattern recording will stop Press the PLAY We key to hear the pattern that you recorded NOTE When you select an empty pattern and record it the pattern name Pat xxx where xxx is the pattern number is automatically assigned You can edit this pattern name as necessary p 101 e You can use step input to add playing information to a rhythm pattern recorded with real time input Bass sequence real time input For real time input of a bass sequence you play the pads of the MRS 1608 1 Atthe rhythm pattern screen select an empty rhythm pattern number If the RHYTHM key is flashing press it so that it constantly lit ZOOM MRS 1608 95 Reference Rhythm 2 Pressthe BASS key so that the key lights up In this condition you can play the bass program with the pads Your play will be recorded as a bass sequence 3 As necessary press the BANK OCTAVE key to switch the scale and octave of the bass program 4 Hold down the REC 0
80. a computer into a folder named WAV AIFF immediately under the root directory top level folder of the internal hard disk The files must have the extension for WAV files or AIF for AIFF files NOTE To copy audio files to the internal hard disk the optional UIB 02 card is necessary For information on using the option card see page 183 Any subfolders in the WAV AIFF folder are not recognized by the MRS 1608 The following procedure will not allow you to first listen to the audio files Confirm file content and file name before you start the procedure 1 Refer to steps 1 7 of Basic steps for sample importing to bring the indication WAV AIFF onto the display Then press the ENTER key The display now shows IMPORT CD ROM and you can select the source device IMPORT CD ROM 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select the source device CD ROM CD R RW drive or IntHDD internal hard disk and press the ENTER key The unit searches for WAV AIFF files on the specified device When files are found their names are listed on the display THEME T Le bc File name HINT If you select CD ROM as source without a disc in the drive the indication IMPORT Ins Disc appears on the display and the tray of the CD R RW drive opens To continue insert a disc containing audio files and press the ENTER key 3 Turn the dial to select the audio file to import
81. a part of it The drum kit can then be saved on the hard disk as part of the project Changing the sound and settings for each pad You can specify the sound volume pitch panning and other parameters for each pad to create your very own drum kit 1 Fromthe main screen press the RHYTHM key so that the key lights up Creating a drum kit is possible both in rhythm pattern mode and rhythm song mode 2 Press the DRUM key in the rhythm section and then the KIT PROG key The name of the drum kit selected for editing appears on the display Kit number I Standard Drum kit name 3 Turn the dial to select the drum kit that you want to edit and press the EDIT key The menu for editing individual pad settings appears Pad bank PAD 1 6 Pad number EDStdrds 0891 Selected item sound in this example Setting value of item 4 it necessary press the DBANK OCTAVE key and use the dial to switch the pad bank To return to the original display press the EXIT key 114 ZOOM MRS 1608 5 Use the cursor left right keys to select an item to set The following items are available Instrument sound Lets you select a single drum percussion sound from the currently selected drum sound set to assign to a pad For a list of numbers and corresponding sound names refer to the appendix at the end of this manual e PITCH Adjusts the pitch of the drum percussion sound for
82. are sent directly to the MASTER fader The pan controls of the input mixer can be used to adjust the panning value of the signal sent to the MASTER fader When a recording track is selected the pan setting of the input mixer has no effect on the signal By using the bounce function you can apply the send return effect to the input signal for recording p 42 Adjusting the signal for each track track parameters The input mixer and track mixer let you adjust various aspects for each track called track parameters such as panning and send return effect intensity This section describes how to adjust track parameters l Press any key in the track parameter section Pressing any of the keys in the track parameter section brings up the respective track parameter on the display The keys that are active for the target track input light up Keys for inactive parameters and for parameters not included in that track input are out 2 Use the cursor left right keys or the status keys and ON OFF keys to select the track input HINT To select a single track from a pair of stereo tracks such as track 9 or track 10 press the status key repeatedly n 8 track recording mode eight inputs can be used simultaneously In this case you can select the input with the respective ON OFF key and adjust track parameters for each input except for the record level The display will show the number of the input IN
83. as follows In this condition you can select the recording source signal The following choices are available MASTER Signal immediately before MASTER fader default setting e DRUM TR Drum track BASS TR Bass track 4 Turn the dial to select DRUM TR or BASS TR as recording source 5 Press the EXIT key several times to return to the main screen Recording While playing the audio tracks you can now record the rhythm section play on any audio track 1 Press the BOUNCE key The key lights up 2 Repeatedly press the status key for the track on which you want to record until the key is lit in red In this condition the signal of the track selected in step 4 of Selecting drum bass track as recording source will be recorded HINT To record drum tracks in stereo select two tracks as recording destination If only one track is selected the recording will be in mono 3 Verify that the RHYTHM key is out and that the rhythm song or rhythm pattern that you want to record is selected or that the sounds that you want to play are assigned to the pads 4 Set the recorder to playback and adjust the drum bass track output level Adjust levels while watching the level meter and make sure that no signal clipping occurs 5 Move to the start point of the recorder and start recording The rhythm pattern rhythm song play is recorded on the audio track If you hit the p
84. bass loop 1 EB 04 1B Funk bass loop 2 EB 05 1A Dark bass loop 1 1 EB 05 1B Dark bass loop 1 2 EB 06 1A Funk bass loop 1 1 EB 06 1B Funk bass loop 1 2 Gt 01 1A Acoustic guitar loop on A maj Gt 01 1B Acoustic guitar loop on A min Gt 01 1C Electric guitar loop on C min Gt 01 1D Rockabilly guitar loop on A min Gt 01 1E Funk guitar loop on 7 9 Gt 01 1F Funk guitar loop on D min9 Gt 01 1G Hard rock guitar loop on B min Gt 01 1H Rock guitar loop on A min AG 01 1A Analog bass loop 1 AG 01 1B Synth bass loop 1 AG 01 1C Synth bass loop 2 Synth Bass AG 01 1D Synth bass loop 3 AG 01 1E Analog bass loop 2 AG 01 1F Analog bass loop 3 AG 01 1G Synth bass loop 4 AG 02 1A Synth loop 1 AG 02 1B Synth loop 2 AG 02 1C Synth loop 3 AG 02 1D Synth loop 4 AG 02 1E Synth loop 5 AG 02 1F Synth loop 6 AG 03 1A String amp synth loop AG 03 1B String loop 1 AG 03 1C String loop 2 AG 03 1D String loop 3 FX 01 1A Fx loop 1 FX 01 1B Fx loop 2 FX 01 1C Fx loop 3 FX 01 1D Fx loop 4 Synth Rhythm Synth Textures FX Loops With the factory default settings project 001 contains these phrases ZOOM MRS 1608 216 MRS 1608 Hard Disk Contents The hard disk in the MRS 1608 is composed of two partitions called MRS USR and MRS FAC The partition contains files to perform hard disk
85. be used at this point 10 e To startharmony generation hold down the REC 0 key and press the PLAY gt key Recording starts The display indication changes as follows CHORD 012918 76 0 When the second line of the display reads CHORD the chord of the current rhythm pattern rhythm song is shown By using the cursor left right keys you can display and edit the parameters of steps 5 8 HINT When playing the harmony the drum bass track will also be played Use the faders as required to adjust the level 11 When recording has progressed to the point where you want harmony generation to stop press the STOP W key The indication HARMONY SURE appears on the display 12 To carry out harmony generation press the ENTER key The audio data of the specified range are written When the process is complete the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Reference Track Editing Generating a 1 part harmony from a specified range of audio data You can specify a KEY and SCALE and shift the pitch of the audio data by a third up or down to create a 1 part harmony This is called the Duo Harmony function The pitch shifted audio data can be either added to the source material or written to another track V take For example when KEY C and SCALE Maj
86. beats ticks l From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The utility menu appears 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY SMF on the display and press the ENTER key The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SMF OUTPUT on the display and press the ENTER key In this condition you can decide whether to enable SMF playback DOUTFLIT 4 Verify that the setting is ON and press the EXIT key In the default condition of a project the setting is ON If it was set to OFF turn the dial to select ON 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SMF FILE SEL on the display Press the ENTER key In this condition you can select an SMF imported into the project for playback FILE SEL SER HINT If required you can delete the selected SMF from the project To do this select the SMF to delete and then press the DELETE ERASE key in the rhythm section The indication SURE appears Press the ENTER key to delete 7 e Turn the dial to select the SMF for playback and press the ENTER key The file is selected and the display returns to the SMF menu 8 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times 9 To play the SMF press the PLAY P key The SMF is played in
87. captured data 66 ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Phrase Looping 67 Which kind of phrases can be used 67 Loading a phrase 68 Basic phrase loading steps 68 Importing a phrase from the current project 69 Importing a WAV AIFF file 70 Importing a phrase from a different project 71 Adjusting phrase parameters 71 Copying a phrase 73 Deleting phrase 73 Writing a phrase loop atrack 73 Using FAST input for the phrase loop 74 Writing a phrase loop to a track 75 Reference Mixer 77 About the mixer 77 Assigning input signals to recording tracks 78 Adjusting the signal for each track track parameters 80 Linking two tracks stereo link 82 Assigning an input track signal to the SUB OUT Jacke osi Lond aee Mira te 82 Using the solo function 84 Saving recalling mixer settings scene function 84 Savingascene 84 Recalling a scene 85 Switching scenes automatically 85 Deleting certain parameters from a scene 86 Reference Rhythm 87 About the rhythm section 87
88. drive 2 From the main screen press the CD R RW key in the control section The CD R RW menu appears 3 Verify that the indication CD R RW AUDIO CD is shown on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication AUDIO CD FINALIZE and press the ENTER key The display indicates the total number of tracks on the CD R RW disc The counter indicates the total playing time of all tracks on the disc including pauses in hours H minutes M and seconds S Number of tracks F IMAL Te Boman Seams TRACKS 12 a 3659 246i MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER Playing time 5 Press the ENTER key The indication FINALIZE SURE appears on the display 158 ZOOM MRS 1608 To carry out the finalizing process press the ENTER key once more The finalizing process starts When the process is finished the display shows FINALIZE COMPLETE 7 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times HINT A CD RW disc can be returned to the blank condition also after finalizing by erasing all data Reference Creating a CD Erasing a CD RW disc The entire information on a CD RW disc audio data or backup data can be erased thereby returning the disc to the blank state 1 Insert the disc to erase into the CD R RW drive 2 From the main screen press the
89. for the insert effect You can edit these patches if desired to alter the sound or the effect depth The patches available for each algorithm are listed below Algorithm Patch number range CLEAN 0 29 DIST 0 49 ACO BASS SIM 0 19 BASS 0 19 MIC 0 49 DUAL MIC 0 49 8x COMP EQ 0 19 LINE 0 49 MASTERING 0 29 HINT When EMPTY is shown as the patch name the patch is empty Selecting such a patch will have no effect 4 While playing your instrument at the maximum level readjust the recording level and make sure that the REC LEVEL indicator does not light The recording level may change according to the selected patch To prevent clipping readjusting the REC LEVEL control may be necessary 5 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times HINT To record without using the insert effect press the BYPASS key in the effect section The key lights up and the insert effect is bypassed 2 3 Selecting a track and recording Now we will record the guitar sound with the insert effect applied on track 1 l From the main screen repeatedly press the status key 1 until the key is lit in red 8TRACK RE JAmOOO 1 2 3 4 The status keys are used to select the recording track and to switch muting for each track on and off Each time you press a status key the key will cycle through the following states Status key
90. gt gt jump to the exact marker point keys to 2 Press the CLEAR key in the control section The selected mark will be deleted and subsequent marks will be renumbered NOTE A deleted mark cannot be recovered tis not possible to delete mark number 00 located at the beginning of the song ZOOM MRS 1608 47 Reference Recorder Making settings for pre count operation In the default condition of a project a pre count of four beats is heard before the start of recording The number of beats and the pre count volume can be changed as follows 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY PreCount on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows FPreCount 3 To change the number of pre count beats press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to make the selection OFF The pre count is turned off 1 8 A pre count of 1 8 beats is heard e SPECIAL A special pre count as follows is heard Number of pre count beats When the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the screen of step 2 4 To change the volume of the pre count use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PreCount VOLUME on the display and p
91. hard disk The CD R RW disc is then written in a single operation With this method the disc will be automatically finalized When recording by album the V take last selected for the master track of each project will be selected as source material There are two methods for recording by album Track at once TAO The master track of each project selected for the album is written in a separate operation When a CD R written with track at once is played on a CD player a pause of 2 seconds will occur between tracks Reference Creating a CD Disc at once DAO The master tracks of all projects selected for the album are written in a single operation When a CD R written with disc at once is played on a CD player there will be no pause between tracks If necessary you can use marks set in the project as PQ subcode information specifying track start stop position and other items to split up a single project into multiple tracks HINT You can include playlist information created with the sequence play function in the album p 156 NOTE Before starting the procedure use the trimming function on the V takes to be used as source material l Insert a CD R RW disc into the integrated CD R RW drive Use a blank CD R RW disc or a CD RW disc that has been completely erased 2 Verify that the V takes you want to use for the audio CD are selected for the master tracks of the projects 3 From the main screen press
92. is no empty rhythm pattern erase an unneeded pattern p 103 4 Press the EDIT key The rhythm pattern edit menu appears ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Rhythm 5 To set the quantize value make sure the indication EDIT QUANTIZE is shown on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows The quantize value is the smallest note unit for recording a pattern When performing real time input your play is recorded using the note steps selected here The default setting is 16 a sixteenth note Turn the dial to select one of the following quantize values Then press the EXIT key Aduersus Quarter note Bess Eighth note 12 5 Eighth triplet note 16 Sixteenth note default 24 Sixteenth triplet note 32 Thirty second note Hl oes tick 1 48 of quarter note When you press the EXIT key the rhythm pattern edit menu appears again HINT The quantization setting applies to all rhythm patterns 7 To set the rhythm pattern time signature use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication EDIT TimSig on the display and press the ENTER key The current time signature setting appears on the display 4 4 beat 8 Turn the dial to select the beat and then press the EXIT key to return to the rhythm pattern edit menu The setting range is 1 8 1 4 8 4 9 set the length number of measures of th
93. is the track input name will be shown when another track or input is called up For this track input the SUB OUT SEND parameter cannot be modified 3 Turn the dial to set the parameter to OFF In this condition the signal level to be sent from each track input to the STEREO SUB OUT jack can be adjusted individually HINT You can also switch between ON and OFF by pressing the SUB OUT SEND key By selecting ON you can return to the original condition at any time 4 Use the cursor left right keys and status keys to select the track input and turn the dial to adjust the level of the signal sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack When the project is in the default condition the SUB OUT SEND LVL parameter is set to zero for all tracks inputs A setting of 100 will result in a unity gain 0 dB signal being sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack TR1 SUB SEHD LVL k Reference Mixer 5 Press the cursor down key until the following indication appears Then turn the dial to set the panning value of the signal sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack The panning value setting range is L100 fully left 0 center R100 fully right By pressing the cursor up key you can return to the condition of step 4 B SEND Fan 2 Repeat steps 4 5 to adjust the output level for all track input signals sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack You can set the SUB OUT SEND parameter for a track input to OFF by pressing
94. loop and write it as audio data to a specified track V take 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY PHRASE on the display and press the ENTER key The phrase screen appears PHRASE REST ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Phrase Looping 3 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key once more The phrase utility menu appears on the display PHRASE IMPORT 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PHRASE CREATE on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows This screen lets you select a track V take for writing the phrase loop CREATE TR 1 1 5 Use the cursor up down keys or the status keys and the dial to select the track V take to which to write the phrase When track 16 is selected turning the dial further to the right selects tracks in odd numbered even numbered pairs 1 2 7 8 etc or the master track Pressing two status keys for odd even numbered tracks together selects the tracks as two mono tracks When a stereo track two mono tracks or the master track is selected the V take currently selected for the two specified tracks or the master track becomes the writing target NOTE By repeatedly pressing the status key of a stereo
95. mix before recording on the master track Send return effect The send return effect is internally connected to the send return loop of the mixer section The MRS 1608 has two types of send return effects reverb and chorus delay and these two can be used simultaneously The send levels of the input mixer or track mixer adjust the effect depth of the send return effect Raising the send level will send the corresponding signal to the input of the effect and the signal processed by the effect will be returned immediately before the MASTER fader and mixed with the other signals Insert effect 1 Recorder section Track 1 OUTPUT Track 2 Track13 14 Input mixer Track 15 16 Rhythm ti DRUM section BASS Insert effect EB Track mixer 3 MASTER Input mixer Track mixer CHORUS DELAY SEND REVERBSEND T REC LEVEL 0000 OOOO DRUM BASS 1344 15 16 REVERB 1 2 m Send return effect m m Send return effect IE 138 ZOOM MRS 1608 Using the insert effect This section explains how to select the position for the insert effect how to select a patch and how to edit the patch About insert effect patches T
96. note 1 s 8th note 1 8 us 8th note triplet 1 4 16th note 1 6 16th note triplet 1 8 32nd note 1 12 32nd note triplet 1 16 64th note 1 24 64 note triplet 7 Toentera note hit the pad corresponding to the note and then press the STEP key The note is recorded and the unit advances by the step duration set in step 5 You can also use the BANK OCTAVE key to select a different octave before hitting a pad Reference Rhythm HINT The intensity with which you hit the pad is also recorded on the bass sequence By hitting several pads during input you can create a chord The maximum number of simultaneous sounds in the rhythm section is 24 drum bass 8 To enter a rest press only the STEP key If you press the STEP key by itself the position advances by one step duration of quantize value but no play information is recorded Ms MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER 0015 8 9 Repeat steps 7 8 while changing the quantize value and duration as necessary to enter the desired bass pattern When you reach the end of the pattern the unit automatically returns to the first measure letting you continue the input 10 To erase an entered note repeatedly press the STEP key to move to the position that you want to erase Then hold down the DELETE ERASE key and press the respective pad The note recorded at that point is erased and the pad goes out NOTE
97. odd numbered even numbered pairs of mono tracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 stereo tracks 9 10 15 16 or the master track MASTER can be selected D Press the ENTER key The recording destination is selected and the indication READ CD SURE appears on the display When the track already contains data the indication OverWrt is shown This indicates that existing data will be overwritten when the operation is carried out To carry out the read process press the ENTER key Loading data from the audio CD starts When loading is complete the unit returns to the CD player screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 7 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times 160 ZOOM MRS 1608 Backup and restore This section explains how you can use the CD R RW drive in the MRS 1608 to back up a project to a CD R RW disc and how to restore a project from a disc backup You can either create backups for individual projects or save all projects in a common operation Saving a single project to CD R RW disc You can select any project and save it on a CD R RW disc for backup HINT If the size of the project is larger than the capacity of the CD R RW disc you can create a backup spanning multiple volumes 1 insert a CD R RW disc into the CD R RW drive To back up a project use a blank CD R RW disc or a CD
98. of the monitoring system while playing your instrument 3 To begin recording press the ZERO M4 key to return to the beginning of the song Then hold down the REC 0 key and press the crane The REC 6 key and PLAY We key light up and a pre count of 4 beats is heard Then recording will begin Record your instrument playing while listening to the guide rhythm from the rhythm section HINT The number and the style of the pre count clicks can be changed gt p 48 f the input signal is distorted refer to step 2 1 to adjust the input sensitivity and recording level 4 When you have finished recording press the STOP key The REC 6 key and PLAY P key will go out and Basic operation of transport keys REW 44 key Moves the current position back in 1 second steps Movement speed can be increased by holding down the REW 44 key and pressing the FF gt gt key ZERO 44 key Returns the recording will stop The indication wait is briefly shown on the display and then the main screen reappears NOTE The duration of the wait period may differ Never turn power to the unit off while wait is being shown on the display Otherwise recorded data may be lost and damage to the unit may occur 5 To listen to the recorded content press the ZERO M4 key to return to the beginning of the song and then press the PLAY gt key ON 44 gt gt T
99. on the display 3 Turn the dial to select the drum kit 0 126 whose setting you want to change and press the EDIT key The menu for making settings for each pad appears 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the name of the drum kit on the display Standard 5 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and turn the dial to select a character For information on available characters refer to page 36 Repeat step 5 until the name is as desired 7 When the name has been input press the EXIT key The drum kit name is changed and the display returns to the drum kit selection menu To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Copying a drum kit You can copy the currently selected drum kit to another kit number This is useful to create variations of a drum kit NOTE If the number selected as copy destination already contains a drum kit it will be overwritten Use this operation with care 1 Fromthe main screen press the RHYTHM key so that the key lights up 2 Press the DRUM key in the rhythm section and then the KIT PROG key The drum kit selection screen appears on the display 3 Turn the dial to select the drum kit that you want to copy 4 Press the INSERT COPY key The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select the drum kit number to be used as copy destination TO
100. or from the listener Perform steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication UTILITY POSITION and press the ENTER key Then select one of the following settings PLAYER Left right pan setting applies as seen from the player drummer LISTENER Left right pan setting applies as seen from the listener audience 120 ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Pad Sampler This section explains the pad sampler function which lets you import short sound passages from audio tracks or a CD ROM and assign these to the pads for playing How the pad sampler works The pad sampler is a function which lets you assign material from audio tracks or a CD ROM to the pads of the MRS 1608 for playing This can be used to add effect sounds to a song or play a rhythm pattern rhythm song with your original sounds The material samples used for the pad sampler can be taken from an audio track or from an audio file on a CD ROM The samples are stored on the hard disk of the MRS 1608 in a special area called the sample pool A maximum of 1000 samples can be stored The playback range can be set individually for each sample see illustration below To use the pad sampler samples are loaded from the sample pool into memory and assigned to the pads of the MRS 1608 Up to 36 samples with a combined playing time of 22 second converted to mono can be used at one time A combination of such assigned samples is called a sampler p
101. order from the beginning of the song If you add a new mark between two existing marks the subsequent marks will be renumbered Add a mark Mark r3 r7 Dum num Dd number cl lt Y 4 g S Mark p 1 3 Dui rad raum number DUE eu e V Song C HINT Mark number 00 is already set at the beginning of the song the counter zero location This cannot be changed Locating a mark Here s how to move to the location of a mark This can be done in two ways you can use key operations or specify the mark number directly Using keys to locate 1 From the main Screen press either the MARKER lt or gt gt key in the control section Each time you press the key the unit jumps to the next mark before or after the current location Mark Current location Song lt gt gt C MARKER MARKER MARKER es Specifying the mark number to locate l From the main screen use the cursor left right keys to cause the mark number on the counter to flash 2 Turn the dial to select the desired mark number As soon as the number is changed the recorder jumps to that number Reference Recorder Deleting a mark Here s how to delete a mark that you assigned 1 Locate the mark that you want to delete A mark can only be deleted when it exactly matches the current location Make sure that the mark symbol is shown If not use the MARKER M
102. perform backup Check whether audio data have already been written to the CD R RW disc Such a disc cannot be used for backup Cannot read a backup spanning several discs When a project backup spans several discs insert disc number 1 When the entire hard disk was backed up insert the first disc that contains data of the desired project Other problems Cannot save a project The project cannot be saved if the protect setting is on Turn protect off p 169 Cannot read an audio file from CD ROM or CD R RW Check whether the audio file has the correct extension WAV or AIF An audio file from a CD R RW that has not been finalized cannot be read Cannot record on an external recorder connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack Check whether the digital input has been selected as recording source on the external recorder Also make sure that the external recorder has locked to the sampling frequency of the input signal Make sure that the external recorder supports the S P DIF audio format Cannot create new project or copy a project If the display indicates PRJ FULL the project memory has been used to maximum capacity Delete unneeded projects to free up memory One of the following messages is shown when attempting to execute a command There is not enough free space on the CD R RW disc Insert the disc with the number xxx The disc in the CD R RW drive is not an aud
103. press the BYPASS key in the effect section The BYPASS key lights up and the insert effect is bypassed Pressing the BYPASS key once more enables the effect again 4 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key The flow of the signal that passes through the insert effect will change as shown below depending on the insert location and the destination of the signal after passing the effect Using mono input insert effect on mono input mono track EFFECT Using stereo input or mono input x 2 insert effect on mono input mono track L aM EFFECT R Using stereo input or mono input x 2 insert effect on stereo input stereo track EFFECT Using mono input insert effect on stereo input stereo track EFFECT i Sending insert effect output to stereo track or MASTER fader EFFECT Sending insert effect output to mono track EFFECT HINT With the 8x COMP EQ algorithm the 8 channel signals are processed separately by the HPF compressor and EQ effects Input and output for each channel therefore is always mono Editing the insert effect patches The effect modules of the insert effect have various effect parameters that can be adjusted to make detailed changes to the character of the effect By editing the effect parameters you can obtain the desired sonic result For some effect modules you can also change the effect type For example the MODULATION DELAY ef
104. press the BANK OCTAVE key The pad bank selection screen appears FAD SMPL FadEBank ZOOM MRS 1608 133 Reference Pad Sampler 6 Turn the dial to select the desired pad bank 1 3 The sound assigned to the pads is switched immediately When the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the original screen 7 Hitthe pads to play the assigned samples You can switch the function on and off by pressing the DRUM status key and you can use the DRUM fader to adjust the pad sampler level HINT Instead of tapping the pads you can also use a MIDI controller connected to the MRS 1608 s MIDI IN connector The MIDI channel setting and the assignment of MIDI note numbers to pads is the same as for the drum kit 8 To play the sample of a pad continuously hold down the STEP key and then press the pad If you hit a pad while holding the STEP Key the roll play function is activated which plays a sound in repetition with only a single hit of the pad To stop roll play release the pad If you release the STEP key first roll play continues also when you release the pad To stop roll play in this case hit the pad once more For details on the roll play function see page 91 To return to the previous screen press the EXIT key HINT The roll play function can also be used during real time input of a rhythm pattern 9 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key
105. stereo mix on a master track mixdown About the master track The master track is a set of stereo tracks that are separate from the normal tracks 1 16 The most common use of the master track is as a track on which the end result of a mixdown process is recorded The contents of the master track can then be used to create an audio CD When you switch the master track to the recording condition the signal after passing the MASTER fader the same signal as available from the MASTER OUTPUT jacks is sent to the master track The MRS 1608 offers one master track for each project Similar to the regular tracks 1 16 the master track also has ten virtual tracks V takes This allows you to record different mixes on several V takes and select the optimum take later MASTER BTRACK RECORDING MASTER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 naz 1314 1516 1778 Lm mo aes Tracks 1 16 HINT It is possible to play the master tracks of several projects recorded on the hard disk in succession p 177 Reference Recorder Master track mixdown steps Her
106. stereo to two mono tracks set the Pan parameter for the odd numbered track to L 100 and for the even numbered track to R 100 If only the signal from the drum track or bass track is recorded refer to Selecting drum bass track as recording ZOOM MRS 1608 43 Reference Recorder Source on page 44 and select MASTER as source 8 To turn off the bounce function press the BOUNCE key The BOUNCE key goes out and the bounce function is canceled Recording the drum bass sound rhythm recording The MRS 1608 allows you to record the drum track or bass track sound of the rhythm section onto any track This function is called rhythm recording By recording a rhythm song or rhythm pattern on an audio track you can then combine this with another song or pattern as played by the rhythm section To use the rhythm recording function proceed as follows Selecting drum bass track as recording source While using the bounce function select the drum bass track as recording source signal 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY BOUNCE on the display and press the ENTER key 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BOUNCE REC SRC on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes
107. that the key lights up The rhythm pattern selection screen appears and the RHYTHM key flashes 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern for which to specify level information and press the RHYTHM key The RHYTHM key is now constantly lit and the unit is in the condition for creating and editing rhythm patterns 3 Press the EDIT key The rhythm pattern edit menu appears on the display EDIT GUAMT IZ 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication EDIT Dr LEVEL on the display and press the ENTER key This screen allows you to specify the drum sequence volume The display shows the current volume setting 0 15 5 Turn the dial to select the desired setting and then press the EXIT key The setting is entered and the rhythm pattern edit menu appears again Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication EDIT Bs LEVEL on the display and press the ENTER key Reference Rhythm This screen allows you to specify the bass sequence volume LEVEL The display shows the current volume setting 0 15 Z Turn the dial to select the desired setting and then press the EXIT key The setting is entered and the rhythm pattern edit menu appears again 8 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Assigning a name to a rhythm pattern When an empty rhythm pattern is selected for input the pattern name
108. the display 5 To carry out the capture operation press the ENTER key once more When capture is completed the indication SWAP TRxx where xx is the track number appears on the display This indicates that the track has been captured and can be swapped if necessary By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time return to the main Screen press the EXIT key several times HINT By repeating steps 3 5 you can capture multiple tracks ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Track Editing Swapping track data and captured data You can swap the current data of a track with the captured data 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY CAP SWAP on the display and press the ENTER key 3 Use the status keys or the dial to select a track that was captured When you select a captured track the indication SWAP appears on the display HINT If you select a track that was not captured the indication CAPTURE appears 4 Press the ENTER key The indication SWAP SURE appears on the display 5 To carry out the swap operation press the ENTER key once more When the operation is completed the audio data of the selected track wi
109. the first measure and real time input continues REC PLAY 0 1 T Le KICK SNARE P Recorded repeatedly If you press the REC 6 key during recording the REC key will flash and recording will be temporarily suspended In this state you can tap the pads to check which sound is assigned to each pad Recording resumes when you press the REC 6 key once more HINT During real time input you can press the DRUM or BASS key to switch the target sequence for recording Instead of tapping the pads you can also input a pattern in real time by using a MIDI controller connected to the MRS 1608 s MIDI IN connector For a list of pads and corresponding note numbers refer to the appendix at the end of this manual After concluding real time input you can change the quantize setting and then record on top of the existing sequence Changing the quantize value will not affect the existing playing information To edit the recorded contents during real time input proceed as follows To erase the performance of a specific pad While holding down the DELETE ERASE key press the pad whose sound you want to erase While you are holding down both keys the performance of the corresponding pad is erased from the rhythm pattern Reference Rhythm Drum sequence lt gt Snare D D A Kk DA iD DA D Snare D D D D Kick 5 Dds D
110. the lower part of the display SEL Project name Project number 3 Turn the dial to select the demo song Project numbers 000 002 are the demo songs HINT Project number 1 contains a demo song that uses the phrase loop function p 67 If desired you can load elements from that demo song while working on another project 4 Press the ENTER key The HDD ACCESS indicator lights up and the selected project is loaded When the respective project display appears on the main screen the demo song has been loaded Playing the demo song After loading play the demo song as follows 1 Turn down the volume of the monitor system When headphones are connected turn down the MASTER PHONES level control 2 Press the PLAY gt key in the transport section Playback of the demo song starts E lt lt gt oo 3 Adjust the monitor system volume setting or the MASTER PHONES level control to a comfortable volume 4 To adjust the volume of the individual tracks use the respective faders The volume of the rhythm section can be adjusted with the DRUM BASS faders To adjust the volume of the entire song use the MASTER fader 5 To switch individual tracks on or off press the respective status key When the status key is out the track is muted When the key is lit in green the muting is canceled To stop the demo song press th
111. to the unit Connecting cables and input and output jacks You should always turn off the power to the MRS Caution 1608 and all other equipment before connecting or disconnecting any cables Also make sure to disconnect all cables and the AC adapter before moving the MRS 1608 Volume Do not use the MRS 1608 at a loud volume for a long Caution time since this can cause hearing impairment CD R RW Drive Never look directly in the laser beam projected from Caution the optical pickup of the CD R RW drive since your sight can be damaged ZOOM MRS 1608 Usage Precautions Electrical interference For safety considerations the MRS 1608 has been designed to provide maximum protection against the emission of electromagnetic radiation from inside the device and protection from external interference However equipment that is very susceptible to interference or that emits powerful electromagnetic waves should not be placed near the MRS 1608 as the possibility of interference cannot be ruled out entirely With any type of digital control device the MRS 1608 included electromagnetic interference can cause malfunctioning and can corrupt or destroy data Care should be taken to minimize the risk of damage Cleaning Use a soft dry cloth to clean the MRS 1608 If necessary slightly moisten the cloth Do not use abrasive cleanser wax or solvents such as paint thinner or cleaning alcohol since these may dull
112. to which a scene has been assigned the settings of that scene will be recalled 8 Press the EXIT key to return to the main screen Deleting certain parameters from a scene If desired you can disable a group of parameters saved in scene Such parameters will not change even if the scene is changed The following groups of parameters can be specified and made active or inactive Group Item EQ HI EQ MID EQLO CHO SEND REV SEND PAN Play mute TRACK PARAMETER Patch number INSERT EFFECT Input source CHORUS DELAY Patch number REVERB Patch number ALL FADER Fader position MASTER fader position MASTER FADER For example after you have programmed a sequence of automatic scene changes you may want to disable only the TRACK PARAMETER group and set the EQ and panning parameters manually for each track 1 Press the SCENE key in the control section and then press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The following screen appears on the display In this condition you can select whether the scene controls the fader action PERMISSH AllFader 2 Turn the dial to set fader permission to ON or OFF Except for the fader scene control for the other groups can be enabled or disabled by pressing one of the keys listed below in the condition of step 1 e TRACK PARAMETER group Any status key except MASTER status key
113. track you can select the odd numbered track even numbered track and stereo track e f the phrase is mono and the selected write target track is stereo the same data will be written to both tracks fthe phrase is stereo and the write target track is mono the left and right channels of the phrase will be mixed when the data are written to the track When a V take which already contains audio data is selected the existing data will be completely erased and overwritten by the new audio data 75 Reference Phrase Looping When you have selected a track V take press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the phrase loop number for formula input appears CREATE LOOFT HINT Ten phrase loops LOOP01 LOOP10 can be created Z Turn the dial to select the desired phrase loop number and press the ENTER key FAST input is now possible 8 Use the keys and pads of the rhythm section to enter the formula for creating the loop For information on entry procedures refer to page 74 9 When formula input is completed press the ENTER key The following screen appears on the display This screen lets you select whether to match phrase playback to the rhythm section measure tempo ALIUST 10 Turn the dial to select one of the following methods ADJUST OFF When you select this setting the selected phrase is played continuously independent of the rhythm song bar
114. track V take in the currently loaded project and import this as a sample 1 Refer to steps 1 7 of Basic steps for sample importing to bring the indication onto the display Then press the ENTER key Reference Pad Sampler The display now shows ImprtSrc TR xx yy where xx is the track number and yy the V take number In this condition you can select the track V take to use as import source 2 Use the dial or the status keys to select the track and use the cursor up down keys to select the V take Imprt5rc TR 1 amp 1 When track 16 is selected turning the dial further to the right lets you select odd even track pairs or the master track If you press the adjacent status keys of an odd numbered and even numbered track in succession mono track x 2 is selected HINT Repeatedly pressing the status keys for stereo tracks selects the odd numbered track even numbered track and stereo track in sequence Press the ENTER key The display now shows ImprtSrc START This lets you specify the import start position Tum s MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER Bam 1 8 B 4 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the import start point By moving the flashing section to the MEASURE BEAT TICK or MARKER field on the display you can specify the point as a measure beat tick or as a mark number HINT By hold
115. tracks from various projects that are to be included The CD R RW is then written in one operation and finalizing is automatically performed so that no more audio data can be added later HINT Finalizing a CD R RW disc refers to the procedure of making it playable on an ordinary CD player besides the MRS 1608 After it has been finalized no more data can be added to a CD R CD RW disc NOTE The waveform data of the currently selected V take of the master track are recorded as is on the audio CD To cut off blank portions before or after the audio material you can use the trimming function p 52 If the V take is less than 4 seconds long the master track cannot be written About CD R RW discs When creating an audio CD you can select either CD R or CD RW discs as media The features of the two disc types are described below CD R This media type allows only one time recording or adding of data Once data have been written they cannot be changed or erased CD R discs are typically available in 650 MB and 700 MB capacities To newly write audio data of the MRS 1608 to disc a blank CD R is required As long as the disc has not been finalized it is possible to add further audio data up to the maximum capacity of the disc After being finalized the disc can be played on an ordinary CD player CD RW This media type allows recording adding and bulk erasing of data CD RW discs are also typically availa
116. which the status key is lit in red is in recording standby mode lit m ajaaa dum n NN amp Operate the fader for track 1 to adjust the input signal monitor level HINT When you press the PLAY gt key in a new project a rhythm pattern will start to play in sync with the audio track If the rhythm accompaniment is not desired lower the DRUM BASS faders or repeatedly press the respective status key until it goes out 7 To start recording press the PLAY gt key while holding down the REC 0 key A four beat pre count is heard and recording starts Play your instrument to record lt lt E 65 8 When recording is complete press the STOP W key The REC 6 key and PLAY We key go out and recording stops 9 To check the recorded contents press the ZERO key and then press the PLAY gt key 10 To cancel the recording condition press the status key 1 so that the key is lit in green ZOOM MRS 1608 21 Now let s use your MRS 1608 to do some serious recording This Quick Tour describes the five steps that cover the entire process of recording tracks and completing a song Step 1 Preparations Shows how to create a new project select a guide rhythm and perform other steps necessary for recording E Step 2 Recording the first track Shows how to record the first track while using the inser
117. y V0 E 1 2 3 1142 13 14 15 16 o nue When you move a fader the corresponding pad is selected for adjustment and the volume changes If necessary switch the pad bank with the BANK OCTAVE key 5 return to the main Screen press the EXIT key several times The new volume setting for the drum kit is saved HINT The volume for each pad in the sampler program p 121 can be set in the same way Reference Rhythm Importing rhythm patterns and rhythm songs from another project This section explains how to selectively or globally import rhythm pattern data and rhythm song data from another project that was saved on the hard disk NOTE The import process will overwrite existing rhythm patterns rhythm songs in the currently selected project Take care not to accidentally overwrite rhythm pattern or rhythm song data that you want to keep 1 From the main screen press the RHYTHM key so that the key lights up 2 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The rhythm utility menu for making various rhythm section settings appears UTILITY COUNT 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY IMPORT on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 4 Use the cursor left right keys to select ALL import all rhythm patterns and rhythm songs or PATTERN import a specific rhythm pattern and press the ENTER
118. yy V take recorded without passing through insert effect BOUxx yy V take recorded using the bounce function or rhythm recording LP xx yy Phrase written to V take using the phrase loop function gt p 67 HRMxx yy V take recorded using the harmony generate function or duo harmony function HINT When the phrase loop function is used to write a phrase to the master track the name LP MS yy is assigned To change a V take name proceed as follows 1 From the main screen press the V TAKE key in the track parameter section The key lights up and the track number V take number and V take name appear on the display NOTE Only the name of the V take currently selected for a track can be changed 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select the track whose V take name you want to edit NOTE If you select a V take on which nothing is recorded the indication NO DATA appears and the name cannot be edited 3 Press the EDIT key The first character of the V take name flashes This indicates that you can change the V take name 4 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section to the character you want to change 5 Turn the dial to select a character The following characters can be selected Numerals 0 9 A Z a z space 96 amp lt gt _ em Letters Symbols Repeat steps 4 5 until the name is as desired 7 e When y
119. 00 510 Time signature Chord root 1 8 1 4 8 4 C B Chord type Tempo Maj m 7 m7 M7 aug dim 7sus4 sus4 m7b5 m6 6 m9 M9 mM7 40 0 250 0 NOTE Drum sequence volume 0 15 Bass sequence volume 0 15 Drum kit See appendix Bass program See appendix If no tempo information is input for the rhythm song the tempo currently set for the rhythm section will be used To ensure that a rhythm song will always play with the same tempo be sure to enter tempo information at the beginning of the song Time signature information can be entered only at the beginning of a measure 4 Move to the location at which you want to input a new event For details on how to move the current location refer to page 108 5 Use the cursor up down keys to select the type of event that you want to input If the event you select here has been input at the current location its value will be displayed Dru 15 If there is no corresponding event the display will indicate xxx where xxx is the event name This indicates that the previously input event information is still valid Turn the dial to input the event value 7 Input the remaining events in the same way To input more information for the same type of event you can move the current position in measures or beats while the event input screen is displayed If yo
120. 08 EXRim1 EXRim2 EXCwbel1 CLASSIC Name EXCwbel2 EXClap1 EXClap2 EXClv808 EXSnp909 EXMute High Q Sticks MtrClick MtrBell Tambrin Vibslap HiBongo LoBongo Global MtHiCong 1 LoConga HiTimbal LoTimbal HiAgogo LoAgogo BDLive BDStudio BDMute BDHuge BDStage BDDry Appendix CYMCrsh1 CYMCrsh2 CYMSpls2 CYMCrshB CYMRide1 CYMRide2 CYMRideB CYMCup1 CYMCup2 BDReso BDDeep1 BDDeep2 BDBend BDAcstk SDLive1 SDLive2 SDDry EXRim1 EXRim2 EXRim3 EXCwbel1 EXTmbriB EXClap1 EXClapB EXMute SDDryHi SDSnappy SDReso SDBrush1 SDBrush2 SDBrush3 SDDeep Cabasa Maracas Claves Gamelan Odaiko ChuDaiko Oedo Temple Engine Sonar Minor ZOOM MRS 1608 Major TMLive1 TMLive2 TMLive3 TMStdio1 TMStdio2 TMStdio3 TMDry1 TMDry2 TMDry3 TMAmbi1 TMAmbi2 Global High Q Sticks MtrClick MtrBell Tambrin Vibslap HiBongo LoBongo MtHiCong 1 LoConga HiTimbal LoTimbal HiAgogo LoAgogo Cabasa Maracas
121. 1 30 Adjusts the amount of gain TONE 0 10 Adjusts the tone LEVEL 1 8 Adjusts the module output level Selects the cabinet type COMBO Combo type cabinet BRIGHT Produces a brighter tone than Combo CABINET FLAT Cabinet with a flat response STACK Stack type cabinet BsCombo Combo type cabinet for bass BsStack Stack type cabinet for bass Selects the loudspeaker type Gt 12x1 Combo type guitar amp with one 12 inch speaker Gt 12x2 Combo type guitar amp with two 12 inch speakers Gt 10x1 Combo type guitar amp with one 10 inch speaker SPEAKER GtStack Stack type guitar amp with four 10 inch speakers Gt Wall Multiple stack type amps placed together Bs 15x1 Combo type bass amp with one 15 inch speaker BsStack Stack type bass amp with four 6 5 inch speakers DEPTH 0 10 Adjusts the cabinet resonance of the speaker TOP 1 30 Adjusts the resonance of the strings BODY 0 10 Adjusts the resonance of the body COLOR 1 4 Adjusts the character of the electroacoustic guitar preamp 3 BAND EQ module Type Parameter HIGH 3BandEQ Three band equalizer Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description HIGH 12 12 Boosts cuts the high frequency range MID 12 12 Boosts cuts the mid frequency range LOW 12 12 Boosts cuts the low frequency range LEVEL 1 8 Adjusts the module output level MODULATION DELAY module Type Parameter DEPTH RATE MIX Adds pulsation and spaciousness to the sound D
122. 1 8 19 16 track basstrack 1 8 Adjusts high frequency boost or so cut in the range from 12 to 12 EQ HI GAIN To i206 dB This parameter is only shown O O when HI EQ is on Adjusts turnover frequency for EQ HI 500 high frequency boost cut This o o o FREQUENCY 18000 Hz parameter is only shown when HI EQ is on Adjusts mid frequency boost or cut in the range from 12 to 12 EQ MID GAIN 0281268 dB This parameter is shown O O O when MID EQ is on EQ MID Adjusts turnover frequency for mid frequency boost cut This FREQUENCY 40 18000 Hz parameter is only shown when MID EQ is on Adjusts the Q value bandwidth EQ MID 01 10 for mid frequency EQ This o o o Q FACTOR parameter is only shown when MID EQ is on Adjusts low frequency boost or cut in the range from 12 to 12 EQ LOW GAIN Tov 12 dB This parameter is only shown when LOW EQ is on EQ LOW Adjusts turnover frequency for low frequency boost cut This FREQUENCY 40 1600 2 parameter is only shown when O O o LOW EQ is on CHORUS E Adjusts the chorus delay effect end Te 0 100 send level for the track input 9 O REVERB SEND Adjusts the reverb effect send level LEVEL 0100 for the track input o o o o Selects whether the signal at the SUB OUT SEND ON OFF MASTER OUTPUT jacks master ON OFF track signal is also supplied to the STEREO SUB OUT jack Adjusts the level of the sign
123. 2 0 Adjust the pitch shift amount The dt setting results in a detune effect TONE 0 10 Adjusts the tone BALANCE 0 30 Adjusts the balance between the direct sound and effect sound DOUBLING 1 100 n Bias 7 TIME DELAY ECHO mee time in 1 ms steps The x setting results in sync with the 1 5000 T 4x4 T 1 4 ZNR module VOL PDL module See the CLEAN DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS algorithm 198 ZOOM MRS 1608 Appendix 8x COMP EQ algorithm Module 1 8 Parameter FREQ Filter passing the high frequency signal through THRSHOLD RATIO Type HPF COMPRESS Keeps dynamic range consistent THRSHOLD RELEASE Controls the signal peeks HIGH Three band equalizer LIMITER RATIO MID LOW EQ Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description FREQ 0 10 Sets the cut off frequency THRSHOLD 24 0 Adjusts the sensitivity COMP 1 26 h RATIO Adjusts the compression degree of the signal LIMIT 1 54 ATTACK 0 10 Adjusts the compression attack speed COMPRESS LIMITER 0 12 LEVEL Adjusts the unit output level EQ 1 8 RELEASE 0 10 Adjusts the time between the threshold and compression finish HIGH 12 12 Boosts cuts the high frequency range MID 12 12 Boosts cuts the mid frequency range LOW 12 12 Boosts cuts the low frequency range MASTERING algorithm
124. 3 4 5 6 7 8 To select two tracks Reference Mixer repeatedly press the status key for one track until the key is lit in red and then hold the key while pressing the status key for the other track The signal flow from the input mixer to the track will change as follows depending on the number of inputs and recording tracks Mono track selected as recording track INPUT 1 Recorder INPUT 1 _ INPUT2 QNIDEF Li Recorder Ll Track N e Stereo track or two mono tracks selected as recording track Recorder INPUT 1 RC Track jm e 1 Track M INPUT 1 ONIDEF Recorder 1 _ Track INPUT2 i rac No track selected as recording track INPUT 1 PAN QN DEF OUTPUT gt L gt 9 R MASTER fader INPUT 1 PAN _ON DEF 88 INPUT 2 QNIDEF ime OUTPUT Qn MASTER fader ZOOM MRS 1608 79 Reference Mixer NOTE The diagrams above show the signal flow when the insert effect has not been inserted into the input mixer When the insert effect is inserted the signal flow will change depending on the number of input and output channels of the effect gt p 141 n 8 track recording mode p 45 the signals from inputs 1 8 are sent to tracks 1 8 HINT When no recording track is selected the input signals
125. 6 of Basic steps for range editing to select the track V take for pitch compensation and press the ENTER key The indication PitchFix KEY appears on the display In this condition you can select the key for the scale to be used for pitch compensation L f Key FitchFix HINT You can only select a single mono track or one track of a stereo pair as source track for PitchFix 2 Turn the dial to select the key The selection range for the key is C B in semitone steps and BassSeq When you select BassSeq the pitch of the audio track will be detected and transposed to the nearest note specified by the bass sequence or by actually hitting a pad The upper limit for pitch detection is two octaves above center A For example if you use an audio track recorded with long tones and apply PitchFix using a bass sequence with a short rhythm you will get an interesting effect with strong modulation ZOOM MRS 1608 55 Reference Track Editing Audio track Audio track gt PitchFix Bass sequence HINT When you select BassSeq step 3 is not necessary e When you select BassSeq for pitch compensation the note in the octave closest to the source material is selected If the Source and the bass track pitch are far apart the results may be unpredictable 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PitchFix SCALE on the display then turn the
126. 6FUS02 FUSs2VB 16FUSO3 FUSs2Vb 16FUS04 FUSs2FB O4JAZZO01 FUSs3VA 04JAZZ02 FUSs3Va 04JAZZ03 FUSs3FA 04JAZZ04 FUSs3VB DANCE FUSs3Vb CNTRY FUSs3FB 68BLUS INDTs1VA Name Measure INDTs1Va INDTs1FA INDTs1VB INDTs1Vb INDTs1FB POPs1VA POPs1Va POPs1FA POPs1VB POPs1Vb POPs1FB RnBs1VA RnBs1Va RnBs1FA RnBs1VB RnBs1Vb RnBs1FB RnBs2VA RnBs2Va RnBs2FA DnBs1VA DnBs1Va DnBs1FA DnBs1VB DnBs1Vb DnBs1FB TPs1VA TPs1FA TPs1VB TPs1FB AMBs1VA AMBs1Va AMBs1FA AMBs1FB BALDs1VA BALDs1Va BALDs1FA BALDs1VB BALDs1Vb BALDs1FB BLUSs1VA BLUSs1Va BLUSs1FA BLUSs1VB BLUSs1Vb BLUSs1FB CNTRs1VA CNTRs1Va CNTRs1FA CNTRs1VB CNTRs1Vb CNTRs1FB JAZZs1VA JAZZs1Va JAZZs1FA JAZZs1VB JAZZs1Vb JAZZs1FB AFROs1VA AFROs1Va AFROs1FA AFROs1VB AFROs1Vb AFROs1FB REGGs1VA REGGs1Va REGGs1FA REGGs1VB REGGs1Vb REGGs1FB LATNs1VA LATNs1Va LATNs1FA LATNs1VB LATNs1Vb LATNs1FB LATNs2VA z o N AJo o NINI B5 BB BY pO AININ BY BY BR BR PO AJAA BR POL BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BR BRR A Song ROCKs1VA ROCKs1Va ROCKs1FA ROCKs1VB ROCKs1Vb ROCKs1FB ROCKs2VA ROCKs2Va ROCKs2FA ROCKs2VB ROCKs2Vb ROCKs2FB ROCKs3VA ROCKs3FA ROCKs3VB ROCKs3FB ROCKs4VA ROCKs4Va ZOOM MRS
127. Drum kits and bass programs 87 Rhythm patterns 88 Rhythm song REDE wes er P des 88 Rhythm pattern mode and rhythm song mode 88 Synchronizing the recorder section and rhythm SOCOM cuc xui S4 SpA RID RR EE 88 Playing rhythm patterns 89 Selecting a rhythm pattern 89 Changing the tempo 89 Changing the drum kit bass program 90 Selecting the sound or scale to play with the pads secs X REED ER ERE 91 Creating an original rhythm pattern 93 Preparations aes oad mee REESE ms 93 Drum sequence real time input 94 Bass sequence real time 95 Drum sequence step input 96 Bass sequence step input 98 Entering rhythm pattern chord information 100 Changing the drum bass sequence volume level t epe aris s ETRE See 101 Assigning a name to a rhythm pattern 101 Editing rhythm patterns 102 Copying a rhythm 102 Deleting a rhythm pattern 103 Creating a rhythm 103 Selecting a rhythm song 103 Entering pattern information using step input 104 Using FAST for pattern information input 106 ZOOM MRS 1608 Contents Entering chord information 108 Entering
128. EPTH RATE MIX Simulates the warm sound of a vintage effect DEPTH RATE FB Produces a unique undulating sound POSITION RATE COLOR Produces a swooshing sound DEPTH RATE CLIP Periodically varies the level of the sound FLT TYPE POSITION RESONANC SENS CHORUS V CHORUS FLANGER PHASER TREMOLO AUTO WAH Gives a varying wah sound that depends on the picking intensity SHIFT TONE BALANCE Modifies the pitch of the direct sound POSITION TIME CURVE Creates a violin playing sound with soft attack DEPTH RATE BALANCE Automatic vibrato effect PITCH SLOW ATK VIBE ZOOM MRS 1608 192 Appendix DEPTH RATE RESONANC Changes the sound with step like filter characteristics POSITION RATE BALANCE Produces a metallic sound POSITION RESO SENS Talking modulator like effect FREQ DEPTH LowBoost Gives the sound more focus and spatial definition SIZE TONE MIX Simulates the air ambience of the room giving the sound spatial depth TIME WET LVL DRY LVL Simulates a stereo recording with two microphones TIME FB MIX STEP RING MOD CRY EXCITER AIR WIDE DELAY Delay effect with a delay time of up to 10 seconds TIME FB MIX Delay effect with warm sound up to 10 second delay time FLT TYPE POSITION FREQ R MODE Changes the wah frequency in sync with rhythm tempo TYPE TONE RWAVE R SYNC Changes the pitch i
129. ERN key so that the key lights up The rhythm pattern selection screen appears and the RHYTHM key flashes 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern you want to delete and press the RHYTHM key The RHYTHM key is now constantly lit and a rhythm pattern can be created or edited 3 Press the DELETE ERASE key in the rhythm section The indication DELETE SURE appears on the display 4 To execute the delete process press the ENTER key When the delete operation is completed the display returns to the rhythm pattern selection screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time PAD BANK OCTAVE PAHE 1 EMPTY 5 return to the main Screen press the EXIT key several times Reference Rhythm Creating a rhythm song The MRS 1608 allows you to save up to 10 rhythm songs per project Out of these one is selected for editing or playing One rhythm song can have up to 999 rhythm pattern measures By specifying the rhythm pattern playing sequence and adding chord and tempo information you can create a rhythm song The following two methods are available for entering rhythm pattern information Step input With this method you create rhythm patterns one by one by specifying a pattern and the number of measures Input can be performed at any point in the song It is also possible to switch to another pattern w
130. Hmny Dst appears on the display In this condition you can select the target destination for writing the harmony Dst TR 1 1 HINT You can only select a single mono track or one track of a stereo pair as source track for Harmony Generate 3 Use the cursor up down keys and the dial status keys to select the track V take to be used as destination If you specify the same track V take as the source the harmony data will be added to the original data and the V take will be overwritten You can also specify a stereo track or two mono tracks as destination HINT During parameter setting and harmony generation the status key of the source track is lit in green and the status key of the destination track in red If the source track V take is also selected as destination the status key is lit in orange 4 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows HARMON SOURCE LVL 1 From this screen you can set the volume and panning for the source and the harmony parts The parameter for the edit source is SOURCE The parameter for the chord root is called CHORUS 1 the parameter for the third CHORUS 2 and the parameter for the fifth CHORUS 3 5 Verify that SOURCE LVL is shown on the second line of the display and turn the dial to set the volume for the edit source The setting range is 0 127 A setting of 100 results in an unchanged level
131. I Project number 2 Turn the dial to select the import source project and press the ENTER key A track V take in that project is shown While this screen is shown the level meter section of the display indicates the status of the V take in the source project by the segment flashing lit out status T Track V take number V take name 3 Use the cursor left right keys and the dial to select the track V take to import When an unrecorded track V take is selected the indication NO DATA is shown instead of the V take name 4 Press the ENTER key The indication IMPORT SURE appears on the display If audio data exist at the import destination the indication OverWrt is shown When the import operation is performed these data will be overwritten 5 To execute the import operation press the ENTER key once more When the import operation is completed the unit returns to the V take selection menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time ZOOM MRS 1608 Track capture and swap You can capture the audio data of any track and temporarily store them on the hard disk Later you can swap the captured data with the current data of the track This lets you save the state of a track before an editing operation If the result of the operation is not as desired you can then easily restore the track to its p
132. INPUT jacks 1 2 perform the adjustment with the GUITAR BASS INPUT control 1 2 on the front panel 5 To use an insert effect press the INPUT SOURCE key in the effect section and press the ON OFF key for the input to which you want to apply the effect The respective ON OFF key lights up orange and the insert effect is applied When 8x COMP EQ is selected as algorithm for the insert effect all channels can be processed by the effect Otherwise two selected channels can be effect processed HINT In the default condition of a project a patch suitable for guitar bass playing is selected as insert effect If necessary select a different patch p 139 While the instruments are played use the REC LEVEL control to adjust the recording level Set the recording level as high as possible but avoid settings that cause the CLIP indicator to light The current signal level can be checked with the level meters IN1 138 7 Repeatedly press the status keys for the tracks 1 8 to be recorded so that the keys are lit in red Up to eight status keys can be activated simultaneously When a track is switched to the recording standby condition the signal from the input mixer will be sent to the corresponding recording track If the ON OFF key for a track is ON but the corresponding status key is lit green or is off the respective input will not be recorded 8 Move to the start point of the recor
133. KER B 2 Pressthe UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select the playlist 1 10 to include in the album Playlist number 3 Turn the dial to select the playlist and press the ENTER key The indication IMPORT SURE appears on the display IMPORT SURE 4 import the playlist information press the ENTER key The procedure is carried out and the album screen returns HINT After importing playlist information you can edit the album as normal ZOOM MRS 1608 156 Playing an audio CD To play an audio CD inserted in the CD R CD RW drive proceed as follows This method can also be used to audition a CD R CD RW disc which has not been finalized yet NOTE ACD R CD RW disc which has not been finalized can only be played with this method Mixed mode CDs or copy controlled CDs cannot be played 1 Insert an audio CD in the CD R RW drive 2 From the main screen press the CD R RW key in the control section The CD R RW menu appears 3 Verify that the indication CD R RW AUDIO CD is shown on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows T RAUL Li TH L DT 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication AUDIO CD PLAYER and press the ENTER key The CD player screen for audio CD play
134. LITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY SMF on the display and press the ENTER key The SMF menu appears on the display 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication ChToDrum or ChToBass on the display and press the ENTER key If ChToDrum was selected the display indication changes as follows ChTolrum 1 4 Turn the dial to select OFF or 1 16 and then press the EXIT key HINT The factory default setting is 10 MIDI channel 10 for the ChToDrum parameter and 9 MIDI channel 9 for the ChToBass parameter 5 Make the setting for the other parameter in the same way To return to the main screen press the EXIT key 175 Reference MIDI SMF playback You can select any SMF imported into a project and play it as follows NOTE When playing an SMF the rhythm section tempo will be disregarded and playback starts with the timing programmed in the SMF However if a tempo change event is programmed somewhere in the rhythm song this tempo change will become active To use the SMF tempo throughout you should first select an empty rhythm song e If the time signature information of the SMF and the rhythm section is different the audio track position and SMF position may be different when locating in measures
135. Lit green Out Lit red O O Mute off Mute on Selected as recording track When status key 1 is red track 1 is in the recording standby condition and the input signal is assigned to track 1 The signal routing will change as follows When a recording track has not been selected MASTER INPUT 1 gt Track 1 Track 2 When a recording track track 1 has been selected INPUT 1 1 MASTER gt Track 2 When you press status keys 9 10 15 16 a pair of stereo tracks is selected as recording target Except for the recording target V take selection and phase setting the 26 ZOOaM MRS 1608 Quick Tour parameters for left right stereo tracks are set to the same values This is useful for recording from stereo sources such as synthesizers or CD players HINT Normally you can select up to two tracks simultaneously To select two mono tracks press the first status key of an odd even numbered pair so that it is lit in red and then hold down that key and press the other key so that it also is lit in red Even if the input signal is mono selecting a pair of stereo tracks as target will ensure that the left right spread added by certain insert effect settings is preserved in recording You can also record 8 tracks simultaneously p 45 2 Set fader 1 and the MASTER fader to O dB Then adjust the volume
136. MEAS x parameter it determines the length of the phrase The setting range is 1 1 4 8 8 4 START Specifies the playback start point of the phrase in milliseconds In the default condition this is the beginning of the imported data END Specifies the playback end point of the phrase in milliseconds In the default condition this is the end of the imported data NAME Specifies a name for the phrase e LVL Specifies the phrase playback level in the range of 24 dB HINT If you do not intend to match the phrase to a rhythm song there is no need to set the MEAS x and TIMSIG parameters Use the dial and the cursor left right keys to adjust the setting value Adjusting MEAS x TIMSIG LVL Turn the dial to set the numerical value Adjusting START END Use the cursor left right keys to cause the counter value to flash and turn the dial to set the value Adjusting NAME Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section to the character to edit and turn the dial to select the character HINT You can use the PLAY gt key to check the phrase during editing 7 Repeat steps 5 6 to complete the phrase If desired press the EXIT key several times to return to the phrase screen and edit another phrase 8 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times 72 ZOOM MRS 1608 Copying a phrase You can copy a phrase to any other phrase number Any phrase
137. MRS 1608 recording playback operations can be performed only for the currently loaded project It is not possible to perform functions for multiple projects simultaneously Project operations This section explains operations such as loading or saving a project The procedure is the same for most project operations The basic procedure is as follows Basic procedure 1 From the main screen press the PROJECT key The project menu appears on the display allowing you to select the desired project operation PROJECT SELECT HINT When you press the PROJECT key the current project is automatically saved on the hard disk 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select one of the following operations PROJECT SELECT Load a previously saved project from the internal hard disk PROJECT NEW Create a new project PROJECT SIZE View the size of the currently loaded project PROJECT COPY Duplicate a specified project on the hard disk PROJECT ERASE Erase a specified project from the hard disk PROJECT NAME Edit the name of the currently loaded project PROJECT PROTECT Switch the protection status of the currently loaded project on or off ZOOM MRS 1608 165 Reference Projects PROJECT SEQ PLAY Continuously play the master tracks from several projects saved on the hard disk 177 3 Press the ENTER key to execute the operation or change the setting that you sele
138. NANC Changes the sound with step like filter characteristics RATE BALANCE Produces a metallic sound RESONANC SENS Talking modulator like effect FREQ DEPTH LowBoost Gives the sound more focus and spatial definition SIZE TONE MIX STEP RING MOD CRY EXCITER AIR Simulates the air ambience of the room giving the sound spatial depth TIME FB MIX Delay effect with a delay time of up to 10 seconds TIME FB MIX Delay effect with warm sound up to 10 second delay time TIME TONE MIX Doubling effect with a delay time of up to 100 milliseconds FLT TYPE FREQ R MODE Changes the wah frequency in sync with rhythm tempo TYPE TONE R WAVE Changes the pitch in sync with rhythm tempo DELAY ECHO DOUBLING FIX WAH ARRM PIT Regarding the parameter description see the CLEAN DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS algorithm ZNR module VOL PDL module See the CLEAN DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS algorithm DUAL MIC algorithm COMP LIM module MIC PRE module See the MIC algorithm Same with the MIC algorithm except that there is not the parameter DE ESSER in MIC PRE module 3 BAND EQ module Parameter HIGH Three band equalizer Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description HIGH 12 12 Boosts cuts the high frequency range MID 12 12 Boosts cuts the mid frequency range LOW 12 12 Boosts cuts the low
139. OCKO07 RnB08 TRIPO1 LATNO8 ROCKO8 RnBog TRIPO2 LATNO9 ROCKO9 RnB10 TRIPO3 LATN10 ROCK10 FUNKO1 TRIPO4 LATN11 ROCK11 FUNKO2 AMBO1 LATN12 ROCK12 FUNKO3 AMBO2 BOSSA01 ROCK13 FUNK04 AMBOS3 BOSSA02 ROCK14 FUNKO5 AMBO04 SAMBAO1 ROCK15 FUNKOG BALDO1 2 ROCK16 FUNKO7 BALDO2 MidE01 ROCK17 FUNKO8 BALDOS MidE02 ROCK18 FUNKO9 BALD04 MidE03 ROCK19 FUNK10 BALDOS MidE04 ROCK20 FUNK11 BALDO6 INTROO1 ROCK21 FUNK12 BALDO7 INTROO2 ROCK22 HIPO1 BALD08 INTROO3 ROCK23 HIPO2 BALD09 INTROO4 ROCK24 BALD10 INTROOS ROCK25 4 BALD11 INTROO6 ROCK26 5 BLUSO1 INTROO7 ROCK27 HIPO6 BLUSO2 INTROO8 ROCK28 HIPO7 BLUSOS INTROO9 HRKO1 8 BLUS04 INTRO10 2 9 BLUSO5 INTRO11 HRKO3 HIP10 BLUSO6 INTRO12 HRK04 HIP11 CNTRO1 INTRO13 5 12 CNTRO2 INTRO14 HRKO6 HIP13 CNTRO3 INTRO15 HRK07 HIP14 CNTRO4 INTRO16 MTLO1 HIP15 2201 INTRO17 MTLO2 HIP16 JAZZ02 INTRO18 MTLOS HIP17 2203 ENDINGO1
140. OPY SURE appears on the display 8 To execute the copy process press the ENTER key When the copy operation is completed the unit returns to the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Deleting a sampler program You can delete an unneeded sampler program as follows NOTE A deleted sampler program cannot be restored Use this operation with care 1 Fromthe main screen press the RHYTHM key so that the key lights up 2 Press the DRUM and BASS keys in the rhythm section simultaneously Both keys light up In this condition the pad sampler can be used 3 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The display changes as follows UTILITY SPL PRG 4 Verify that the indication UTILITY SPL PRG is shown and press the ENTER key The sampler program menu appears 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SPL PRG DELETE on the display and press the ENTER key The sampler program that will be deleted appears on the display PRG DEL SPL PRG PRIS to be deleted Program number to be deleted 132 ZOOM MRS 1608 6 Turn the dial to select the sampler program to delete and press the ENTER key The indication SPL DEL SURE appears on the display 7 To execute the delete process press the ENTER key When the delete operation is c
141. PUT 1 INPUT 7 etc 3 Use the cursor up down keys to select the track parameter you want to adjust For a list of available parameters see the table on the next page For track parameters which have dedicated keys you can select the parameter directly by pressing the key 4 Turn the dial to adjust the value 5 For parameters where on off can be selected marked with an asterisk in the table on the next page repeatedly press the respective key in the track parameter section until the key is out Each push of the key toggles between lit on and out off For example when switching high range EQ from on to off the display indication changes as follows Pressing the respective key once more restores the previous condition On condition Off condition Et HI OFF Repeat steps 3 5 until all desired parameters are adjusted If required you can use the cursor left right keys status keys and ON OFF keys in this condition to change to another track input and adjust other parameters 7 e To return to the main screen press the EXIT key 80 ZOOM MRS 1608 Track parameter list Reference Mixer normal When set to on the phase is inverted Track Track Master Drum Input Parameter Display Setting range Description
142. Parameter Setting range Description GAIN 12 12 Adjusts the level 3 BAND EQ module See the CLEAN DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS algorithm DIMENSION RESONANCE module Type Parameter RISE 1 RISE 2 DIMENSN 3 Produces spatial width DEPTH FreqOFST RESONANC EFX LVL DRY LVL RESONNC eq A resonance filter with LFO Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description RISE 1 0 30 Adjusts the emphasizing degree of the stereo component RISE 2 0 30 Adjusts the spaciousness that includes the monaural component DEPTH 0 10 Adjusts the depth of the effect FreqOFST 1 30 Adjusts the LFO offset RATE 1 30 T 4x4 T 1 8 s the speed of the effect The T x setting results in sync with the rhythm TYPE HPF LPF BPF Specifies the filter type RESONANC 1 30 Adjusts the effect character intensity EFX LVL 0 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect sound DRY LVL 0 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the direct sound ZNR module VOL PDL module See the CLEAN DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS algorithm ZOOM MRS 1608 200 Send return Effect CHORUS DELAY module Type Parameter Appendix CHORUS LFO TYPE DEPTH RATE PRE DLY EFX LVL Adds pulsation and spaciousness to the sound DELAY TIME FB DAMP PAN EFX LVL REV SEND Delay effect with a delay time of up to 10 seconds Parameter description
143. Q equalizer and panning stereo left right positioning to create a pair of stereo tracks 4 1 Turning off the input and rhythm section In order to keep unwanted signals from being included in the mix you should turn off the input and the guide rhythm from the rhythm section 1 To mute the rhythm section press the DRUM BASS status keys so that the keys go out 2 To mute the input press the ON OFF key for the input where the instrument is connected so that the key goes out HINT If desired you can add the drum kit bass program sound and or sound from input signals to the mix 4 2 Adjusting volume panning and EQ Adjust the volume panning and equalization for each track by controlling the track parameters of the built in mixer 1 e Toadjustthe volume balance between tracks operate faders 1 8 and faders 9 10 15 16 By operating faders of a pair of stereo tracks you can adjust the left right balance 2 To adjust the EQ and panning for each track press the respective key in the track parameter section TRACK PARAMETER EQ HIGH ZOOM MRS 1608 Quick Tour 3 Use the cursor left right keys or the status keys to select the track for which you want to make a setting While the track parameter display is shown the status keys and cursor left right keys can be used to select a track The status key for the currently selected track is lit in orange Orange
144. RHYTHM key the display section flashes This indicates that the rhythm section and the recorder are synchronized By pressing the RHYTHM key so that it is constantly lit you can separate the operation of the rhythm section and the recorder Rhythm song creation and editing is possible only when the RHYTHM key is constantly lit 2 Turn the dial to select a rhythm song number from 0 9 3 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Entering pattern information using step input This section explains how to input rhythm pattern data into an empty rhythm song by specifying the rhythm pattern number and number of measures 1 From the main screen press the SONG key and then the RHYTHM key Both keys light up and the rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the REC 9 key in the transport section The key lights up and the display indication changes as follows In this condition you can perform rhythm song step input Tec BB 1 Bl End of song indication Current measure beat tick in rhythm song The indication End of Song shows the position where the rhythm song ends For an empty song EOS will be located at the beginning Therefore nothing happens if you play the song Current position 1 measure number Song End of Song 3 Use the cursor up down keys to bring up the indication lt PTN on the first l
145. Standard MIDI Files from a CD ROM R RW disc and load the contents into a project Once loaded an SMF can use internal or external sound sources and perform playback in sync with the recorder section or rhythm section SMF player function 170 ZOOM MRS 1608 Making MIDI related settings This section explains how to make MIDI related settings The procedure is the same for most settings The basic steps are as follows Basic procedure 1 Press the RHYTHM key in the display section and then press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The rhythm utility menu for making various rhythm section settings appears 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY MIDI on the display 3 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select MIDI related setting items 4 Use the cursor left right keys to select one of the following items DRUM CH Set the MIDI channel for the drum kit BASS CH Set the MIDI channel for the bass program CLOCK Turn Timing Clock transmission on off e SPP Turn Song Position Pointer transmission on off COMMAND Turn Start Stop Continue message transmission on off ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference MIDI PRG CHG Turn Program Change transmission on off MTC Turn MIDI Time Code transmission on off HINT e For information on the SMF playback procedure see page 174 Whi
146. T key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Deleting a sample You can delete a sample from the sample pool as follows NOTE Once deleted a sample cannot be restored Use this function with care 1 Fromthe main screen press the RHYTHM key in the display section The key lights up and the rhythm section can be used independently 2 Pressthe UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The rhythm utility menu appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY SAMPLE on the display and press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the sample appears on the display SAMPLE SAMPLES 5 Sample name Ha BH Sample number 4 Turn the dial to select the sample you want to delete 5 Press the DELETE ERASE key in the rhythm section The indication DELETE SURE appears on the display Reference Pad Sampler To execute the delete process press the ENTER key When the delete operation is completed the unit returns to the sample selection screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Editing a specified range of a sample You can specify a range of a sample and then perform waveform editing functions such as reversing fade in out 1 Fromthe main screen press the RHYTHM key in the display section The key
147. TR 15 16 as insert location IM SEC TR1 HINT The insert position can also be selected with the status keys To Select a mono track x 2 hold down one status key while pressing the other one Selecting the patch for the insert effect 4 Press the ALGORITHM key selected in step 1 once more The currently selected patch is shown on the display 5 While playing the song turn the dial to select the patch to use The insert effect can now be used to post process the specified track When the effect is applied the track output level may change Use the respective fader to readjust the level as necessary HINT When the 8x COMP EQ algorithm is selected settings and effect on off switching can be done individually for each track p 142 When you have checked the effect stop the song and press the EXIT key to return to the main screen HINT If the insert effect is applied to the track output it is not possible to also apply it to the input or before the MASTER fader However by using the bounce function p 42 to record the track V take on another empty V take you can turn the post processed effect sound into audio data and then apply the insert effect at another position 32 ZOOaM MRS 1608 Step 5 Mixdown When the mix is ready you can transfer it onto two tracks to create the finished song This is referred to as mixdown There are two ways of doing this use the MASTER
148. To select a drum kit press the KIT PROG key in the rhythm section The currently selected drum kit is shown on the display Drum kit number Pl AD ANK OCTAVE Drum kit name HINT If you operate the cursor up down keys while selecting a drum kit the combination of sounds playable by the pads pad bank will be switched Turn the dial to select the desired drum kit The drum kit becomes active immediately For a list of drum kits that can be selected refer to the appendix at the end of this manual 7 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ZOOM MRS 1608 Changing the bass program 1 Press the BASS key You can now use the pads to play a bass program 2 Press the KIT PROG key in the rhythm section The currently selected bass program is shown on the display Bass program number Bass program name Key range of scale playable by pads HINT If you operate the cursor up down keys while selecting a bass program the octave playable by the pads will be switched 3 Turn the dial to select the desired bass program The bass program becomes active immediately For a list of bass programs that can be selected refer to the appendix at the end of this manual 4 To return to the main Screen press the EXIT key several times Selecting the sound or scale to play with the pads Using the pads on the top panel you can manually play a drum
149. USB port on the computer using a USB cable 2 From the main screen press the USB key in the control section The display changes as follows UIE MODE SURE Press the ENTER key The indication UIB WORKING appears on the display and the MRS 1608 switches to UIB mode When UIB mode is activated the computer automatically recognizes the internal hard disk of the MRS 1608 and goes into the on line state For details on operation see the on line manual supplied with the UIB 02 4 Toterminate the connection cancel the on line state at the computer ZOOM MRS 1608 183 Reference Other Functions 5 To cancel the UIB mode at the MRS 1608 press the EXIT key The indication HDD scan is shown and the MRS 1608 returns to normal mode HINT It is also possible to set the MRS 1608 to the on line state when turning the unit on Hold down the USB key while turning power to the MRS 1608 on When you press the ENTER key the MRS 1608 and computer will be in the on line state I F WORKING is shown To start up in normal mode cancel the on line state and press the EXIT key Hard disk maintenance This section describes how to test and restore the integrity of data on the internal hard disk and how to perform other hard disk maintenance functions Basic maintenance procedure The procedure for hard disk maintenance is the same for most operations The basic steps are d
150. adjust the recording level The REC LEVEL control modifies the signal level going to the recorder after passing the insert effect Watch the level meter in the lower left of the display and set the level as high as possible but avoid settings that cause the 0 dB indicator segment to light during play peaks CLIP indicator INS INS INS ING IN INN pn BS 1 2 4 5 8TRACK RECORDING INPUT 1 8 level If the recording level setting is too high the CLIP indicator of the REC LEVEL control lights up 2 2 Applying the insert effect The signal supplied to the MRS 1608 can be modified with the insert effect This effect can be applied to the input to any track or immediately before the MASTER fader The insert effect actually is a multi effect unit that contains a number of single effects effect modules such as compressor distortion and delay connected in series The following steps show how to select an algorithm and Quick Tour apply the insert effect to the guitar signal connected to the GUITAR BASS INPUT jack 1 Press the INPUT SOURCE key in the effect section INPUT BYPASS TUNER rz e NN The insert position of the insert effect is indicated on the second line of the display The default is IN INPUT If another setting is currently selected turn the dial to select 2 Use the ALGORITHM keys in the effect section to select the desired algorit
151. ads during recording this sound will also be captured When play is complete stop the recorder To cancel the bounce function and return to the normal condition switch the recording source back to MASTER as described in Selecting drum bass track 44 ZOOM MRS 1608 as recording source HINT It is also possible to use a MIDI keyboard or similar device instead of the pads to play drum bass sounds Press the BOUNCE key The key goes out Recording on 8 tracks simultaneously 8 track recording mode This section explains how to use the 8 track recording mode which allows up to eight tracks to be recorded simultaneously About 8 track recording In 8 track recording mode the signals from the INPUT jacks 1 8 or from GUITAR BASS INPUT jacks 1 2 instead of INPUT jacks 1 2 can be recorded directly onto tracks 1 8 This is convenient to record the performance of an entire band in a single session using separate tracks for the various parts or for picking up a drum performance with multiple mics In 8 track recording mode inputs 1 8 and tracks 1 8 correspond to each other When the status key of a track is lit in red the signal of that input can be recorded on the track When the status key is out or lit in green the signal from the respective input is sent directly to a point immediately before the MASTER fader The insert and send return effects are available also in 8 track recor
152. age will be transmitted when the MRS 1608 stops or begins running default setting OFF Transmission off Start Stop Continue messages will not be transmitted 172 ZOOM MRS 1608 Turning Program Change messages on or off You can specify whether Program Change messages will be transmitted Program Change are MIDI messages that changes a sound number of MIDI device such as synthesizer Refer to steps 1 4 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication MIDI PRG CHG on the display and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to select one of the following settings PRG CHG ON Transmission on When the sound of the rhythm section is switched at the MRS 1608 a Program Change message for the respective MIDI channel is sent out default setting OFF Transmission off Program Change messages will not be transmitted HINT There is no item for turning Program Change receive on or off This function is always enabled except when the drum kit bass program channel is off Turning MIDI Time Code MTC messages on or off You can specify whether MIDI Time Code MTC messages used for synchronization will be transmitted Refer to steps 1 4 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication MIDI MTC on the display and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to select one of the following settings 24 24 frames second 25 25 frames second 29 97 29 97 fr
153. ain amp sound of American made Rectifier series CrnchCmp Crunch sound with a touch of compression 9002Lead ZOOM 9002 sound F Tweed Sound of a small American made vintage tube amp BlackPnl Heavy metal sound of 5100 series American made stack amp MatchCru Crunch sound of a modern class A amp Sticky Tight crunch sound HardPick Hard crunch sound RockDrv Straight rock drive sound Duplex Spacious lead sound with dual overlay effect MadBass Distortion bass sound for high range chord playing and lead Straight Versatile straight lead sound JetSound Versatile jet sound E N E A Combo BG Overdrive sound with detailed long sustain E FDR Twin Clean sound of American made vintage tube amp E o Beatle Class A type Mersey Beat sound WildFuzz Vintage fuzz box E JB Style Octaver for guitar and bass unison riffs E Pitch 5 Even single notes sound like power chords ZOOM MRS 1608 202 BRT Drv Great sound of British 900 series stack amp Appendix Soldan High gain amp sound for single coil half tone settings MatchDrv Drive sound of a modern class A amp Snake Heavy metal sound with a solid bottom Crunch Ensemble of 800 series crunch and delay Ballad Warm lead sound Metal X Metal sound with subtle overtones DP Drv 1970 s hard rock sound WetDrive
154. al sent SUB OUT SEND 0 127 from the track input to the A A A LEVEL STEREO SUB OUT jack p 82 n Adjusts panning for the signal sent EN QUT SEND ie from the track input to the 0 STEREO SUB OUT jack Adjusts the panning value of U track input signal For stereo PAN R100 tracks the parameter adjusts the left right level balance ar Selects the V take to use for the _ 1 track gt p 35 x stands for the V TAKE y 1 10 track number and y for the V take number FADER 0 127 Adjusts the current volume level LVL 0 127 Adjusts the recording level Controls the stereo link function STEREO LINK ON OFF for linking two mono tracks p 82 Allows inverting the track input _ INVERT ON OFF phase When set to off the phase is symbol denotes a parameter that can be switched on and off directly with a key in the track parameter section O Valid parameter for this track input A The triangle denotes a parameter that is only displayed when the SUB OUT SEND LVL ON OFF parameter for the master track is off ZOOM MRS 1608 81 Reference Mixer Linking two tracks stereo link Assigning an input track signal to the SUB OUT jack In the MRS 1608 the parameters of adjacent odd numbered even numbered mono tracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 can be linked resulting in a pair of stereo tracks This function is referred to
155. al size of all projects is larger than the capacity of one CD R RW disc the backup will automatically extend over multiple volumes with lower numbered projects being placed on lower numbered discs PRJ 000 Disc 1 PRJ 001 PRJ 000 iis RJ 00N PRJ 002 E pry one 008 2 PRJO3 PRJ 004 MRS 1608 PRJ 003 Disc 3 PRJ 004 NOTE Also if all projects were saved in one operation restoring will be on a single project basis 1 insert a CD R RW disc into the CD R RW drive To back up projects use a blank CD R RW disc or a CD RW disc that has been completely erased 2 From the main screen press the CD R RW key in the control section The CD R RW menu appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication CD R RW BACKUP on the display and press the ENTER key The display shows the indication BACKUP SAVE 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BACKUP ALL SAVE on the display and press the ENTER key The display shows the space required for the backup of all projects in MB megabytes 3B 5 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 162 ZOOM MRS 1608 ALL SAVE SURE 6 To execute the backup press the ENTER key To cancel press the EXIT key instead When you press the ENTER key backup starts from the project with the lowest number The display shows the disc number the projec
156. all MIDI channel playing information in a single track NOTE The following files cannot be read Format 1 or Format 2 SMF Files located on a CD ROM R RW disc not complying to the ISO 9660 Level 2 standard Files on a CD R RW disc which has not been finalized Reading an SMF into a project By performing the following steps you can read an SMF from a CD ROM R RW disc and load it in a project The maximum number of SMFs per project is 100 1 Insert the CD ROM or CD R RW disc containing the SMF into the CD R RW drive 2 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY SMF on the display and press the ENTER key The menu screen for SMF selection and playback appears SMF IMPORT 4 Verify that SMF IMPORT is shown on the display and press the ENTER key The names of SMFs on the CD ROM R RW disc are shown IMPORT SECM File name 5 Turn the dial to select the SMF to import NOTE If the desired file is not shown check whether the file is in Format 0 To execute the import process press the ENTER key When import is completed the disc is ejected from the CD R RW drive To import other SMFS repeat steps 1 6 7 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times HINT By u
157. ame of an insert effect patch 145 Applying the insert effect only to the monitor signal se DIRE NERA REIS 146 Using the send return effect 147 About the send return effect patches 147 Selecting a send return effect patch 147 Editing a send return effect patch 147 Storing swapping send return effect patches 148 Editing the name of a send return effect patch 149 Importing patches from another project 149 Reference Creating a CD 151 About creating an audio CD 151 About CD R RW discs 151 Creating an audio CD 152 Creating an audio CD by project 152 Creating an audio CD by album 153 Using the marker function to separate tracks 155 Including a playlist in an album 156 Playing an audio CD 157 Finalizing a CD R RW Disc 158 Erasing a CD RW 159 Loading an audio CD into a project 160 Backup and restore 161 Saving a single project to CD R RW disc 161 Saving all projects to CD R RW disc 162 Loading a project from CD R RW disc 163 Reference Projects 165 About projects 165 Project operations 165 Basic procedure 165 Loading a project
158. ames second non drop ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference MIDI 30 30 frames second non drop When the MRS 1608 is running MTC messages with the respective frame per second setting are sent out OFF Transmission off MTC messages will not be transmitted MTC message output is based on recorder time information When using MTC to synchronize MIDI devices the MRS 1608 always functions as MTC master Set up the other device to operate as MTC slave which receives MTC messages and functions accordingly An example for synchronizing the MRS 1608 with a sequencer is shown below MTC slave MIDI Een IN Ec f gt Sequencer MIDI OUT connector MRS 1608 HINT allows more precise synchronization than MIDI Timing Clock messages When transmission is enabled Timing Clock Song Position Pointer and Start Stop Continue messages will all be disabled 173 Reference MIDI Using the SMF player Using the SMF player function the MRS 1608 can read Format 0 SMF Standard MIDI Files from a CD ROM R RW disc and load the contents into a project Once loaded an SMF can perform playback in sync with the recorder section or rhythm section using the sounds of the rhythm section or MIDI sound sources connected to the MIDI OUT connector This section explains how to use the SMF playback function HINT Format 0 is a type of SMF that contains
159. ameters Input signal sensitivity Input signal recording level Input signal phase Level of signal sent to STEREO SUB OUT jack If an input signal is not assigned to a track recording track not selected the input signal will be sent straight to the MASTER fader In this condition the following parameters can be adjusted Input signal panning Send return effect intensity HINT In the 8 track recording mode you can set the panning value and send level for each input Track mixer Serves to process the playback signals of the recorder tracks 1 16 and the sound of the drum bass track and to mix these signals to stereo The mixer allows you to adjust the volume with faders and set panning and EQ for each track The track mixer lets you adjust the following parameters for each track Track volume Track panning e Track phase e V take used for the track audio tracks only e High frequency range EQ boost cut amount turnover frequency Mid frequency range EQ boost cut amount turnover frequency and bandwidth e Low frequency range EQ boost cut amount turnover frequency e Send return effect intensity e Signal level sent to STEREO SUB OUT jack e Stereo link p 82 settings audio tracks 1 8 only HINT Audio tracks 9 10 15 16 and the drum track are stereo channels For these parameter settings except phase and V take number audio tracks only are linked for the L R
160. and beat Reference Recorder Playing back the same passage repeatedly A B repeat function A B repeat is a function that repeatedly plays back a desired region of the song This is useful to listen to the same region repeatedly for example during practice 1 Move to the point at which you want to begin repeat playback and press the A B REPEAT key in the control section The key flashes and the repeat start location point A is specified HINT The A B point can be specified either during playback or when the recorder is stopped 2 Move to the point at which you want to end repeat playback and press the A B REPEAT key once more The A B REPEAT key will change from flashing to constantly lit and the repeat end location point B is set NOTE To redo the A B point setting press the A B REPEAT key so that it goes out and then repeat the procedure from step 1 f you specify a point B that is located earlier than point A the region from points B A will be played repeatedly 3 To begin repeat playback press the PLAY gt key Repeat playback will begin when you press the PLAY gt key while the REPEAT key is lit When the point B is reached the recorder jumps to point A and playback continues 4 To stop repeat playback press the STOP Bi key Even after pressing the STOP Bl key to stop playback you can perform repeat playback again as many times as desired as
161. ant parts such as vocals or guitar solos and select the best take later A full range of editing functions is provided allowing you to copy or move audio data Special functions including time stretch compression and pitch compensation are also available E Versatile input output configuration allows simultaneous recording in 8 channels The MRS 1608 features 3 inputs on the front and rear panels feeding a total of 8 channels The unit can accommodate a wide range of sources including high impedance instruments such as guitar and bass dynamic or condenser mics as well as synthesizers and other line level devices Normally any two input signals will be selected for recording but an 8 track recording mode for simultaneous recording of up to 8 signals is also available This is great for multi miking of drum sets or for capturing the performance of an entire band On the output side there are analog and digital optical stereo outputs as well as a STEREO SUB OUT connector that can carry a separate mix Possible applications include monitoring during recording and use as a send output for an external effect E Bounce function allows ping pong recording of 16 tracks simultaneously The bounce function makes it easy to consolidate multiple tracks into one or two tracks with just a few keystrokes Play all 16 tracks add the drum bass sound and bounce the result onto two empty V takes If you select the master track as bounce target interna
162. ar bass open A D E G D modal 24 drum bass 16 bit linear PCM 50 36 per kit 12 pad x 3 bank 13 12 velocity sensitive 48 PPON 1 4 8 4 511 patterns per project 10 songs per project 999 measures per song 99 measures per pattern Approx 20 000 notes per song 40 0 250 0 BPM Hard disk drive A D conversion D A conversion Sampling frequency Signal processing Frequency response S N ratio Dynamic range THD N Diaplay Guitar bass input Balanced unbalanced input Line input Phantom power supply Input level Master output Headphones output Sub output Digital output MIDI Control input Expansion board slot Dimension Weight Power supply Power consumption Supplied accessory Optional accessory 0 dBm 0 775 Vrms 3 5 inch E IDE type 24 bit 64 times oversampling 24 bit 128 times oversampling 44 1 kHz 24 bit 20Hz 20kHz 1 dB 10 kilohm load 93 dB IHF A 97 dB IHF A 0 02 400 Hz 10 kilohm load 122 x 65 mm custom LCD with backlight 2 x standard mono phone jack Input impedance 500 kilohm 8x XLR standard phone combo jack Balanced operation Input impedance 1 kilohm pin 2 hot Unbalanced operation Input impedance 50 kilohm RCA phono jacks L R Input impedance 10 kilohm Rated input level 10 dBm 48 V on off switch 50 dBm to 4 dBm continuously variable RCA phono jacks L R Output impedance 1 kilohm Rated output level 10
163. ard disk the optional UIB 02 card is necessary For information on using the option card see page 183 Any subfolders in the WAV AIFF folder are not recognized by the MRS 1608 The following procedure will not allow you to first listen to the audio files Confirm file content and file name before you start the procedure 1 Reter to steps 1 6 of Basic phrase loading steps to select WAV AIFF as import source Then press the ENTER key The indication IMPORT CD ROM appears on the display You can now select the source device IMPORT 1 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select the source device CD ROM CD R RW drive or IntHDD internal hard disk and press the ENTER key The unit searches for WAV AIFF files on the specified device When files are found their names are listed on the display File name HINT If you select CD ROM as source without a disc in the drive the indication IMPORT Ins Disc appears on the display and the tray of the CD R RW drive opens To continue insert a disc containing audio files and press the ENTER key 3 Turn the dial to select the audio file to import When accessing a disc in the CD R RW drive which has audio files in a certain folder turn the dial to display the folder name When a folder is selected the indication Folder is shown in the right side of the display Folder name When you press the ENTER key
164. as stereo link The setting procedure is as follows 1 Press any key in the track parameter section 2 Press the status key of one of the mono tracks that you want to stereo link 3 Repeatedly press the cursor down key until the following indication appears This is the STEREO LINK parameter screen 4 Turn the dial to switch the setting ON Stereo linking will be enabled immediately so that the selected track and the adjacent odd numbered even numbered track are linked To defeat stereo linking return the setting to OFF 5 To return to the main Screen press the EXIT key HINT To adjust the volume of stereo linked tracks use the odd numbered fader The even numbered fader will have no effect The PAN parameter of two stereo linked tracks will function as a balance parameter that adjusts the volume balance between the tracks Also when stereo link is on the phase parameter and V take selection parameter can be set individually for each track In the default condition of a project the STEREO SUB OUT jack carries the same signal as the MASTER OUTPUT jacks Therefore it can be used as an extra headphone jack If required the signal level and panning of the signal sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack can be controlled individually for each input or track creating a mix that is different from that of the MASTER OUTPUT jacks This is convenient to create a monitoring mix or to send only the signal from a
165. ass program MIDI channels OFF Synchronization may become unstable if MIDI Timing Clock and other MIDI messages are being transmitted simultaneously Turning Song Position Pointer messages on or off You can specify whether Song Position Pointer messages will be transmitted Song Position Pointer is a MIDI message that indicates the current position as a beat count from the start Normally it is used in conjunction with Timing Clock Refer to steps 1 4 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication MIDI SPP on the display and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to select one of the following settings ON Transmission on MIDI Song Position Pointer messages will be transmitted when a locate operation is performed on the MRS 1608 default setting OFF Transmission off Song Position Pointer messages will not be transmitted Turning Start Stop Continue messages on or off You can specify whether Start Stop Continue messages will be transmitted Start Stop Continue are MIDI messages that control the transport of a device causing it to run or stop Normally these messages are used in conjunction with Timing Clock Refer to steps 1 4 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication MIDI COMMAND on the display and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to select one of the following settings COMMAND ON Transmission The appropriate Start Stop Continue mess
166. at the copy destination will be overwritten erased This is convenient to use one phrase as a starting point and save it with different parameter settings 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY PHRASE on the display and press the ENTER key The phrase screen appears PHRASE Ho 3 Turn the dial to select the copy source 4 Pressthe INSERT COPY key in the rhythm section The screen for specifying the copy destination phrase number appears CORY TU 5 5 Turn the dial to select the phrase number for the copy destination and press the ENTER key The indication COPY SURE appears on the display NOTE If a phrase already exists at the copy destination number it will be erased and replaced by the copy source phrase Take care not to accidentally delete a phrase To carry out the copy process press the ENTER key once more The phrase is copied and the phrase screen appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Reference Phrase Looping Deleting a phrase You can return a phrase to the blank empty condition as follows NOTE Once deleted a phrase cannot be restored Use this function with care 1
167. aximum of 99 projects can be registered in a playlist To change projects in a playlist Use the cursor left right keys to select the position number for which you want to change the project and use the dial to select another project To insert a project in a playlist Use the cursor left right keys to select the position number where you want to insert a project Press the INSERT COPY key in the rhythm section The indication INSERT appears on the display In this condition use the dial to select another project and press the ENTER key Subsequent projects are renumbered To delete a project from a playlist Use the cursor left right keys to select the position number you want to delete Press the DELETE ERASE key in the rhythm section The indication DELETE SURE appears on the display To delete the project from the playlist press the ENTER key Subsequent projects are renumbered To delete all projects from a playlist On the playlist registration screen press the DELETE ERASE key in the rhythm section and then the cursor down Key The indication ALL DEL SURE appears on the display To delete all projects from the playlist press the ENTER key To switch the V take for the master track Press the EXIT key repeatedly to return to the main screen Load the project for which you want to switch the V take and select the V take for the master track Then return to the playlist registratio
168. back appears The second line of the display shows the track number and playback method for the inserted audio CD If a non finalized disc is inserted a symbol is shown Reference Creating a CD Track number The number of the currently selected track on the audio CD is shown Finalize status When a symbol is shown here a non finalized CD R RW disc is inserted PLAVER Track DIGITAL 8 333 MS MEASURE BEAT MARKER Current position in track Playback method The location in the Indicates the currently current track is shown selected audio CD here in hours H playback method minutes M DIGITAL or ANALOG and seconds S 5 Use the REW 44 and FF gt gt keys in the transport section to select the track to be played The FF gt gt key selects the next track and REW 44 key selects the previous track Use the cursor up down keys to select the playback method for the audio CD The following two methods are available DIGITAL Digital playback The digital audio signal of the CD is read by the MRS 1608 in the digital domain and becomes available as an audio signal at the rear panel MASTER OUTPUT jacks DIGITAL OUTPUT connectors and front panel MASTER PHONES jack Default setting The audio CD playback volume can be adjusted with the MASTER fader ANALOG Analog playback The audio signal of the CD is reproduced via the headphone outputs of the CD R RW driv
169. ble in 650 MB and 700 MB capacities To newly write audio data of the MRS 1608 to disc a blank or completely erased CD RW is required As long as the disc has not been finalized it is possible to add audio data up to the maximum capacity of the disc Even when finalized some CD players may not be able to play CD RW discs Disc Write Add data Erase CD R Once only Yes No Many times after CD RW Yes Yes erasing NOTE When using commercially available pre formatted CD RW discs perform an erase operation first as described on page 159 ZOOM MRS 1608 151 Reference Creating a CD Creating an audio CD This section describes how to create an audio CD using a completed project as source material Creating an audio CD by project You can write the contents of the master track of the current project to a CD R RW disc When creating an audio CD by project you can select any desired V take of the master track as source 1 Insert a CD R RW disc into the integrated CD R RW drive To newly write audio data use a blank CD R RW disc or a CD RW disc that has been completely erased Even when audio data are present adding data is possible as long as the disc has not been finalized 2 Select the project to be used as write source NOTE Before starting the procedure use the trimming function on the V take to make sure that it does not include unwanted blank portions at the beginning a
170. by all eight channels Each effect module comprises two aspects namely the effect type and the effect parameters Effect type and parameter settings for an effect module are collectively referred to as a patch Input output type DIST ACO BASS SIM PREAMP DRIVE m VOL PDL gt MODULATION DELAY 3 BASS Mono Stereo COMP LIM m PRE DE ESSER COMP LIM MIC PRE DUAL MIC COMP LIM MIC PRE COMP LIM COMP LIM 8x COMP EQ COMP LIM VOL PDL applies to all inputs Mono x 8 VOL PDL Mono x 8 ISOLATOR Stereo Stereo ZOOM MRS 1608 139 Reference Effects Patch PRE AMP DRIVE MODULATION VOL PDL H DELAY E PAT LVL gt gt A project contains 320 patches which are organized according to the nine algorithms You can instantly switch insert effect settings simply by selecting the appropriate algorithm and then selecting a patch The table below shows the number of patches for each algorithm Algorithm CLEAN 30 22 DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS MIC DUAL MIC 8X COMP EQ LINE MASTERING Patches preprogrammed patches Changing the insert location of the insert effect In the default condition of a project the insert effect is applied to the input mixer However you may change the insert loca
171. can perform waveform data editing on a specified range of a sample Copying a sample You can copy a sample into any other sample number If a sample exists at the copy destination number it will be overwritten This is useful to create identical samples with different start and end points 1 Fromthe main screen press the RHYTHM key in the display section The key lights up and the rhythm section can be used independently 2 Pressthe UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The rhythm utility menu appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY SAMPLE on the display and press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the sample appears on the display SAMFLE SAMPLER Sample name Ha Sample number 4 Turn the dial to select the sample you want to copy 5 Pressthe INSERT COPY key in the rhythm section The copy destination sample number display appears Turn the dial to select the copy destination sample number and press the ENTER key The indication COPY SURE appears on the display 126 ZOOM MRS 1608 HINT The copy process will overwrite the existing sample at the destination number Take care not to accidentally overwrite a sample that you want to keep 7 To execute the copy process press the ENTER key When the copy operation is completed the unit returns to the sample selection screen By pressing the EXI
172. ch being assigned to the pads up by 1 octave Any change in a setting takes effect immediately 6 Hit the pads to play Switch the BASS status key between on and off as necessary and use the BASS fader to adjust the volume 7 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key Reference Rhythm Creating an original rhythm pattern This section explains how you can create your own original rhythm patterns There are two ways of doing this real time input where you record your play on the top panel pads and step input where play is stopped and you enter the sounds one by one Preparations Before starting to record you must make various settings for the rhythm pattern such as number of measures and time signature and quantize value shortest unit for recording By default an empty rhythm pattern has a 4 4 time signature and a duration of 2 measures NOTE After you have started the rhythm pattern input procedure you can no longer change the time signature and number of measures Be sure to make these settings beforehand 1 Fromthe main screen press the PATTERN key The rhythm pattern selection screen appears on the display 2 Press the RHYTHM key The key lights up and creating and editing a rhythm pattern becomes possible 3 Turn the dial to select an empty rhythm pattern The indication EMPTY appears on the display when an empty pattern is selected HINT If there
173. ch stereo link is turned on the fader of the even numbered channel will have no effect Either turn stereo link off p 82 or operate the fader of the odd numbered channel The display indicates Don t Play and playback is not possible The recorder will not operate in the current screen Press the EXIT key several times to switch to the main screen No sound from input signal or sound is very weak Make sure that the respective ON OFF key of the input is lit Make sure that the respective INPUT control or the GUITAR BASS INPUT control is raised Make sure that the REC LEVEL control is raised If it is raised temporarily turn it down and then up again The indication Stop Recorder is shown on the display and operation is not possible The current operation is not possible while the recorder is operating Press the STOP W key to stop the recorder Problems during recording Cannot record on a track Make sure that you have selected a recording track Check whether you have run out of free space on the hard disk gt 167 Recording is not possible if the project is write protected Either turn protect off gt p 169 or use a different project e While the 8 track recording function p 45 is active recording on tracks 9 10 15 16 and the master track is not possible To record on these tracks turn off 8 track recording The signal from an instrument o
174. chronization with an external MIDI device is only possible by using the MIDI clock or MTC output from the MRS 1608 The MRS 1608 cannot synchronize to a MIDI clock or MTC supplied by an external device When synchronizing on the timing clock MIDI clock make sure that output is enabled for Timing Clock Song Position Pointer and Start Stop Continue 189 Troubleshooting messages at the MRS 1608 p 172 When synchronizing on the MTC MIDI Time Code make sure that MTC output is enabled at the MRS 1608 p 173 Make sure that the external MIDI device is set to receive MIDI clock or MTC and synchronize to it Make sure that the external MIDI device is in playback mode Cannot load SMF from CD ROM or CD R RW disc Make sure that the SMF is Format 0 and that the file name and extension are appropriate An SMF located on an unfinalized CD R RW cannot be loaded Cannot play SMF Make sure that the SMF playback setting is ON p 176 Problems with CD R RW drive Cannot play audio CD created with MRS 1608 on ordinary CD player Check whether the disc was finalized On some older CD players CD R RW discs will not play properly as audio CDs even if the disc was finalized Discs created using CD RW media may not be playable on an ordinary CD player Cannot write audio data to CD R RW disc If the disc was already finalized no more data can be added to it Cannot
175. conjunction with the recorder section rhythm section 176 ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Other Functions This section explains various other functions of the MRS 1608 Playing several projects continuously sequence play The MRS 1608 lets you line up the master tracks from multiple projects saved on the hard disk and play them continuously in a specified order sequence play This is handy to record several projects on an external device such as a MD recorder To use sequence play you create a playlist which specifies the order of projects Up to 10 different playlists can be created You can also import playlist information into an album used for creating an audio CD Creating a playlist Register projects in a playlist as follows 1 Verify that the V take you want to play is selected for each project s master track 2 From the main screen press the PROJECT key in the display section The project menu for various project related functions appears PROJECT SELECT 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PROJECT SEQ PLAY on the display and press the ENTER key The display shows the screen for selecting a playlist If there are no existing playlists the display shows EMPTY MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER 4 Turn the dial to select the playlist for which you want to register projects and press the
176. corded track The action of switching a currently playing track to record mode is called punch in and the action of switching back from recording to playback is called punch out The MRS 1608 provides two ways to do this You can use the panel keys or a foot switch ZOOM FS 01 sold separately to punch in out manually manual punch in out or you can cause punch in out to occur automatically at previously specified points auto punch in out NOTE When the 8 track recording function p 45 is active punch in out cannot be used Using manual punch in out To perform manual punch in out proceed as follows HINT To use a foot switch for punch in out connect the separately available ZOOM FS 01 to the FOOT SW jack on the front panel Reference Recorder n the default condition of the MRS 1608 the foot switch is set to control recorder playback stop To use the foot Switch to punch in out you must first change the foot Switch setting p 181 l Repeatedly press the status key of the track on which you want to perform punch in out until the key is lit in red 2 Raise the fader of this track to a suitable position 3 Use the ON OFF key to select the input and then play your instrument connected to the INPUT jack and use the INPUT control and REC LEVEL control to adjust the recording level 4 Locatea point several measures before the intended punch in point and press the PLAY gt
177. creen appears and the RHYTHM key flashes 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern you want to copy and press the RHYTHM key The RHYTHM key is now constantly lit and a rhythm pattern can be created or edited 3 Press the INSERT COPY key in the rhythm section The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select the copy destination rhythm pattern number Copy destination rhythm pattern number HINT e An empty pattern is shown with an E to the right of the number e When you select an existing rhythm pattern as destination it will be overwritten with the content of the copy source 4 Turn the dial to select the number of the rhythm pattern to use as copy destination and press the ENTER key The indication COPY SURE appears on the display 5 To execute the copy process press the ENTER key once more When the copy operation is completed the display returns to the rhythm pattern selection screen with the 102 ZOOM MRS 1608 copy destination rhythm pattern as the selected pattern By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time return to the main Screen press the EXIT key several times Deleting a rhythm pattern This section explains how to delete all data from a specified rhythm pattern returning it to the blank state 1 Fromthe main screen press the PATT
178. cribed below Assigning a name to a sampler program You can assign a name to a sampler program as follows 1 Fromthe main screen press the RHYTHM key so that the key lights up 2 Press the DRUM and BASS keys in the rhythm section simultaneously Both keys light up In this condition the pad sampler can be used 3 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key and then press the ENTER key twice You can now select a sampler program to load into the pad sampler 4 Turn the dial to select the sampler program to which you want to assign a name and press the ENTER key The sampler program is loaded and the unit returns to the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen 5 Press the KIT PROG key The menu for making sampler program settings appears PAD 1 8 SAMPLES 6 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the program name on the display MAME SPL FEG Reference Pad Sampler 7 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section to the character you want to change and turn the dial to select the new character For information on available characters refer to page 36 8 Repeat step 7 until the name is as desired 9 When input is complete press the EXIT key The new name is saved and the sampler program selection screen appears again To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Copying a sampler program You can copy a sampler prog
179. ct number will be assigned The first character of the project name flashes This indicates that you can change the project name 2 If necessary edit the project name To change the project name use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section to the character you want to change and turn the dial to select the new character The project name can also be edited later p 168 3 Press the ENTER key to create the project After the new project has been created it is loaded automatically the unit returns to the main screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT If the recorder is stopped and the main screen is shown you can call up the screen of step 1 simply by pressing the NEW PROJECT key 166 ZOOM MRS 1608 Checking the project size available hard disk capacity This operation displays the size of the currently loaded project the available capacity of the internal hard disk and the remaining recording time 1 Refer to steps 1 2 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication PROJECT SIZE on the display Then press the ENTER key 2 Use the cursor up down keys to select the desired screen from one the following options REMAIN MB units This shows the remaining space on the internal hard disk in MB megabyte units REMAIN h m units The approximate recordable time conver
180. cted For details on the procedure refer to the sections that follow 4 To return to the main Screen press the EXIT key several times Depending on which selection was made in step 2 the main screen may return automatically Loading a project You can select a project that was saved on the hard disk and load it 1 Refer to steps 1 2 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication PROJECT SELECT on the display Then press the ENTER key The name and number of the project to be loaded are shown on the display SEL FE J96 1 Project name i aa Project number 2 Turn the dial to select the desired project 3 Press the ENTER key to load the project When loading is completed the unit returns to the main screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT When power to the MRS 1608 is turned on the project that was last worked on will be loaded automatically Creating a new project This operation creates a new project 1 Reterto steps 1 2 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication PROJECT NEW on the display Then press the ENTER key The project to create is shown on the display Project number Project name The number of the newly created project is assigned automatically choosing the lowest free project number and a default name of PRJxxx where xxx is the proje
181. ction 46 Setting a mark 46 Locating a mark 47 Deleting a mark 47 Making settings for pre count operation 48 Reference Track Editing 49 Editing a range of data 49 Basic steps for range editing 49 Copying a specified range of data 50 Moving a specified range of data 51 Erasing a specified range of data 52 Trimming a specified range of data 52 Fade in fade out of a specified data range 53 Reversing a specified range of audio data 54 Changing the duration of a specified range Of data n gage Ie M LR 54 Compensating the pitch of a specified range 55 Generating a 3 part harmony from a specified range of audio data 57 Generating a 1 part harmony from a specified range of audio data 59 Editing using V takes 61 Basic steps for V take editing 61 Erasing a 62 Copying a V take 62 Moving a 63 Exchanging V takes 63 Importing a V take from another project 64 Track capture and swap 65 Capturing a track 65 Swapping track data and
182. ctions EFX LVL 0 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect sound ZOOM MRS 1608 201 Appendix Insert Effect algorithm No 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Name Comment Standard Basic sound touched up for recording J Chorus JC clean sound Phaser Emulates a vintage phase effect DryComp Line input clean sound with a hint of doubling RiffCLN roll sound bringing out differences between guitars WideCLN Wide clean sound with crunch PunchCLN Airy sound with a punch Arpeggio Clean sound for arpeggios CleanCH Clean channel sound of an American made vintage tube amp 50sRNB Tremolo sound for rhythm amp blues StrmBeat Basic sound for strummed backing CompCIn Natural compression sound E N 12 Clean Clean sound with an upper octave mixed in E Funky Funky cutting sound A FDR CIn Clean sound of American made vintage tube amp Rockbily Rockabilly sound with short delay NYFusion Clean sound for direct line recording Wet Rhy Cutting sound for ballads JazzTone Clean sound for jazz DeepFLG Clean flanging sound ARRMWah Clean wah sound using FIX WAH Kaitei Mellow echoed sound for arpeggios or lead EMPTY E E o E E DIST algorithm 2 15 o Comment MRS Drv Full distortion with rich sustain RCT BG High g
183. d patches numbered 0 29 If desired you can edit these patches to modify the effect further p 147 Quick Tour 3 Select the patch for the other send return effect in the same way 4 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times HINT In the project default condition the send level for the send return effect is set to zero for each track Therefore you need to raise the setting to verify the sound produced by the effect Adjusting the send return effect intensity for each track 5 From the main screen press the CHORUS DELAY SEND key or REVERB SEND key in the effect section to set the respective level The display will indicate the send level that is currently set for the effect For example a screen such as shown below appears when the REVERB SEND key is pressed CHORUS DELAY SEND REVERB SEND EE Send level setting Use the cursor left right keys or the status keys to select the track for which you want to adjust the send level 7 While playing the song turn the dial to adjust the send level value 8 Adjust the send level for other tracks in the same way 9 Adjust the intensity of the other send return effect in the same way 10 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ZOOM MRS 1608 31 Quick Tour 4 4 Applying the insert effect to a track You can apply the insert effect to the ou
184. dBm Standard stereo phone jack 50 mW into 32 ohm load Standard stereo phone jack 50 mW into 32 ohm load S P DIF optical 20 bit IN OUT FS01 connector FP02 connector 1 490 W x 450 D x 125 mm 7 8 kg CD R RW drive installed 7 3 kg CD R RW drive uninstalled DCI2 V 3 A supplied AC adaptor AD 0011 30 W 12 V 2 5 A typical Operation manual AC adaptor cable CD ROM screws for CD R RW drive Foot switch FSO1 Expression pedal FP02 USB interface board UIB 02 CD R RW drive CD 02 Design and specifications are subject to change without notice ZOOM MRS 1608 187 Troubleshooting If there are problems during operation of the MRS 1608 check the following points first Problems during playback No sound or sound is very weak Check the connections to your monitor system and the volume setting of the system Make sure that the status keys in the mixer section are lit in green and that the faders are raised If a key is out press it to make it light up in green Make sure that the master fader is raised f a scene with the volume lowered has been assigned to a mark the volume will automatically be lowered when that mark is reached Delete the scene that is assigned to the mark p 85 The recorder will not operate when the RECORDER key is out Press the RECORDER key so that the key is lit Operating the fader does not affect the volume On channels for whi
185. data the second line of the display shows symbol D Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows Specify the end point of the range in the same way as described in step 4 If you press the PLAY We key the specified range will be played 7 When you have fully specified the import source press the ENTER key The indication IMPORT SURE appears on the display IMPORT SURE 8 To carry out the import process press the ENTER key again The phrase is imported When the import process is completed the phrase menu appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time ZOOM MRS 1608 69 Reference Phrase Looping Importing a WAV AIFF file You can import an audio file WAV AIFF from a CD ROM or CD R RW disc inserted in the CD R RW drive or from the internal hard disk Before doing this the following preparations are necessary When importing from the CD R RW drive Insert a CD ROM or CD R RW disc containing audio files into the CD R RW drive When importing from the internal hard disk Copy audio files from a computer into a folder named WAV AIFF immediately under the root directory top level folder of the internal hard disk The files must have the extension for WAV files or AIF for AIFF files NOTE To copy audio files to the internal h
186. defeated You will always be able to monitor the input signal during this time Performing this action will not delete or record anything on the track When you have finished rehearsing move again to a location earlier than the In point HINT To change the positions of the In point or Out point press the AUTO PUNCH IN OUT key so that the key goes out and then repeat steps 3 7 8 To actually perform auto punch in out hold down the REC 0 key and press the PLAY gt key The recorder will begin playing When you reach the In point recording will begin automatically punch in When you reach the Out point recording will end automatically and playback will resume punch out 9 When you have finished recording press the STOP W key 10 To listen to the recorded result repeatedly press the status key for the track on which you recorded until the key is lit green Then move to a location earlier than the In point and press the PLAY gt key To re do the punch in punch out recording repeat steps 5 9 11 When you are satisfied with the recording press the AUTO PUNCH IN OUT key so that the key goes out The auto punch in out function is turned off and the In point and Out point settings are cleared ZOOM MRS 1608 Recording several tracks on a master track mixdown function This section explains how to play recorded audio tracks as well as drum bass track sounds and record them as a
187. der and start recording When recording is finished stop the recorder 9 cancel the 8 track recording condition press the BTRACK RECORDING key The key goes out Marker function This function lets you set marks at any recorder position and return to the mark using a simple operation Up to 100 marks can be set HINT e tis also possible to switch mixer settings or effect setting groups scenes at a marked position p 84 When creating an audio CD marks can be used to provide index information This will allow the CD player to access specific points within tracks p 155 Setting a mark Here s how to assign a mark at the desired location in a song 1 Locate the point to which you want to assign a mark HINT A mark can be assigned either during playback or when stopped You can use the scrub function p 38 to locate the position with high precision 2 Press the MARK key in the control section A mark will be assigned to the current location The mark number will appear in the MARKER field of the counter MEASURE TICK 07 2 B1 lt Marker symbol Mark number The MARKER field shows the number of the mark at the current position or the closest preceding mark When the current position matches the mark a marker symbol appears to the right of the mark number 46 ZOOM MRS 1608 The mark number is assigned automatically in ascending
188. dial to select the scale type The scale type selections are Major Minor and Chrmtic Chromatic When you select Chromatic pitch compensation is performed to the nearest semitone The following illustrations show pitch compensation for the same melody using D Major and Chromatic Pitch compensation D Major Pitch compensation Chromatic 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PitchFix SPEED on the display then turn the dial to select the speed with which the pitch is adjusted The setting range is 0 30 Smaller values result in faster compensation speed For a natural effect select a fairly high value HINT By selecting a very high pitch compensation speed you can produce a robotic voice from a vocal source 5 Press the cursor down key to cause the counter indication to flash Then use the cursor left right keys and the dial to specify the start point for pitch compensation You can also use the MARKER M4 gt gt keys ZERO M4 key and REW 44 FF gt gt keys to locate the point By pressing the PLAY We key at this point you can check out the editing result 56 ZOOM MRS 1608 start pitch compensation hold down the REC 0 key and press the PLAY gt key Recording starts with the pitch compensation applied If you have selected BassSe
189. ding mode Reference Recorder Red Red Red Red Red Red Green Green or out 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MASTER NOTE n 8 track recording mode recording on tracks 9 10 15 16 is not possible To perform overdubbing on a mono track after you have recorded tracks 1 8 you must move the recorded takes to tracks 9 16 first p 63 n 8 track recording mode the auto punch in out and bounce functions are not available Assigning an input signal to a track After adjusting the level of the signals from the INPUT jacks 1 8 or the GUITAR BASS INPUT jacks 1 2 the signals are sent to tracks 1 8 in the recorder section 1 Verify that the instruments or microphones to be recorded are connected to the INPUT jacks 1 8 or GUITAR BASS INPUT jacks 1 2 NOTE You can use either GUITAR BASS INPUT jack 1 or INPUT jack 1 and either GUITAR BASS INPUT jack 2 or INPUT jack 2 If both jacks are connected the GUITAR BASS INPUT jacks 1 2 are given priority 2 Pressthe BTRACK RECORDING key in the input section The key lights up and the MRS 1608 switches to 8 track recording mode 3 Press the ON OFF keys for the INPUT jacks 1 8 ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Recorder When pressed a key lights up and the corresponding input is active 4 While the instruments are played adjust the INPUT controls to obtain a suitable input sensitivity level When using the GUITAR BASS
190. display In this condition use the dial to select another project and press the ENTER key Subsequent tracks are renumbered To delete a project from an album Use the cursor left right keys to select the track number you want to delete Press the DELETE ERASE key in the rhythm section The indication DELETE SURE appears on the display To delete the project from the album press the ENTER key Subsequent tracks are renumbered To delete all projects from an album On the album screen press the DELETE ERASE key in the rhythm section and then the cursor down key The indication ALL DEL SURE appears on the display To delete all projects from the album press the ENTER key 154 ZOOM MRS 1608 To switch the V take for the master track Press the EXIT key repeatedly to return to the main screen Load the project for which you want to switch the V take and select the V take for the master track Then return to the album screen 11 when you have stored all desired projects in the album press the ENTER key twice The display indication changes as follows PL BLIM SURE HINT If you press the ENTER key once more the indication xx Tracks BURN where xx is the number of tracks appears on the display You can check the total number of tracks that will be written to the disc from this screen 12 carry out the write process press the ENTER key once more By pressin
191. djust START Specifies the playback start point of the sample in milliseconds In the default condition this is the beginning of the sample ZOOM MRS 1608 125 Reference Pad Sampler END Specifies the playback end point of the sample in milliseconds In the default condition this is the end of the sample max 22 seconds NAME Specifies the name of the sample e SIZE Indicates the size of the currently displayed sample 7 Use the dial and the cursor keys to adjust the setting Setting START END Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section on the display and turn the dial to adjust the value Setting NAME Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section to the character you want to change and turn the dial to select the new character HINT e f you press the PLAY key while setting a parameter the sample is played The SIZE parameter is for information only and cannot be changed If you press the cursor left right keys you can select the unit between KB kilobytes and ms milliseconds 8 Repeat steps 6 7 to adjust all desired parameters You can also press the EXIT key to return to the sample selection screen and then select another sample for parameter adjustment 9 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Editing a sample This section describes how you can copy and delete samples in the sample pool and how you
192. djusts the time between the threshold and compression finish MIC PRE module Parameter Type COLOR MIC PRE DE ESSER Preamp for external microphone Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description Adjust the frequency response FLAT Flat response HPF Low cut COLOR AcoGt Acoustic guitar characteristics HPF Aco Acoustic guitar characteristics with low cut Vocal Vocal characteristics HPF Vo Vocal characteristics with low cut TONE 0 10 Adjusts the tone LEVEL 1 8 Adjusts the module output level DE ESSER 0 10 Adjusts the cut amount of vocal sibilants 3 BAND EQ module See the CLEAN DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS algorithm MODULATION DELAY module Type Parameter DEPTH RATE MIX CHORUS Adds pulsation and spaciousness to the sound DEPTH RATE V CHORUS MIX Simulates the warm sound of a vintage effect FLANGER DEPTH RATE FB Produces a unique undulating sound RATE COLOR PHASER Produces a swooshing sound DEPTH RATE TREMOLO CLIP Periodically varies the level of the sound SHIFT TONE PITCH Modifies the pitch of the direct sound TIME CURVE SLOW ATK Creates a violin playing sound with soft attack DEPTH RATE VIBE BALANCE Automatic vibrato effect ZOOM MRS 1608 Appendix DEPTH RATE RESO
193. e Adjust the volume with the volume control of the drive 7 Tostart playback of the audio CD press the PLAY gt key Playback of the selected track starts When the track is finished playback continues with the next track During audio CD playback all faders except for the MASTER fader as well as the EQ reverb chorus delay and pan settings are disabled ZOOM MRS 1608 157 Reference Creating a CD 8 For track selection and for controlling playback stop pause use the transport section keys PLAY gt key Playback of the selected track starts Pressing the key during playback sets the system to pause mode STOP W key Playback stops and the system returns to the beginning of the current track FF gt gt key Playback stops and the system jumps to the beginning of the next track REW 44 key Playback stops and the system jumps to the beginning of the previous track 9 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Finalizing a CD R RW Disc Finalizing a CD R RW disc to which audio data were written refers to the procedure of turning it into a finished audio CD When a CD R disc has been finalized it will be playable on an ordinary CD player A CD RW may not be playable on an ordinary CD player even after it has been finalized After a disc has been finalized no more tracks can be added to it 1 e Insert the disc to finalize into the CD R RW
194. e EXIT key several times to return to the main screen When you carry out bounce recording in this condition you can record the pad sampler signal drum track onto any audio track ZOOM MRS 1608 135 Reference Pad Sampler 5 Press the DRUM and BASS keys in the rhythm section simultaneously to activate the pad sampler 6 Select the sampler program you want to play For details see Using the pads to play the pad sampler p 133 7 Pressthe EXIT key several times to return to the main screen 8 Repeatedly press the status key of the audio track on which to record until the key is lit in red 9 Press the BOUNCE key in the control section so that the key is lit in red 10 Press the PLAY gt key while holding down the REC 0 key to start bounce recording Four pre count clicks are heard and then bounce recording starts 11 Hit the pads to play The pad sampler signal is recorded directly on the audio track You can switch the pad bank as necessary and use the roll play function to periodically repeat sample sounds p 133 12 To stop recording press the STOP W key 13 To check the recorded result press the ZERO M4 key to return to the recorder start position and then press the PLAY gt key 14 When the recording is as you want it press the BOUNCE key so that the key goes out Then perform steps 1 4 to return the recording source setting to MASTER
195. e INPUT SOURCE key in the effect section The current insert effect position is shown on the display 2 Turn the dial to bring up the indication MASTER on the second line of the display Now the insert effect is inserted immediately before the MASTER fader 3 Press the EXIT key The unit returns to the main screen Selecting a patch for the insert effect 4 Press the MASTERING key in the effect section The insert effect algorithm is switched to MASTERING The display shows the currently selected patch DUAL Ji MIC LINE 8x COMP EQ INSERT Ha B Plusnmltfa 5 While playing the song turn the dial to select the patch If desired you can edit the patch to modify the effect further p 142 NOTE If the signal sounds distorted when the mastering effect is applied make sure that there is no distortion in the playback sound of individual tracks and lower all fader settings as necessary When you have verified that the sound is as desired press the EXIT key The unit returns to the main screen 33 Quick Tour 5 2 Mixdown on the master track After mastering effect settings have been completed record the final mix on the master track l Press the ZERO M4 key to return to the beginning of the song 2 Press the PLAY gt key to play the song and check the level after the MASTER fader The signal level after th
196. e MASTER fader can be checked by observing the level meter in the lower right of the display If the 0 dB segment lights up during play turn down the MASTER fader to perform fine adjustment After checking the level press the STOP Bl key Left channel signal level Right channel signal level 3 Repeatedly press the MASTER status key so that the key lights up in red MASTER 17 18 13 14 15 16 js _ TE The master track can now be recorded 4 Move to the recorder start position Then hold down the REC 0 key and press the PLAY gt key Recording on the master track starts 5 When recording is completed press the STOP BM key To play the master track repeatedly press the MASTER status key until it is lit in green While the MASTER status key is lit in green the master track can be played other status keys go out and the signals from other tracks are muted The insert and send return effects are also disabled 7 Return to the beginning of the song and press the PLAY 59 key The master track is played back To stop playback press the STOP Bl key 8 To return the MRS 1608 to normal operation repeatedly press the MASTER status key until it is out Muting of other tracks is canceled and the status keys revert to the original condition HINT Like the other tracks the master track also has 10 V takes You can play the mast
197. e Inthe DUAL MIC algorithm the modules assigned to the L and R channels can be edited separately The indication L on the first line of the display means that the module for the left channel is selected The indication R means that the module for the right channel is selected The 8x COMP EQ algorithm has one high pass filter compressor and EQ per channel with individual on off control The number of the channel currently selected for operation is shown on the first line of the display Algorithm Module indication CLEAN DIST COMPRESS ACO BASS sim BASS COMP PRE DRY PRE AMP DRIVE 3BandEG MOTIL TOTAL EQ MODULATION DELAY ZNR VOL PDL PAT LVL COnP L IM HIC PRE MIC COMP LIM MICPRE DE ESSER SBandE MEDAILY TOTAL EQ MODULATION DELAY ZNR VOL PDL PAT LVL COMP L MicFre L DUAL MIC COMP LIM MICPRE TELAY L TOTAL DELAY ZNR VOL PDL PAT LVL HPF 1 HPF2 8x COMP EQ HPFS TOTAL VOL PDL PAT LVL COMP LIM TSOLATOR COMP LIM ISOLATOR 3BandEG TOTAL EQ MODULATION DELAY ZNR VOL PDL PAT LVL CHP LaFi HORML MASTERING 3BAND COMP LO FI NORMALIZER 3BandEG DIM RESU TOTAL EQ DIMENSION RESONANCE ZNR VOL PDL PAT LVL ZOOM MRS 1608 143 Reference Effects NOTE The indica
198. e PLAY We key in this condition will play the master track of the currently displayed project NOTE A project for whose master track an unrecorded V take is selected cannot be chosen as source material Make sure that a V take that you want to use is selected fthe master track data for projects included in an album have been deleted the album returns to the blank state 8 When the project for track 1 has been selected use the cursor right key to move to track 2 The display indication changes as follows EMD OF ALBUM Track 2 9 Turn the dial to select the project to be used as track 2 of the album 10 In the same way select projects for track 3 and subsequent tracks The maximum allowable number of tracks is 99 provided that there is enough free capacity on the disc HINT When you press the cursor down key the second line of the display shows REMAIN and the remaining write time on the inserted CD R RW disc appears on the counter Press the cursor up key to return to the previous indication To change projects in an album Use the cursor left right keys to select the track number for which you want to change the project and use the dial to select another project To insert projects in an album Use the cursor left right keys to select the track number where you want to insert a project Press the INSERT COPY key in the rhythm section The indication INSERT appears on the
199. e STOP lil key NOTE The demo song is write protected Even if you change the mix by adjusting fader or pan settings the changes will not be stored To retain any changes you have made cancel the write protect setting first p 169 20 ZOOM MRS 1608 Let s Record This section demonstrates the basic recording procedure of the MRS 1608 As an example it explains how to record a guitar connected to the GUITAR BASS INPUT jack 1 on track 1 1 Press the NEW PROJECT key and then press the ENTER key A new project is created and the recording standby condition is activated 2 Press the ON OFF key for input 1 so that the key lights up The jack to which the guitar is connected is now active ON OFF ON OFF 3 While playing your guitar adjust the GUITAR BASS INPUT control 1 to adjust the input sensitivity Make the adjustment so that the PEAK indicator flickers slightly when you play your instrument at its loudest volume 4 While playing your guitar adjust the recording level by turning the REC LEVEL control If the CLIP indicator lights up at high playing levels you should turn down the recording level The lower part of the display shows the current signal level RACK RECORDING LE INT IN2 IN3 IN4 INS ING I Current signal level 5 Repeatedly press status key 1 until the key is lit in red A track for
200. e bass mix amount 3 BAND EQ module See the CLEAN DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS algorithm ZOOM MRS 1608 197 Appendix MODULATION DELAY module Type Parameter CHORUS DEPTH RATE Adds pulsation and spaciousness to the sound FLANGER DEPTH RATE Produces a unique undulating sound PHASER RATE COLOR Produces a swooshing sound TREMOLO DEPTH RATE CLIP Periodically varies the level of the sound PITCH SHIFT TONE BALANCE Modifies the pitch of the direct sound RING MOD RATE BALANCE Produces a metallic sound DOUBLING TIME TONE Doubling effect with a delay time of up to 100 milliseconds DELAY TIME FB Delay effect with a delay time of up to 5 seconds ECHO TIME FB Delay effect with warm sound up to 5 second delay time Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description DEPTH 0 10 Adjusts the depth of the effect TREMOLO 1 30 T4 T 1 8 RATE FLANGER PHASER Adjusts the speed of the effect The T x setting results in sync with the rhythm 1 30 T 4x4 T 1 8 tempo Others 1 30 MIX 0 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect FLANGER 10 10 FB Adjusts the amount of feedback DELAY ECHO 0 10 COLOR 1 4 Specifies the type of phase tone CLIP 0 10 Emphasizes the effect SHIFT 24 0 1
201. e counter and turn the dial to specify the erase start point Press the ENTER key The display indication changes to Ers Src END MEASURE T TICK MARKER 120 28 045 424 eo 4 Use the same procedure as in step 2 to specify the erase range end point If you press the PLAY We key at this point the specified range will be played D Press the ENTER key The indication ERASE SURE appears on the display 6 To execute the erase operation press the ENTER key When the erase operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Trimming a specified range of data You can erase the audio data of a specified range and adjust the data start end point trimming For example when preparing to burn the master track onto a CD R RW disc you might want to remove unwanted portions at the start and the end of the V take that will be used NOTE When data before a specified section are erased trimmed the remaining audio data will move up by that amount Therefore the timing may become mismatched with regard to other tracks 1 Refer to Basic steps for range editing to select the track V take from which you want to trim data and press the ENTER key The indication Trim Src START appears on the display MEASURE BEAT BB
202. e into a stereo signal for output via the output jacks and for mixdown on dedicated master tracks Recorder Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 Track 6 Track 7 Track 8 From immediately after MASTER fader lt To immediately before MASTER fader Bass sound source Drum sound source Pad sampler Rhythm section Chorus delay gt e Effects Process input signals recorder playback signals or drum bass sound source signals in various ways to achieve various sound characteristics CD R RW drive Allows creating an audio CD or backing up recorded contents Also serves for importing audio material from a CD or CD ROM inserted in the drive The following diagram shows the relationship and signal flow between each section MASTER OUTPUT To master track 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MASTER Mixer From master track ZOOM MRS 1608 Introducing the MRS 1608 Recorder The recorder section of the MRS 1608 has 16 audio tracks eight mono tracks tracks 1 8 and four stereo tracks tracks 9 10 15 16 A track is a separate section for recording audio data Up to 8 tracks can be recorded simultaneously and up to 16 tracks can be played back simultaneously Each of the tracks ha
203. e reves 161 Bass 87 90 Bass 88 MIDI 171 Real time input 95 Step InpUE ense 98 Bass tracki 216i eL sy got 11 23 Bounce a staR eu 42 BSPHQ dido 109 BsVOL ree So ode heads Male adu 109 Bc eve eee a a 65 CD R RW ISG eee E nex 151 Finalizing a CD R RW disc 158 Importing a project from CD R RW disc 163 Saving a single project on CD R RW disc 161 Saving all projects on CD R RW disc 162 CD R RW drive related troubleshooting information 190 CD R RW drive Installing the CD R RW drive 17 CD RWEISC unu ui e norte ater the thee E roche 151 Erasing a CD RW 159 Chord information Rhythm 100 Rhythm song 000 ee eee eee 108 CHORD Creating a 1 part harmony from a range of audio data 24e cie IE E LESS 59 Creating a 3 part harmony from a range of audio d t a serii eoh i UR 57 Entering chord information Rhythm song 108 147 Chromatic Pitch compensation for a range 55 Selecting a sound or scale to play with pads 91 Using the chromatic tuner 179 C
204. e rhythm pattern use the cursor left right keys to select the indication EDIT BarLen and press the ENTER key The current length of the pattern is shown as number of measures Number of measures 10 Turn the dial to select the desired setting The setting range is 1 99 measures 11 when the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the rhythm pattern selection screen Drum sequence real time input For real time input of a drum sequence you play the rhythm pattern on the pads of the MRS 1608 1 Atthe rhythm pattern screen select an empty rhythm pattern number If the RHYTHM key is flashing press it so that it is constantly lit 2 Pressthe DRUM key so that the key lights up In this condition you can play the drum kit with the pads Your play will be recorded as a drum sequence 3 As necessary press the BANK OCTAVE key to switch pad banks 4 Hold down the REC 0 key and press the PLAY gt key A four beat pre count is heard and rhythm pattern recording starts HINT The beat and the volume of the pre count clicks can be changed p 118 ZOOM MRS 1608 5 While listening to the metronome tap the pads Your performance on the pads will be recorded as a drum sequence according to the quantization setting The intensity with which you hit the pads will also be recorded When you reach the end of the pattern the unit automatically returns to
205. e s how to mix recorder tracks and the rhythm section sound onto two stereo channels and record these on the master track 1 if required refer to page 35 and select the desired V take for the master track 2 From the main screen press the MASTER status key repeatedly until the key is lit in red The master track is now ready for recording 3 Start recorder playback and adjust the mixing balance of the various tracks The individual track level settings as well as the insert effect and send return effect settings all have an influence on the signal that is sent to the master track Adjust levels while watching the L R level meter and make sure that no signal clipping occurs 4 To carry out the mixdown operation press the ZERO M4 key to return to the beginning of the song and then press the PLAY gt key while holding down the REC 9 key Recording on the master track starts 5 When recording is complete press the STOP W key HINT You can start the mixdown operation from a point within the song Only the data in the recorded range are overwritten Playing the master track To play the recorded master track proceed as follows 1 From the main screen press the MASTER status key repeatedly until the key is lit in green The master track is now ready for playback In this mode all other tracks are muted and all effects are switched off HINT While the MASTER status key is lit in green the
206. ead OrganPha Phaser for synthesizer organ OrgaRock Boomy distortion for rock organ EP Chor Beautiful chorus for electric piano ClavFlg Wah for clavinet Concert Concert hall effect for piano Honkey Honky tonk piano simulation PowerBD Gives a bass drum more power DrumFIng Conventional flanger for drum LiveDrum Simulates outdoor live doubling JetDrum Phaser for 16 beat hi hat AsianKit Changes a standard kit to an Asian kit BassBost Emphasizes low range 15 E N E Mono gt St Gives spaciousness to a monaural source AM Radio AM radio simulation WideDrms Wide stereo effect for internal drums DanceDrm Reinforces bass for dance rhythms Octaver Adds one octave lower sound Percushn Gives air presence and stereo spread to percussion A E E o N E E Distortion with emphasized midrange body SnrSmack Emphasizes snappy snare sound Shudder Sliced sound for techno tracks N N SwpPhase Phaser with powerful resonance DirtyBiz Lo fi distortion using ring modulator N A Doubler Doubling for vocal track SFXlab Forced SFX sound for synthesizer SynLead2 Old style jet sound for synthesizer lead N Tekepiko For sequence phrases or single note muted guitar Soliner Simulates analog string
207. ection 13 Del eio bati teet estas utt dex 109 Drum kit ioco ede 87 Adjusting the level of each drum sound with the faders RR REY EE EH 117 Assigning a name to a drum kit 116 Changing the drum 90 Changing the sound and other settings for 220 ZOOM MRS 1608 INDEX each iiid h 114 Importing a rhythm pattern rhythm song from Copying a drum 116 another project 117 Creating your own drum kit 114 Importing a sample 122 MIDI 171 Importing a sampler program 133 Drum sequence 88 Importing a sampler program from another Drum sound set 87 90 project136 Drum track 0 0 ces 11 23 Importing a SMF into a project 174 aiia eene 109 Importing a V take from another project 64 nn 59 Importing an audio CD into a project 160 Duration oir iV uds eere 98 IN 40 Itip tmilxer enr tte tete ene dre 77 HE Input section 12 Siye 138 Input 5 24 78 Importing patch from another project 149 Input output 14 Effect
208. ection will be disconnected from the recorder section The pad bank or scale octave setting will be shown at the right side of the display Which one is shown depends on the currently selected sound SONG SOMGERA DCT E 1 Reference Rhythm Editing a rhythm song This section explains how to edit a rhythm song that you have created Copying a specified range of measures Part of a rhythm song can be copied in measures and inserted into another location This is convenient when you want to repeat a portion of a rhythm song Copy 1 L Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 7 9 10 i PATTERN B PATTERN r 1 2 3 4 PATTERN A PATTERN B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PATTERN A PATTERN B PATTERN A PATTERN B 1 From the main screen press the SONG key so that the key is lit 2 Press the RHYTHM key The key lights up and a rhythm song can be created or edited 3 Press the REC 0 key 4 Press the INSERT COPY key two times The following screen appears MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER Be 5 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times HINT It is also possible to play a drum kit or bass program by hitting the pads during rhythm song playback 5 Turn the dial to select the copy source start measure and press the ENTER key The d
209. ed you can perform various recorder actions such as recording and playback HINT When selecting a different project or creating a new project the project you were working on up to that point is automatically saved When performing the shutdown procedure for the MRS 1608 p 19 the last project is automatically saved ZOOM MRS 1608 1 2 Selecting the rhythm pattern to use The MRS 1608 has a built in rhythm function that operates in sync with the recorder This lets you use drum sounds drum Kits and bass sounds bass programs to create repeated rhythm patterns of several measures By combining various patterns you can create the rhythm accompaniment for an entire song rhythm song 1 Verify that the DRUMVIBASS status keys are lit in green Then set the DRUM BASS faders and the MASTER fader to O dB MASTER aa pQ Lit in green OdB OdB EXTRA2 The output signal of the drum kit bass program drum track bass track is sent to the respective fader of the mixer section Like the regular tracks these tracks also have status keys and faders for switching between playback and mute and for adjusting the signal level 2 Press the PATTERN key in the rhythm section The PATTERN key lights up and the currently selected rhythm pattern is shown on the display DRUM BASS SONG Rhythm pattern number
210. eed as follows NOTE Also when you have backed up all projects in a single operation restore is performed only for single projects 1 From the main screen press the CD R RW key in the control section The CD R RW menu appears 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication CD R RW BACKUP on the display and press the ENTER key The display shows the indication BACKUP SAVE 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BACKUP LOAD on the display and press the ENTER key The tray of the CD R RW drive opens and the display indication changes as follows AP alls ID 1 4 Insert the CD R or CD RW where the project is saved into the CD R RW drive Insert the correct disc for the stored content If project was backed up as single project Insert disc number 1 If project was backed up as part of a full backup of all projects Insert the disc where the project is stored If there are multiple discs insert the first disc that contains data of the desired project ZOOM MRS 1608 163 Reference Creating a CD NOTE If the backup of the project spans multiple discs be sure to insert the first disc that contains data of the desired project first If you insert another disc the project data will not be read correctly D Press the ENTER key The name of the project on the disc and the number which is to be assigned to the project a
211. elect the sample number to be used as import destination When the sample number is empty the indication EMPTY is shown in the sample name field NOTE If you select the number of an existing sample its contents will be overwritten by the new sample 5 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key once more The sample utility menu for sample importing and editing appears 122 ZOOM MRS 1608 SAMPLE IMPORT 6 Verify that SAMPLE IMPORT is shown on the display and press the ENTER key You can now select the type of import source 7 Use the cursor left right keys to select one of the following and press the ENTER key TAKE Import a specified range of audio data from any track V take in the currently loaded project WAV AIFF Import an audio file WAV AIFF from a CD ROM R RW disc inserted in the CD R RW drive or from the internal hard disk The subsequent steps differ depending on which selection was made For details see the respective section When the import process is completed the sample selection screen appears again If necessary import more samples The maximum number of samples that can be imported is 1000 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times HINT The imported samples are automatically assigned a name using the pattern SAMPLxxx where xxx is the sample number Importing part of a track V take You can specify a range on any
212. elicate distortion MD LEAD Drive sound that models a high gain amp suitable for lead guitar FZ STK 60 s sound typical of a Fuzz unit played through an amp stack TE BASS Model of a bass amp with a distinctively clean low mid range FD BASS Model of a bass amp with vintage style drive GAIN TONE LEVEL Parameters for type J CLN to FD BASS are the same SNS BASS Trebly drive sound for bass CR CAB Combination of crunch and cabinet simulator TS CAB Combination of vintage overdrive and cabinet simulator GV CAB Combination of vintage distortion and cabinet simulator MZ CAB Combination of metal style distortion and cabinet simulator 9002 CAB Combination of the Zoom 9002 distortion and cabinet simulator GAIN TONE LEVEL CABINET SPEAKER Parameters for type SNS BASS to 9002 CAB are the same TOP BODY LEVEL CABINET SPEAKER Transforms the sound of an electric guitar into an acoustic guitar like tone COLOR TONE LEVEL CABINET SPEAKER Pre amp for electroacoustic guitar TONE LEVEL Transforms the sound of an electric guitar into a bass guitar like tone CABINET SPEAKER DEPTH Simulation of the cabinet of a guitar bass amp ACO SIM E AcPRE BASS SIM CABINET ZOOM MRS 1608 191 Appendix Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description GAIN
213. emory amount 120 Playlist pP 177 Rhythm song gt 4 87 Power off 19 Assigning name to a rhythm song 113 Power on 19 Copying a 111 Pre count Copying a rhythm 112 Changing the pre count duration Deleting a rhythm 0 9 113 Rhythm section 119 Entering chord information 108 Making settings for pre count operation Entering other information 109 Recorder 48 Entering pattern information using FAST IMU M 106 ZOOM MRS 1608 222 Entering pattern information using step Rhythm song 0 e cece eee eee 104 In pUt aio oe xau a oe ee 104 Stereo eie ie eee ie EDS 82 Importing from another project 117 STEREO SUB OUT jack 16 82 Selecting a rhythm SOng 103 Stretch Compress Transposing the entire rhythm song 112 Stretching compressing a range of data Rhythm song mode 87 Track editing 54 SESS 108 109 SUB OUT 82 IULII TER 66 gS Samplers tet 121 122 BT Copying a 126 TEMPO si oA iudei iei ees 89 Del
214. empo Importing a phrase from a different project You can import any phrase contained in the phrase pool of another project stored on the hard disk NOTE When you import a phrase from the phrase pool of another project you cannot specify a range If necessary edit the phrase playback point after importing the phrase The following procedure will not allow you to first listen to the phrase Confirm name and number of the phrase before you start the procedure 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic phrase loading steps to select PHRASE as import source Then press the ENTER key The indication PRJ SEL xxx where xxx is the project name appears on the display You can now select the source project 4 Bud Project name Project number 2 Turn the dial to select the source project and press the ENTER key The display now shows the screen for selecting phrases in that project Reference Phrase Looping Phrase number Phrase name HINT If the selected project does not contain any phrases the indication NO DATA appears on the display for several seconds and then the previous screen returns 3 Turn the dial to select the phrase and press the ENTER key The indication IMPORT SURE appears on the display 4 To carry out the import process press the ENTER key once more The phrase is imported When the import process is completed the phrase m
215. enu appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Adjusting phrase parameters Once you have imported a phrase into the phrase pool you will need to specify parameters such as playback range and number of measures 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY PHRASE on the display and press the ENTER key The phrase screen appears on the display 3 Turn the dial to select the phrase that you want to edit When you press the PLAY We key the selected phrase is played If you select a number where no phrase is ZOOM MRS 1608 71 Reference Phrase Looping imported the indication EMPTY appears instead of the phrase name 4 Press the EDIT key A parameter of the selected phrase appears 5 Use the cursor up down keys to call up the parameter you want to edit MEAS xXX XX 01 99 This parameter specifies to how many measures the playback range of the phrase corresponds The parameter lets you compress or expand the playing duration of the phrase to match the tempo setting of the rhythm section The setting range is 1 99 measures e TIMSIG This specifies the time signature of the phrase In combination with the
216. equence Chords Am Dm7 G7 C Rhythm pattern mode and rhythm song mode The rhythm section can operate in one of two modes rhythm pattern mode in which you can create and play rhythm patterns and rhythm song mode in which you can create and play a rhythm song One of these two modes will always be selected The rhythm pattern mode is selected by pressing the PATTERN key and the rhythm song mode by pressing the SONG key The selected key lights up Rhythm pattern mode Rhythm song mode Lit Lit J Jt PROG PROG PATTERN Synchronizing the recorder section and rhythm section In the default condition of the MRS 1608 the rhythm section will operate in sync with the recorder section When you operate the transport section to start the recorder section running the rhythm pattern or rhythm song will also begin playing If desired the rhythm section can be disconnected from the recorder section and used independently To see whether the recorder is synchronized with the rhythm section check the lit out status of the RHYTHM key in the display section When operation is synchronized this key will be out When the key is pressed so that it lights up the recorder is separated and the rhythm section operates on its own To restore the original condition press the RECORDER key or the EXIT key ZOOM MRS 1608 Playing rhythm patterns This section ex
217. equired you can import all patches or specified patches of the insert effect or send return effect from another project that is already saved on the hard disk NOTE Keep in mind that importing patches in this way will overwrite patches in the current project Take care not to accidentally erase patches that you wish to keep I e Pressthe UTILITY TRACK EDIT key to bring up the indication UTILITY IMPORT on the display and then press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows IMPORT ALL 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select ALL import all patches or PATCH import a single patch and press the ENTER key In this condition you can select the project from which to import IMPORT PRIGES GES 3 Turn the dial to select the import source project and press the ENTER key The subsequent steps differ depending on which selection was made in step 2 When ALL was selected Verify that the indication IMPORT SURE is shown on the display and proceed to step 5 When PATCH was selected The import source patch appears on the display Use the dial and the ALGORITHMJ REVERB CHORUS DELAY keys to select the patch and press the ENTER key You can now select the import destination patch Proceed to step 4 ZOOM MRS 1608 149 Reference Effects 4 Turn the dial to select the import destination and press the ENTER key The indication SURE appear
218. er tracks of multiple projects in succession p 177 The contents of the master track can be edited later p 49 ZOOaM MRS 1608 Reference Recorder This chapter explains the functions and operation steps of the recorder section About V takes Each track 1 16 of the recorder contains ten virtual tracks called V takes For each track you can select one such take which will be used for recording and playback For example you can switch V takes as you record multiple vocal or guitar solos on the same track and later compare them and select the best V take V takes a gt WP e 12345678 123456 18 9011213141916 C Switching V takes Here s how to switch the V take used by each track 1 16 1 From the main screen press the V TAKE key in the track parameter section The key lights up and the track number V take number and V take name appear on the display Track number V take number V take name HINT f you select a V take on which nothing is recorded the indication NO DATA appears f you select the master track is shown as the track number While the above display indication is shown the V take condition for each track is indicated by the segments of the level meter A lit segment denotes a recorded V take and an unlit segment denotes an unrecorded V take The flashing
219. ereo track pairs are counted as two tracks Scrub playback is toggled on and off for a track by repeatedly pressing the respective status key If you attempt to select more than four tracks scrub playback will be carried out for the last four tracks only 3 To move the scrub playback position use the cursor left right keys to cause the millisecond indication or the tick indication on the counter to flash Then turn the dial to find the desired location During scrub playback the current location can be moved forward or backward in milliseconds or ticks 4 To use the preview function to hear the region before the current location press the REW 44 key To hear the region after the current location press the FF gt gt key If you press the REW 44 key a region of 0 7 seconds prior to the current location will play ending at the current location If you press the FF key a region of 0 7 seconds following the current location will play beginning at the current location This is called preview playback When preview playback ends scrub playback will resume Current location Preview playback N Preview playback d REW La 5 To cancel the scrub function press the STOP W key The PLAY gt and STOP ll keys go out Changing the scrub direction and duration When the scrub function is on you can change the direction of scrub playback whether it will play the region bef
220. es condenser mic sound with dynamic mic input Vocals DuoAtack Chorus for lead vocals with emphasized attack Vocals 115 A w Nj Warmth Warm sound with prominent midrange Vocals AM Radio Simulates AM monaural radio Vocals E Pavilion Narration sound at expo booths Vocals A TV News TV newscaster sound Vocals E F Vo Pf1 For female vocal piano ballads Vocal Piano 204 ZOOM MRS 1608 Appendix JazzDuo1 Simulates jazz session LP with lo fi sound Vocal Piano Cntmprry All round clear sound Vocal Piano JazzDuo2 JazzDuo 1 for male vocal Vocal Piano Ensemble For guitar with strong attack and mellow piano Acoustic guitar Piano Enhanced Enhances clear strong outline for ballads Acoustic guitar Vocal Warmy Moderates overbright ambience Acoustic guitar Vocal Strum Vo Smooth fat sound with midrange compensation Acoustic guitar Vocal FatPlus Spruces up a thin midrange Acoustic guitar Vocal Arp Vo Overall solid sound Acoustic guitar Vocal ClubDuo Simulates live sound in small club Acoustic guitars BigShape Enhances overall clarity Acoustic guitars FolkDuo Fresh and clean sound Acoustic guitars GtrDuo Suitable for guitar duos Acoustic guitars Bright Bright and sharp outlook Acoustic guitars EMPTY LINE algorithm z p Name Comment Syn Lead For synthesizer single note l
221. escribed below 1 Turn power to the MRS 1608 off While holding down the CLEAR key turn power on again The MRS 1608 starts up in ROM utility mode which serves for performing special functions 2 Press the MARK key in the control section The indication ExtFunc Select appears on the display ExtFunc eSelect 3 Use the cursor left right keys to select the desired command The following commands are available ScanDisk Test and repair the integrity of data stored on the internal hard disk Init Fac Factory Initialize Restore system files and various data necessary for operation Data created by the user will not be erased Init ALL All Initialize Format the hard disk and restore system files and various data necessary for operation All existing projects will be erased 4 Press the ENTER key to execute the command Subsequent display indications and operation steps differ for the individual commands See the respective section below 5 When the command has been executed turn the unit off and then turn it on again The MRS 1608 will operate in normal mode Test restore integrity of data on internal hard disk ScanDisk This action serves to test and restore data on the internal hard disk Perform this procedure when operation of the MRS 1608 has become unstable NOTE ScanDisk may not be able in all cases to restore damaged files To guard against data loss it i
222. et the volume 0 15 ZOOM MRS 1608 119 Reference Rhythm Adjusting the sensitivity of the pads You can specify the volume that is produced according to the force with which you hit the pads pad sensitivity Perform steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication UTILITY PAD SENS and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to choose one of these settings e SOFT The volume will be soft regardless of how strongly you tap the pad MEDIUM The volume will be medium regardless of how strongly you tap the pad LOUD The volume will be loud regardless of how strongly you tap the pad e LITE Maximum sensitivity Even light taps will produce a loud volume NORMAL Normal sensitivity default setting HARD Low sensitivity Strong tapping is needed to produce a loud volume EX HARD Lowest sensitivity Very strong tapping is needed to produce a loud volume Checking the remaining amount of memory The remaining amount of recording memory for rhythm patterns and rhythm songs will be displayed as a percentage 46 Perform steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication UTILITY MEMORY and press the ENTER key This screen is for display only There is no setting that can be edited MEMORY len Swapping the left right pan position The pan setting for the drum sound can be set to apply as seen from the drummer
223. eting a 127 Changing the tempo 89 Editing a range of a sample 127 Tempo information 109 Importing sample 122 insi 37 Making various sample settings 125 Timing 172 Sample 121 122 Timsig eoe Leo od ne etii 93 Sampler 121 Top 12 Assigning a name to a sampler program 131 Mr 10 Copying a sampler program 131 Track 49 Creating a sampler program 128 NC SII ENTER TRETEN ET 77 Deleting a sampler program 132 Linking 21 5 82 Importing a sampler program from another Scene function 84 sss n nnne 136 Solo 84 Using a rhythm pattern to play a sampler Supplying a selected input track signal to the program o Satay ee REM S EE ERE E 134 SUB OUT jack 82 Using the pads to play a sampler program 133 Track parameter 80 Save Track parameter 13 Saving single project on CD R RW disc 161 Transport section 13 Sa
224. ey to turn the unit off 186 ZOOM MRS 1608 Specifications Recorder Physical track Virtual take Drum track Bass track Simultaneous recording track Simultaneous playback track Recording data format Maximum recording time Project Marker Locator Track editing Punch in out Other function Mixer Fader Level meter indication Track parameter Equaliser Effect send Stereo linking Scene Effect Algorithm Patch Module Tuner e Rhythm Voice Sound source principle Drum kit Drum sound Bass program Pad Resolution Beat Rhythm pattern Rhythm song Measure Note event Tempo 16 160 10 V takes per track 1 stereo 1 8 19 16 audio stereo drum bass 16 bit linear non compressed Approx 3 hours GB in mono track 1000 100 points per project Hour minite second millisecond measure beat tick Copy move erase exchange trim fade in out reverse time stretch pitch fix harmony generate duo harmony Manual auto Bounce scrub preview A B repeat capture swap phrase looping 15 Post fader pre fader fader value monitorable Equaliser effect send panning balance sub output send 3 band Chorus delay reverb Tracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 selectable 100 scenes per project 9 CLEAN DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS MIC DUAL MIC LINE 8x COMP EQ MASTERING 320 for insert 60 for send return 6 for insert 2 for send return Chromatic guit
225. ey while another From master track key is already lit the previous key goes out and the new key lights up While the key is lit the input is active Normally up to two keys can be activated simultaneously To activate two inputs hold down one ON OFF key and then press the other key It is also possible to press two non adjacent ON OFF keys together HINT When the BTRACK RECORDING key is activated the 8 track recording mode becomes active and up to eight inputs can be used simultaneously Each input can then be switched on or off individually 3 While playing your instrument turn the INPUT control or the GUITAR BASS INPUT control for the input selected in step 2 to adjust the input sensitivity Make adjustments so that the PEAK indicator flickers slightly when you play your instrument at its loudest volume 4 if you will be recording the sound through the insert effect press the INPUT SOURCE key in the effect section and turn the dial to set the insert position for the effect to IN 78 ZOOM MRS 1608 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the main screen HINT With the default settings of a project the insert effect is inserted into the input mixer and a patch suitable for guitar bass recording is selected Torecord without sending the sound through the insert effect press the BYPASS key in the effect section to bypass the in
226. f step 1 By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and return to the condition of step 1 ZOOM MRS 1608 185 Reference Other Functions Hard disk maintenance using the supplied CD ROM Using the CD ROM supplied with the MRS 1608 the following functions can be performed Restoring the factory default condition RECOVER This action restores all data including the demo song to the condition in which the unit was originally shipped from the factory All projects created by the user will be erased Q Caution e Once erased user created projects cannot be restored Use this function with extreme care To preserve projects back them up to CD R RW disc first p 161 Factory initialize VER UP This action restores system files and all data necessary for MRS 1608 operation onto the hard disk 1 Insert the supplied CD ROM into the CD R RW drive and press the rear panel POWER switch to turn the MRS 1608 on 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select RECOVER or VER UP and press the ENTER key The indication Sure appears on the display 3 To carry out the respective operation press the ENTER key once more When maintenance is completed the indication Done appears Remove the CD ROM from the CD R RW drive and restart the MRS 1608 To cancel the operation press the POWER switch before pressing the ENTER k
227. f the AC adaptor cable is accidentally pulled Mj f rak Recording Studio MIRS 1608 e THIS DEVICE COMPLIES OPERATION I5 SUBJECT 131 DEVICE MAY 2JTHIS DEVICE MUST INCLUDING INTERFER MIDI sequencer MIDI interface computer etc OPTICAL IN ECL eco 00000 oooO Digital recorder MD recorder DAT recorder etc To prevent damage to the speakers of your monitor system turn off the power of the system connected to the MASTER OUTPUT jacks or turn the volume all the way down before you make connections Rear panel A A A BALANCE UNBALANCE INPU A c 2 e e MultiTrak Recording Studio 9 e e e e j 0 ses m Po AC adapter 4 Loop the cable of the AC adaptor around the hook as shown below MIDI MIDI before connecting it to the DC IN OUT L qM ecc This will prevent the plug from a EJEJEJEIE ca i a CD Player etc The signal from the LINE INPUT jacks 7 8 is mixed to that of the INPUT 7 8 jacks For example you could connect a CD player or similar here or use the input for the ef fect return of an external effect Adjust the output level of the source so that it causes no distor tion when used as an in put signal coral SS SS O Monitor system audio components or amplified speakers etc
228. f the display indicates SEQ FULL the rhythm section memory has been used to maximum capacity Delete unneeded rhythm patterns to free up memory Sounds recorded in the rhythm pattern do not play Sounds that exceed the maximum polyphony 24 sounds for drum kit bass program 24 sounds for pad sampler will not be played Either delete some of the notes that have been recorded or stay within the maximum polyphony when you record Cannot play pad sampler When an empty sampler program was selected no samples will be assigned to the pads Select one of the preset sampler programs Cannot add samples to pad sampler If the display indicates SPL FULL the pad sampler memory has been used to maximum capacity Delete unneeded samples to free up memory Problems with MIDI The MRS 1608 s drum kit bass program sounds cannot be played from external MIDI device Make sure that the MIDI cable is correctly connected from the MIDI OUT connector of the external device to the MRS 1608 s MIDI IN connector Make sure that the MIDI send channels of the external device match the MIDI receive channels for drum kit bass program at the MRS 1608 During rhythm pattern step input an external MIDI device cannot be used Cannot synchronize with external MIDI device Make sure that the MIDI cable is correctly connected from the MIDI OUT connector of the MRS 1608 to the MIDI IN connector of the external device Syn
229. fect module of the MIC algorithm provides 18 effect types such as chorus flanger phaser etc When you change the effect 142 ZOOM MRS 1608 type the effect parameter arrangement also changes Effect MODULATION module DELAY v Effect chorus FLANGER PHASER type Effect DEPTH DEPTH POSITION parameters RATE RATE RATE MIX FB COLOR This section explains how to edit the effect type and effect parameters for the currently selected patch l Use the ALGORITHM keys to select the algorithm and then use the PATCH SELECT V A keys or the dial to select the patch to edit Itis not possible to later change the algorithm of a patch For this reason you must first begin by selecting a patch that uses the desired algorithm even to create a patch from the beginning HINT The indication EMPTY appears instead of the patch name if the patch is empty By editing such a patch you can create a patch from the beginning 2 Press the EDIT key The first line of the display will indicate the effect module type followed by EDIT This means that the patch can now be edited Reference Effects Effect module type 3 Use the cursor left right keys to select the effect module to edit The indication shown on the first line for the various effect modules is as follows HINT To edit the ZNR VOL PDL module bring up the indication TOTAL on the first line of the display
230. ffect settings will be saved as a scene When the process is completed the unit returns to the screen of step 2 To cancel the process you can press the EXIT key instead of these keys to return to the previous screen 6 Press the EXIT key to return to the main screen Recalling a scene This section explains how to recall a scene that was saved to memory 1 Press the SCENE key in the control section The display indicates the scene number that will be recalled 2 Turn the dial to select the desired scene to recall HINT By pressing the EDIT key after selecting a scene you can edit the name of the scene Refer to steps 4 5 of Saving a scene to edit the name 3 To recall the selected scene press the ENTER key The scene is recalled the indication CALL appears on the display and the unit returns to the condition of step 1 If you press the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key the action is canceled and the main screen returns Reference Mixer Switching scenes automatically The MRS 1608 allows you to assign a scene to a mark p 46 that was placed at a desired location in the song This can be used to switch scenes automatically For example you could change the mixing balance or effect settings as the song progresses 1 Move to the point in the song where you want to change the mix and press the MARK key in the control section A mark is entered at this point
231. frequency range LEVEL 1 8 Adjusts the module output level ZOOM MRS 1608 196 Appendix DELAY module Type Parameter TIME FB Delay effect with a delay time of up to 5 seconds TIME FB Delay effect with warm sound up to 5 second delay time TIME TONE Doubling effect with a delay time of up to 100 milliseconds DELAY L R ECHO L R DOUBLE L R Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description DOUBLING 1 100 7 ae P TIME DELAY ECHO time 1 ms steps The x setting results in sync with the 1 5000 T 4x4 T 1 4 FB 0 10 Adjusts the amount of feedback MIX 0 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect TONE 0 10 Adjusts the tone ZNR module VOL PDL module See the CLEAN DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS algorithm LINE algorithm COMP LIM module See the MIC algorithm ISOLATOR module Type Parameter XOVER LO XOVER HI MIX HIGH MIX MID MIX LOW ISOLATOR Divides the signal into three frequency bands and specifies the mix amount each Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description XOVER LO 50 16000 Adjusts the frequency for bass midrange division XOVER HI 50 16000 Adjusts the frequency for midrange treble division MIX HIGH OFF 24 6 Adjusts the treble mix amount MIX MID OFF 24 6 Adjusts the midrange mix amount MIX LOW OFF 24 6 Adjusts th
232. g ScanDisk 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic maintenance procedure to bring up the indication Init Fac on the display Then press the ENTER key The indication Init Fac Sure appears on the display to confirm the operation Init Fac Sure Reference Other Functions 2 To restore the system data press the ENTER key once more The factory initialize process starts When it is complete the unit returns to the condition of step 1 By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and return to the condition of step 1 Returning the entire hard disk to the factory default All Initialize This action formats the hard disk and restores system files and various data necessary for operation existing projects including demo song data will be erased Caution Once erased user created projects cannot be restored Use this function with extreme care To preserve projects back them up to CD R RW disc first p 161 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic maintenance procedure to bring up the indication Init ALL on the display Then press the ENTER key The indication Init ALL Sure appears on the display to confirm the operation Init ALL Sure 2 To carry out the initialization process press the ENTER key once more The all initialize process starts When it is complete the unit returns to the condition o
233. g chord types Display Description Display Description No conversion 7th Suspended 4th ajor Triad Suspended 4th inor Triad Minor 7th flat 5 Dominant 7th Minor 6th inor 7th Major 6th ajor 7th Minor 9th Augment Major 9th Diminish Minor Major 7th The following screen shows an example of when the chord type has been changed to M7 By pressing the PLAY We key in this condition you can check the rhythm pattern with the new chord information 7 e Move to the location at which you want to input the next chord data and input chord data 108 ZOOM MRS 1608 in the same way as described in steps 3 6 You can move the input location within a rhythm song in the following ways Moving in steps of a measure Use the cursor left right keys to move to the beginning of the preceding or following measure Moving in steps of a beat Use the REW 4 4 FF gt gt keys to move to the beginning of the preceding or following beat Moving in steps of a sixteenth note Repeatedly press the cursor up key to bring up the indication on the display and turn the dial to move forward or backward in 12 tick 16th note units If necessary you can also input chord information at a point within a measure as shown below smallest unit sixteenth note For example to enter chord information in sixteenth note units bring up the indication EV
234. g the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time When writing begins the indication wait appears on the display The counter indicates the progress status of the write process When the write process is completed the disc is ejected automatically and the message ALBUM NEXT appears on the screen To write another disc with the same content insert a blank CD R RW disc or a CD RW disc which has been completely erased and press the ENTER key To terminate the process press the EXIT key 13 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Reference Creating a CD Using the marker function to separate tracks When you create an audio CD using the disc at once method marker information included in the project can be used to generate PQ subcode information specifying track start stop position and other items to split up a single project into multiple tracks Marker based track separation can be enabled or disabled for each project For example when a project contains a number of songs that were recorded live you can set a mark at the beginning of each song so that these will be recorded as different tracks on the CD This will enable easy searching and jumping between tracks NOTE To use the marker based track separation function at least two marks including the project start mark 00 must be set 1 Load the project that you want to
235. h you want to erase While you are holding down both keys the performance of the corresponding pad is erased from the rhythm pattern T DELETE wE JF RIDE Bass track V To erase the performance of all pads While holding down the DELETE ERASE key press the BASS status key While you are holding down both keys the performance of all pads is erased from the bass sequence DELETE ERASE BASS Bass track V 7 When you have finished real time recording press the STOP W key Rhythm pattern recording will stop Press the PLAY We key to hear the pattern that you recorded NOTE Youcan use step input to add playing information to a rhythm pattern recorded with real time input Drum sequence step input For step input you enter each note separately while the MRS 1608 is in the stop condition This makes it easy to enter even complex drum patterns or bass lines that might be difficult to achieve with real time input For drum sequence step input you specify the step length interval to next note or rest using the quantize value Then you enter notes and rests When you hit a pad and then press the STEP key playing note information is entered at that point and the step advances by an interval corresponding to the current quantize value The intensity with which you hit the pad is also recorded 96 ZOOM MRS 1608 If you only press the STEP key
236. hase 30 ZOOaM MRS 1608 4 3 Applying the send return effect The track signals sent to the internal mixer can be processed by an effect that is connected internally to the send return loop of the mixer This is called a send return effect The MRS 1608 incorporates two kinds of send return effects chorus delay and reverb Send x gt wo SEND LEVEL r r DELAY sote OO FE ne DRUM BASS 1 2 15 16 MASTER Return m Hur The intensity of the send return effect can be adjusted for each track by using the send level parameter which controls the signal level that is sent to the effect Increasing this parameter will result in stronger effect action This section describes how to select the send return effect type and adjust the send level for each track Selecting the send return effect patch 1 From the main screen press the CHORUS DELAY key or REVERB key in the effect section Press the CHORUS DELAY key to select a chorus delay patch or the REVERB key to select a reverb patch The display will indicate the patch that is currently selected for the effect you selected For example a screen such as shown below appears when the REVERB key is pressed SEHI FEW Ti ahtHa 1 B Patch name Patch number 2 Turn the dial to select a patch Each send return effect has 30 preprogramme
237. he basic procedure for editing the rhythm section settings is the same for most items as described below HINT This procedure can be carried out either in rhythm pattern mode or rhythm song mode 1 From the main screen press the RHYTHM key so that the key lights up Depending on the current operation mode of the rhythm section the rhythm pattern selection screen or rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The rhythm utility menu for making various rhythm section settings appears UTILITY Sounge 1 HINT When the pad sampler function is being used the indication UTILITY SPL PRG appears instead of the above screen 3 Use the cursor left right keys to select one of the following items to edit and press the ENTER key SoundSel Select the drum sound set to be used by the rhythm section p 90 COUNT Change the length of the pre count that is heard during real time input of a rhythm pattern ClickVol Change the volume level of the metronome that is heard 118 ZOOM MRS 1608 during real time input of a rhythm pattern e PAD SENS Change the pad sensitivity which determines the volume level in relation to the force with which the pad is struck MIDI Make MIDI related settings p 170 IMPORT Import rhythm patterns and rhythm songs from another project saved on the hard disk p 117 MEMORY Check the remaining amount of r
238. he default condition position 1 immediately after INPUT jack is selected When the setting is changed to 2 only a selected track or drum bass sound is processed by the effect When the setting is changed to 3 the final stereo mix can be processed This setting is suitable for processing the signal of the entire song during mixdown Send return effect This effect is internally connected to the send return loop of the mixer section There are two types of send return effect reverb and chorus delay which can be used simultaneously The send level of each mixer channel adjusts the depth of the send return effect Raising the send level will produce a deeper reverb or chorus delay effect for that channel Introducing the MRS 1608 ZOOM MRS 1608 11 Parts of the MRS 1608
239. he dial to select the sampler program to import and press the ENTER key The indication IMPORT SURE appears on the display 8 To carry out the import process press the ENTER key When importing is complete the unit returns to the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Reference Pad Sampler ZOOM MRS 1608 137 Reference Effects This section explains the functions and operation of the effect section built into the MRS 1608 About the effects The MRS 1608 has two types of effects an insert effect and a send return effect The two types can be used simultaneously The characteristics of these effects are described below Insert effect The insert effect is used by inserting it into a specific point in the signal route You can select one of the following locations at which to apply the effect 1 Input mixer 2 Any track of the track mixer 3 Immediately before the MASTER fader For example if you insert the effect into the input mixer the input signal is processed by the effect and the result is recorded on a track of the recorder Alternatively if you insert the effect into a channel of the track mixer the effect processes the playback signal from an audio track or the drum bass track By selecting a position immediately before the MASTER fader you can use the effect to process the final
240. he display indication changes as follows In this condition you can specify the copy start point MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER 001 1 The edit range start point is shown on the counter in hours minutes seconds milliseconds and in measures beats and ticks 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the copy start point The point can be specified in hours minutes seconds milliseconds or in measures beats ticks When a value is specified the other units also reflect the new location By causing a mark number to flash you can also specify edit points using the markers NOTE If you specify a point where no audio data exist the second line of the display shows symbol Press the ENTER key The display changes to Src END This screen lets you specify the copy range end point Coes Sec EHD MEASURE BEAT TI 8 213 555 73 alee 4 Use the same procedure as in step 2 to specify the copy range end point If you press the PLAY We key at this point the specified range will be played D Press the ENTER key The display now shows Copy Dst TR xx yy where xx is the track number and yy the V take number Specify the copy destination track V take in the same way as when selecting the copy source and press the ENTER key 50 ZOOM MRS 1608 The display indication changes a
241. he insert effect is a multi effect unit that contains a number of single effects such as compressor distortion and delay connected in series Each of these separate effects is called an effect module A combination of effect modules that can be used simultaneously is called an algorithm The MRS 1608 offers the following algorithms CLEAN DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS An algorithm suitable for recording guitar bass MIC An algorithm suitable for microphone recording of vocals etc DUAL MIC An algorithm with two entirely separate channels for mono Algorithm CLEAN Effect module arrangement Reference Effects input x 2 and mono output x 2 8x COMP EQ This is an algorithm with eight separate inputs outputs Separate high pass filter HPF compressor and EQ settings are possible for each channel LINE An algorithm suitable for recording line level output instruments such as synthesizer or electric piano MASTERING An algorithm suitable for processing the final stereo mix signal The arrangement of effect modules and the signal flow for each algorithm is shown in the diagram below HINT Depending on the selected algorithm the input output configuration of the effect will differ For some insert position settings two input signals or the stereo output of an effect may be mixed to mono gt p 141 With the 8x COMP EQ algorithm the VOL PDL module is shared
242. he track will be played back together with the selected guide rhythm from the rhythm section HINT e You can specify a position in hours minutes seconds milliseconds and move directly to that point p 37 By setting marks at the desired points you can quickly jump to these points p 46 To stop playback press the STOP W key To redo the recording repeat steps 3 5 7 e When you satisfied with the recorded content press status key 1 until it is lit in green The recording standby condition of track 1 is canceled HINT Recorded content can be copied deleted or edited p 49 By switching to another V take for the track you can record again on the track without erasing the current recording gt p 35 FF gt gt key Moves the current position forward in 1 second Steps Movement speed can be increased by holding down the FF gt gt key and pressing the REW 44 key PLAY 0 key Starts recorder playback recorder to the start position from the current position counter zero position REC key If you press the PLAY gt key while STOP W key Stops the EH gt holding down this key recording starts Pressing the key during playback causes punch in and pressing recorder the key during recording causes punch out ZOOM MRS 1608 27 Quick Tour Step 3 Overdubbing
243. hile the previous pattern is still playing This mode is suitable for specifying patterns in detail FAST Formula Assisted Song Translator This method uses simple formulas to specify rhythm pattern playback from start to end The result is written to the song in a single operation Because input midway through a song is not possible with this method it is most suitable for cases where the configuration of the entire song has been decided beforehand HINT There is no difference in the completed rhythm song due to input method that was used i e a song will be the same regardless of whether it was created using step input or the FAST method If necessary you can first create a rough version of a song using FAST and then perform detailed editing using step input Selecting a rhythm song Select the rhythm song for editing or playing as follows HINT In the default condition of a project all rhythm songs are empty 1 From the main screen press the SONG key in the rhythm section The key lights up and the rhythm song selection screen appears The display shows the following information ZOOM MRS 1608 103 Reference Rhythm Rhythm song number Ho SONG PAD BANK OCTAVE f Rhythm song name Current pad bank or octave When the rhythm song is empty the indication EMPTY is shown in the rhythm song name field HINT When you press the SONG key at the main screen the
244. hm Rhythm patterns A project can contain accompaniment patterns with drum bass performance data for up to 99 measures each This is called a rhythm pattern The MRS 1608 has 511 such patterns Inside each rhythm pattern the area that holds the drum performance data is called the drum sequence and the area that holds the bass performance data is called the bass sequence In the default condition a project contains preprogrammed rhythm patterns in numbers 000 472 509 510 You can edit a portion of a rhythm pattern or use an empty slot to create an entirely original rhythm pattern The rhythm patterns you modify or create are saved on the hard disk as part of the project 1 2 3 4 Rhythm PATTERN PATTERN section Drum sequence Drum sequence Bass sequence Bass sequence Rhythm song Multiple rhythm patterns arranged in a desired order of playback are collectively called a rhythm song Besides the rhythm pattern data a rhythm song comprises information about various aspects such as chord tempo and beat to create the accompaniment for an entire song Up to 10 rhythm songs can be programmed in one project PATTERN A PATTERN B PATTERN C PATTERN D PATTERN E Rhythm song Measure number 1 2 3 4 5 y 6 PATTERN A PATTERN PATTERN B Drum sequence Bass sequence Drum sequence Bass sequence Drum sequence Bass s
245. hm A combination of effect modules that can be used simultaneously is called an algorithm The MRS 1608 has 9 algorithms which are controlled by the ALGORITHM keys in the effect section BASS Ces JL JL p 8x COMP EQ DUAL MIC LINE The following selections are available CLEAN DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS These algorithms are suitable for recording guitar bass MIC An algorithm suitable for vocals and other microphone recordings DUAL MIC An algorithm with two entirely separate mono input and mono output channels 8x COMP EQ An algorithm with 8 separate input output channels Different high pass filter compressor and EQ settings are possible for each channel LINE An algorithm suitable mainly for recording line level output ZOOM MRS 1608 25 Quick Tour instruments such as synthesizer or electric piano MASTERING An algorithm suitable for processing the final stereo mixdown signal When you select an algorithm the respective key lights up and a patch effect program using the selected algorithm is shown on the display rac NOTE The 8x COMP EQ algorithm can only be inserted in the input if the 8 track recording function p 45 is active IHSERT Ha Patch number Standard Patch name 3 Turn the dial to select the patch A total of 320 patches are available
246. hm section are used for FAST input as described below D key Enters the closing bracket used for linking several phrases key Enters the opening bracket used for linking several x pad Enters the x that specifies the repetition phrases of a phrase ee JD 8 9 CRASH EXTRA CYMBAL EXTRA1 EXTRA2 4 5 6 y TOM 1 TOM2 TOM3 RIDE 0 1 2 3 KICK SNARE CLOSED HAT OPEN HAT Pads 0 9 pad Specify phrase numbers Enters the for lining and repetition count up phrases The basic rules for creating a phrase loop are as follows Select the phrase Use pads 0 9 to select a phrase number from 0 99 Line up phrases Use the symbol to line up phrases For example entering 0 1 2 will result in the following phrase sequence being written Phrase 0 Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Repeat phrases Use the x symbol to specify phrase repetitions x takes precedence over For example entering O 1 x 2 2 will result in the following phrase sequence being written Phrase 0 Phrase 1 Phrase 1 Phrase 2 Link multiple phrases Use the and symbols to link a group of phrases for repetition and then use the x symbol to specify the repetition count For example entering 1 2 x 2 3 will result in the following phrase sequence being
247. hythm pattern and rhythm song memory SAMPLE Import and edit source material to be used for the pad sampler function p 121 e POSITION Selects whether the drum sound pan setting applies as seen from the drummer or from the listener 4 Turn the dial to edit the setting The screen display and operation will be different for each item For details refer to the sections that follow HINT For information on drum sound set selection MIDI setting importing and the pad sampler function refer to the respective sections 5 When the setting procedure is complete press the EXIT key several times to return to the main screen Reference Rhythm Changing the length of the pre count You can change the length of the pre count that is heard when you record a rhythm pattern in real time Perform steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication UTILITY COUNT and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to choose one of these settings COUNT OFF The pre count is turned off e 1 8 A pre count of 1 8 beats is heard default 4 SPECIAL The following special pre count is heard eded eee Changing the metronome volume You can change the volume of the metronome that is heard when you record a rhythm pattern in real time Perform steps 1 3 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication UTILITY ClickVol and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to s
248. i hat sound will cease when you play the closed hi hat sound resulting in realistic action e REV SEND Reverb send Sets the reverb send level for each pad The setting range is 0 127 This setting is independent from the reverb send level setting made as part of the track parameters NAME Drum kit name Lets you change the name of the drum kit p 116 Press the pad for which you want to make a setting The setting for the pad appears on the display For example if PAN is selected as parameter and you press pad 3 the display indication changes as follows PAD 1 3 7 Turn the dial to select a setting value 8 Repeat steps 5 7 as necessary to edit other pads 9 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key The unit returns to the drum kit selection screen The created drum kit is saved as part of the project HINT You can also copy all the settings for a pad to another pad To do this press the INSERT COPY key while a parameter for the copy source pad is displayed Then select the pad bank and pad to which you want to copy the settings and press the ENTER key ZOOM MRS 1608 115 Reference Rhythm Assigning a name to a drum kit You can assign a name to a drum kit 1 Fromthe main screen press the RHYTHM key so that the key lights up 2 Press the DRUM key in the rhythm section and then the KIT PROG key The drum kit selection screen appears
249. ich one is selected for editing playback The rhythm section can also be played using the sampler instead of the drum bass sound sources The pad sampler uses parts of an audio track or an audio file imported from CD ROM and lets you play these with the pads or in a rhythm pattern rhythm song This makes it possible to incorporate special sounds in a rhythm pattern rhythm song and to create your own original sounds Rhythm section Rhythm Rhythm _____ pattern pattern Pad sampler To DRUM fader of mixer Pads Led HINT You can process the drum bass sound and pad sampler output sound with the insert effect and record it on a recorder track ZOOM MRS 1608 The signals from audio tracks 1 16 and the drum and bass sounds drum track bass track are sent to separate mixer channels for individual adjustment of volume and tone and to create a stereo mix For each track parameters such as volume panning and 3 band EQ can be controlled independently The MRS 1608 provides two types of effects insert effect and send return effect These effects which can be used simultaneously have the characteristics described below Insert effect This effect can be inserted at one of the following three points in the signal path 1 Immediately after the INPUT jack 2 A desired channel of the mixer 3 Immediately before the MASTER fader In t
250. in this condition the files inside the selected folder are displayed Turn the dial to select the desired file By pressing the EXIT key you can return to the next higher level 4 When the file has been selected press the ENTER key Depending on the sampling frequency of the imported audio file the following applies e Sampling frequency 44 1 kHz The indication IMPORT SURE appears on the display When you press the ENTER key the audio file is imported When the process is complete the phrase menu appears again Sampling frequency other than 44 1 kHz When you press the ENTER key a selection screen for conversion to 44 1 kHz resampling appears Wa AIFF Eezample Turn the dial to select resampling on off When you press the ENTER key the indication WAV AIFF SURE appears Press the ENTER key once more to start the 70 ZOOM MRS 1608 import process When the process is complete the phrase menu appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT The name PHxxx yy is automatically assigned to the loaded phrase where xxx is the current project number and yy the phrase number NOTE Imported audio files are always played with a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz If resampling was disabled during the import process a file with a different sampling frequency will play back with a different pitch and t
251. ine of the display Ms MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER Bm 1 B8 During step input the cursor up down keys serve to bring up various kinds of information about events that are programmed at the current point The following items can be selected Parameter Description EV Event information at current point PTN Rhythm pattern number TimSig Time Signature ROOT Chord root CHORD Chord type TEMPO Tempo DrVOL Drum sequence volume BsVOL Bass sequence volume DrKIT Drum kit number BsPRG Bass program number HINT When an item other than EV gt is selected and no information is input for the current position the arrow is shown before the item name for example PTN This indicates that information input at a preceding point continues to be valid 4 Press the INSERT COPY key to bring up the indication INSERT on the first line of the display 104 ZOOM MRS 1608 Rhythm pattern Number of measures number to insert insert In this condition you can insert rhythm pattern information 5 Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern that you want to insert Use the cursor up down keys to specify the number of measures to insert If you specify more measures than the original length of the rhythm pattern the rhythm pattern will be repeated If you specify fewer measures the song will switch to the next rhythm patte
252. ing V take names 36 Moving to a desired point in the song locate function 37 Playing back the same passage repeatedly repeat function 37 Finding a desired location scrub preview function emer einen 38 Using scrub preview 38 Changing the scrub direction and duration 38 Re recording only a specified region punch in out function 39 Using manual 39 Using auto punch in out 40 Recording several tracks on a master track mixdown function 41 About the 41 Master track mixdown steps 41 Playing the master track 41 Combining multiple tracks on one or two tracks bounce function 42 How bounce works 42 Making bounce settings 42 Executing bounce recording 43 Recording the drum bass sound rhythm recording 44 Selecting drum bass track as recording source 44 Recording 44 Recording on 8 tracks simultaneously 8 track recording mode 45 About 8 track recording 45 Assigning an input signal a track 45 Marker fun
253. ing a bass program with the pads When playing a bass program you can specify a scale and octave which will change the pitch of the sounds assigned to the pads 1 From the main screen press the BASS key The key lights up and a bass program to play can be selected 2 Usethe BANK OCTAVE key in the rhythm section to switch the scale and octave to play with the pads If you press the BANK OCTAVE key while a bass program is selected the currently active scale type key and octave are shown on the display By changing these values you can change the pitch of the sounds assigned to the pads FAL 2 aca CHROMATC E 1 T T Scale type Current octave Scale key 3 To change the key of the scale use the cursor up down keys The setting range is C B in semitone steps The key specified here is the note that will be played by pad 1 4 To change the type of the scale use the cursor left right keys The scale type selections are CHROMATC chromatic MAJOR and MINOR For example when the key of E is selected the pitch of the pads changes as follows depending on the scale type selection 92 ZOOM MRS 1608 Oo I 2 gt O EE elle Hee HAR ele elebe 219 Pe eie 81508 ME 5 Turn the dial to change the octave to be played by the pads The octave of the pads can be selected in four steps 1 4 For example a change from 1 to 2 will shift the pit
254. ing down the STOP lil key and pressing the PLAY gt key you can perform scrub playback of the specified range p 38 The sample playback range can be fine tuned also after importing If you specify a point where there are no audio data the second line of the display shows symbol ZOOM MRS 1608 123 Reference Pad Sampler D Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows Immprtsrc 8 B 2 1 Specify the end point in the same way as in step 4 If you press the PLAY We key at this point the range between the specified start and end points is played 7 When the import source has been specified press the ENTER key The indication IMPORT SURE appears on the display 8 To carry out the import process press the ENTER key once more When the import process is completed the unit returns to the sample selection screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Importing a WAV AIFF file You can import an audio file WAV AIFF from a CD ROM or CD R RW disc inserted in the CD R RW drive or from the internal hard disk Before doing this the following preparations are necessary When importing from the CD R RW drive Insert a CD ROM or CD R RW disc containing audio files into the CD R RW drive When importing from the internal hard disk Copy the audio files from
255. insert effect patch select screen ACOIBASS IM ETE B To select a patch for the insert effect you must first specify os the algorithm effect module combination When you press any ALGORITHM key the first line of the display shows INSERT and the second line shows a patch included in the selected algorithm Effect type Patch name Patch number NOTE If you switch from another algorithm to the 8x COMP EQ algorithm the position will change to IN1 8 TR1 8 or TR9 16 depending on the immediately preceding setting Make sure once more that the desired insert position is selected HINT Even if the 8 track recording function is disabled the 8x COMP EQ algorithm can process the output of tracks 1 8 or 9 16 of the track mixer This is useful to individually process the output of 8 tracks during mixdown While making settings for the insert effect or send return effect the EFFECT key in the display section is lit When you press the key at the main screen the patch select screen for the most recently used effect comes up 141 Reference Effects 2 Use the PATCH SELECT V A keys or turn the dial to select the patch The new patch is called up immediately HINT The indication EMPTY appears instead of the patch name if the patch is empty Selecting such a patch will not have an effect 3 To temporarily turn the insert effect off
256. io disc The specified data do not exist No disc is inserted in the CD R RW drive The CD R RW disc is not empty The disc inserted in the CD R RW drive is not a CD R RW disc There is not enough free space on the internal hard disk 190 ZOOM MRS 1608 Appendix Insert Effect CLEAN DIST ACO BASS SIM BASS algorithm COMP module Type Parameter SENS ATTACK Keeps the dynamic range consistent COMPRESS Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description SENS 0 10 Adjusts the compression input sensitivity ATTACK 0 10 Adjusts the compression attack speed LEVEL 1 8 Adjusts the module output level PRE AMP DRIVE module Type Parameter J CLN Clean sound that models a transistor combo amp US CLN Clean sound that models a built in type vacuum tube amp US DRV Drive sound that models a built in type vacuum tube amp TWEED Model of a small built in vacuum tube combo amp with dry distortion CLASSA Unique crunch sound that models a British style combo amp UK CRU Crunch sound that models a British style vacuum tube stack amp UK DRV Drive sound that models a British style vacuum tube stack amp CMB 335 Models a vacuum tube combo amp characterized by long sustain MTL PNL High gain drive sound that models a vacuum tube stack amp BLK BTM Model of a vacuum tube stack amp characterized by fat bass and d
257. ise the project data will not be read correctly HINT When the disc has been ejected it is possible to abort the load operation To do this press the EXIT key while the indication CHANGE DISCxxx where xxx is the disc number is shown The indication will change to LOAD CANCEL Press the ENTER key to terminate the process 9 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times 164 ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Projects This section describes how to perform operations for entire projects About projects On the MRS 1608 the data needed to reproduce a song you create are managed in units called projects By loading a project from the hard disk you can always go back to exactly the same condition that existed when the project was saved A project contains the following information e Audio data recorded on V takes 1 10 of tracks 1 16 and the master track Numbers of selected V takes for each track Mixer section settings Settings saved in scene numbers 0 99 Scene parameter enabled disabled settings Numbers and settings of patches currently selected for insert effect send return effects e Rhythm patterns Rhythm songs Numbers of drum kit bass program currently selected for drum bass track Sampler programs for pad sampler Samples used by sampler programs Audio data in phrase pool Playlist contents Other required files NOTE On the
258. isplay indication changes as follows letting you specify the copy source end point ZOOM MRS 1608 111 Reference Rhythm EMD MEASURE BE Turn the dial to select the copy source end measure and press the ENTER key The screen for selecting the copy destination appears MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER Z Turn the dial to select the copy destination start measure 8 To execute the copy process press the ENTER key When the copy is executed the EOS marker is shifted back by the number of copied measures By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 9 Press the STOP lil key The unit returns to the rhythm song selection screen Transposing the entire rhythm song You can transpose the bass sequence of the rhythm song in semitone units NOTE When the transpose function is used the chord information root entered for the rhythm song will be rewritten To return to the previous state perform transpose once more in the opposite direction 1 From the main screen press the SONG key so that the key is lit 2 Press the RHYTHM key The key lights up and a rhythm song can be created or edited 3 Press the EDIT key The rhythm song edit menu appears EDIT 4 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication TRANSPOS o
259. it in orange In this condition the effect will apply to the one or two inputs as selected in step 1 NOTE If the 8 track recording function is inactive you cannot select the input mixer as insert position even when the 8x COMP EQ algorithm was selected 3 Press the EXIT key to return to the main screen Insertion to input mixer recording on 8 tracks simultaneously In 8 track recording mode the insert effect can be applied to the input of any channel 1 2 or 8 channels l Verify that the 8 track recording function is enabled and that the ON OFF keys for inputs 1 8are lit in red p 45 140 ZOOM MRS 1608 2 Press the INPUT SOURCE key The current insert position is shown on the display 3 Turn the dial to select the input to use as insert position If the 8 track recording function is enabled operation will be different depending on the selected algorithm When 8x COMP EQ algorithm is selected Select IN1 8 In this condition all input ON OFF keys are lit in orange and the effect is applied to inputs 1 8 HINT Effects in individual channels of the 8x COMP EQ algorithm can be turned on or off individually When another algorithm is selected Select the input from IN1 IN8 input 1 input 8 to which you want to apply the effect The input ON OFF key of the selected input lights up in orange You can also use the input ON OFF keys to select the input By pressing two
260. its p 108 9 Repeat steps 4 8 to enter all required pattern information 10 When all required pattern information has been entered press the STOP W key The REC key goes out and the rhythm song selection screen appears again If you press the PLAY P key the created rhythm song will be played To edit the entered rhythm pattern information proceed as follows Selecting a different rhythm pattern Use the cursor left right keys to move to the point where the respective rhythm pattern information is input and then turn the dial to select the new rhythm pattern Select pattern D Y PATTERN A PATTERNB Y PATTERN A PATTERND By turning the dial at a point where no rhythm pattern information is input PTN is shown you can add new rhythm pattern information for this point In any case the newly selected rhythm pattern information will be valid until the point where the next rhythm pattern information is input ZOOM MRS 1608 105 Reference Rhythm Inserting a rhythm pattern in a song Move to the point you want to insert the rhythm pattern and perform steps 4 7 A new rhythm pattern is inserted at the current location and all subsequent patterns are shifted back by the duration of the inserted pattern Insert PATTERN D Y PATTERN A PATTERNB Y PATTERN A PATTERNB PATTERND
261. jects NOTE A project that is not protected will be automatically saved when power is turned off or when another project is loaded If you have finished a song we recommend to turn protect ON This will prevent inadvertently saving changes caused by operation steps that you have taken after finishing the song ZOOM MRS 1608 169 Reference MIDI This section explains the MIDI related settings and functions of the MRS 1608 About MIDI MIDI Musical Instrument Digital Interface is a standard that allows messages such as performance data collectively called MIDI messages to be exchanged between devices such as electronic musical instruments and computers The MRS 1608 supports MIDI and is equipped with the following two MIDI connectors MIDI OUT MIDI IN MIDI IN connector Serves for receiving MIDI messages sent from an external MIDI device This connector is used mainly to receive Note messages from an external MIDI device in order to play the drum kit bass program or pad sampler MIDI OUT connector Serves for transmitting MIDI messages from the MRS 1608 Note messages that represent the content played by a rhythm pattern or rhythm song are transmitted from this connector as well as synchronization information for use by an external MIDI device What you can do using MIDI On the MRS 1608 you can use MIDI for the following functions Receive and send play information You can use an external
262. k s will play back 4 To play the bounce target track turn the dial to change the setting to PLAY 5 To return to the main Screen press the EXIT key several times 42 ZOOM MRS 1608 Selecting the recording destination V take By default the result of the bounce operation will be recorded on the V take that is currently selected for the recording track s To play back a track while bouncing onto another V take of that track you can use the following procedure to change the recording destination V take 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY BOUNCE on the display and press the ENTER key 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BOUNCE REC TAKE on the display and press the ENTER key The current setting is shown REC TAKE CURRENT The indications have the following meaning CURRENT The bounce result will be recorded on the V take currently selected for the recording track default setting e 1 10 The bounce result will be recorded on the V take of the recording track with the specified number 4 Turn the dial to specify the recording destination V take 5 Toreturn to the main Screen press the EXIT key several times Reference Recorder Executing bounce recording This example explains how
263. k when checking out the time stretch compress effect becomes the editing end point 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing to select the track V take for time stretch compress and press the ENTER key The indication T mStrDst appears on the display In this condition you can select a track V take on which to place the audio data after time stretch compress TR 1 1 2 Use the cursor up down keys and the dial to select the destination track V take and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows This screen lets you specify the ratio for time stretch compress in two units as listed below e Stretch ratio 96 Expresses the length of the track after time stretch compress 54 ZOOM MRS 1608 Tempo BPM Sets the tempo beats per minute after time stretch compress using the tempo set in the rhythm song as reference In the default condition the current tempo of the rhythm section is shown 3 Use the cursor left right keys to select the unit for making the time stretch compress setting The selected unit flashes 4 Turn the dial to make the time stretch compress setting When you change one item the other item also changes accordingly The setting range of 50 150 for the stretch compress ratio cannot be exceeded D Press the PLAY gt key The stretched compressed track is played from the beginning of the V take
264. key and press the PLAY gt key A four beat pre count is heard and rhythm pattern recording starts HINT The beat and the volume of the pre count clicks can be changed 118 5 While listening to the metronome tap the pads Your performance on the pads will be recorded as a bass sequence according to the quantization setting The intensity with which you hit the pads will also be recorded When you reach the end of the pattern the unit automatically returns to the first measure and real time input continues If you press the REC 6 key during recording and recording will be temporarily suspended In this state you can tap the pads to check which note is assigned to each pad and you can also switch the octave Recording resumes when you press REC 6 key once more HINT During real time input you can press the DRUM or BASS key to switch the target sequence for recording Instead of tapping the pads you can also input a pattern in real time by using a MIDI controller connected to the MRS 1608 s MIDI IN connector After concluding real time input you can change the quantize setting and then record on top of the existing sequence Changing the quantize value will not affect the existing playing information To edit the recorded contents during real time input proceed as follows To erase the performance of a specific pad While holding down the DELETE ERASE key press the pad whose pitc
265. key to move to the position that you want to erase Then hold down the DELETE ERASE key and press the respective pad The note recorded at that point is erased and the pad goes out NOTE When searching for a note to erase set the quantize value to the same value as the smallest value used during recording or to a smaller value Otherwise the start of a note may be missed 10 When you have finished step input press the STOP W key The REC 6 key goes out and the rhythm pattern selection screen appears again By pressing the PLAY We key you can check the rhythm pattern that you recorded 11 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Bass sequence step input Compared to the drum sequence step input the step input procedure for a bass sequence is somewhat more complex because there are the additional elements of pitch and duration As in drum track step input you specify the step length interval to next note or rest using the quantize value and you use the pads and the STEP key to enter notes and rests But when you input a note you must also specify the duration parameter This parameter allows you to vary the actual duration for each note while keeping the step length the same see diagram below Itis also possible to set the duration to a longer value than the step length In this case the note will overlap the next note which can be used to achieve an arpeggio like effec
266. l mixdown is possible without using up any of the regular audio tracks ZOOM MRS 1608 Introduction E Rhythm section can be used to provide guide rhythm or accompaniment The rhythm section provides more than 400 types of accompaniment patterns from the internal drum sound generator What s more you can create your own original patterns using real time or step input Patterns can be used as a guide rhythm during recording or programmed together with chords to create an entire rhythm song In addition to conventional step input the MRS 1608 features an innovative concept called FAST developed by ZOOM which lets you quickly build songs with various repetition patterns E Phrase loop function for pasting audio material Using recorded audio data or audio files picked up from a CD ROM disc you can create phrase loops for example of drum licks and guitar riffs The playback order and repetition count of loop material can be programmed with the FAST method and written to any V take as audio data Pad sampler lets you play audio material with the pads Parts of an audio track or an audio file imported from CD ROM can be assigned to the pads and played like a percussion set This is useful to add sound effects to a song or play a rhythm pattern with unique character E Mixer section supporting automated operation The internal digital mixer can handle the playback signal from the audio tracks plus the drum and bass sound The level pa
267. la input principles are explained on page 106 C cede na If you make a mistake during input correct it as follows Inserting a number formula Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and enter the new numeral or symbol Deleting a number formula Use the cursor left right keys to cause the numeral or symbol that you want to delete to flash and press the DELETE ERASE key ZOOM MRS 1608 107 Reference Rhythm 5 When formula input is completed press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows In this condition you can select the rhythm song number in which you want to write the song Turn the dial to select the target rhythm song and press the ENTER key The write operation is carried out and the rhythm song edit menu appears again To check the result press the EXIT key to return to the rhythm song selection screen select the rhythm song that you have written and press the PLAY gt key 7 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Entering chord information This section explains how to add chord information root and chord type data to the rhythm song that you have created by inputting rhythm pattern data When playing a rhythm song for which chord information was input the bass sequence will change according to the chord progression HINT If the original root of the rhythm pattern and the root
268. ld shows EMPTY HINT In a newly created sampler program all pads assignments will be empty 7 Use the cursor up down keys to select a pad bank and press the pad to which you want to assign a sample The pad is selected For example if you press pad 2 of pad bank1 the following indication will appear 8 To make a setting for this pad press the INSERT COPY key in the rhythm section The indication SPL LOAD appears on the display and you can select a sample to assign to the pad SPL LOAD SAMPLERS Ho i Sample number Sample name ZOOM MRS 1608 129 Reference Pad Sampler 9 Turn the dial to select the sample that you want to assign to the pad and press the ENTER key twice To hear the sample you can press the PLAY We key at this point The assignment process is carried out and the unit returns to the screen of step 6 HINT After you have pressed the ENTER key once the indication LOAD OK is shown The size of the sample is shown on the second line of the display You can use the cursor up down keys to switch the indication between the size and the play time of the sample 10 To adjust various parameters for the pad use the cursor left right keys to select a parameter from the following options and turn the dial to adjust it e PITCH Fine tunes the pitch of the sample for the pad The setting range is 7 9 0 reference pitch 7 9 in steps
269. le MTC transmission is enabled Timing Clock Song Position Pointer and Start Stop Continue messages are disabled Control Change transmission is always enabled except when the drum kit bass program send receive channel is off 5 Press the ENTER key to display the setting of the selected item and turn the dial to change the setting For details on each item refer to the following explanation When you have finished making settings press the EXIT key several times to return to the main screen Setting the drum kit bass program MIDI channel You can specify the MIDI channels for the drum kit and bass program Refer to steps 1 4 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication MIDI DRUM CH or MIDI BASS on the display and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to select one of the following settings TRUM CH 18CH 1 16CH Select one of MIDI channels 1 16 default DRUM CH 10CH BASS CH 9CH OFF Channel messages Note On Off Program Change Control Change and other messages will not be sent or received If you specify a MIDI channel 1 16 for the drum kit or bass program you can transmit Note On Off messages from an external MIDI device on that MIDI channel to play the sounds of the MRS 1608 171 Reference MIDI Also when you play back a rhythm pattern or rhythm song on the MRS 1608 the drum bass track playing information will be transmitted as Note On Off me
270. lection menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Moving a V take You can move the audio data of a specified V take to any other V take This action will overwrite any existing data on the destination V take The data on the move source V take will be erased Move source track Move destination track 1 Refer to steps 1 5 of Basic steps for V take editing to select the track V take to move and to bring up the indication MOVE on the display Then press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the move destination track V take appears on the display TO TR 1 1 2 Use the cursor left right keys and the dial to Reference Track Editing select the destination track V take and press the ENTER key The indication MOVE SURE appears on the display If audio data exist at the move destination the indication OverWrt is shown When the move operation is performed these data will be overwritten 3 To execute the move operation press the ENTER key once more When the move operation is completed the unit returns to the V take selection menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Exchanging V takes You can exchange the audio data of two specified V takes Exchange d
271. lights up and the rhythm section can be used independently 2 Pressthe UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The rhythm utility menu appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY SAMPLE on the display and press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the sample appears on the display 4 Turn the dial to select the sample you want to edit and then press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key once more The sample utility menu appears 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SAMPLE SPL EDIT on the display and press the ENTER key In this condition you can select an editing command orl EDIT REVERSE The following commands are available REVERSE Reverse a specified range of audio data ZOOM MRS 1608 127 Reference Pad Sampler FADE I O Fade in out Perform fade in fade out over a specified audio data interval 6 Use the cursor left right keys to select the command and press the ENTER key The subsequent steps are the same as described for the respective editing commands in the track editing section of this manual For REVERSE see page 54 For FADE I O see page 53 The only difference is that the range can only be specified in minutes seconds milliseconds Creating sampler programs Creating a new sampler program To use samples that you have imported you must first create a blank sampler program in an unu
272. lines and tempo Default setting 1 1 measure beat 2 1 3 1 4 1 Phrase A Phrase B ADJUST BAR When you select this setting phrase playback start is aligned to the measure start of the rhythm song If one measure of the phrase phrase playback range divided by number of measures specified by MEAS x parameter is longer than one measure of the rhythm song the phrase is switched when the number of measures specified by the MEAS x parameter has played without waiting for the end of the phrase If one measure of the phrase is shorter than one measure of the rhythm song there will be a blank until the measure where playback switches to the next phrase 1 1 measure beat 2 1 3 1 4 1 Phrase A Phrase B MEAS x02 MEAS x01 ADJUST BAR amp LEN When you select this setting the phrase length is adjusted so that the measures of the rhythm song and the phrase are matched Pitch will not change 1 1 measure beat 2 1 3 1 4 1 Phrase A Phrase B MEAS x02 MEAS x01 NOTE When selecting ADJUST BAR or ADJUST BAR amp LEN verify that the MEAS x parameter for each phrase is set to a suitable number of measures If the setting is inappropriate the rhythm song and phrase will not synchronize properly If ADJUST BAR amp LEN is selected and the expansion contraction ratio exceeds a certain range 50 150 the indication Out of Range appears and the results may not be as expec
273. ll have been replaced by the previously captured audio data By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT By performing the swap operation once more you can return the track contents to the previous condition return to the main Screen press the EXIT key several times 66 ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Phrase Looping The MRS 1608 lets you handle part of a recorded track or an audio file on CD ROM as a phrase that can be loaded and played freely in a preprogrammed sequence or for a specified number of times The result can be written to any track V take This function is called phrase looping For example you could use a commercially available sampling CD to pick up drum loops in any desired order and use these to create a rhythm track This section describes the steps for phrase looping Which kind of phrases can be used The MRS 1608 can manage up to 100 phrases in one project The phrases are stored on the hard disk in an area called the phrase pool The following kinds of data can be used as a phrase 1 Any track V take in the currently loaded project You can select any track V take in the currently loaded project and specify a range to be used as a phrase 2 Audio file on CD ROM R RW You can load a stereo or mono audio file 8 bit or 16 bit AIFF or WAV file with sampling frequency 8 48 kHz from a
274. llows In this condition you can select the rhythm song to be used as copy target Copy destination rhythm song number Copy source rhythm song number HINT An empty rhythm song is shown with an to the right of the number 5 Turn the dial to select the copy destination rhythm song and press the ENTER key The indication COPY SURE appears on the display 6 To execute the copy process press the ENTER key once more When the copy operation is completed the unit returns to the rhythm song selection screen with the destination rhythm song being selected By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Deleting the rhythm song This section explains how to delete the entire rhythm song resetting it to a blank state HINT Once you delete the rhythm song it cannot be recovered Use this operation with care 1 From the main screen press the SONG key so that the key is lit Reference Rhythm 2 Press the RHYTHM key The key lights up and a rhythm song can be created or edited 3 Turn the dial to select the rhythm song to delete 4 Press the DELETE ERASE key The indication DELETE SURE appears on the display 5 Press the ENTER key to delete the rhythm song When the delete operation is completed the unit returns to the rhythm song selection screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the
275. long as the A B REPEAT key is still lit 5 To turn off repeat playback press the A B REPEAT key The key goes out and repeat playback will be turned off The A B point locations also will be cleared ZOOM MRS 1608 37 Reference Recorder Finding a desired location scrub preview function The MRS 1608 provides a scrub function that lets you search for a desired location while repeatedly playing a short region before or after the current point This is convenient to accurately find the point at which a specific sound starts or stops When the scrub function is on you can use the preview function that plays 0 7 seconds before and after the current point By using the scrub and preview functions together you can find the desired location quickly and accurately Using scrub preview 1 perform scrub playback hold down the STOP W key from the main screen and press the PLAY P key The keys light up and a short region 40 milliseconds by default following the current location will play back repeatedly Immediately after activating the scrub function audio track 1 will be selected as target for scrub playback Current location Track Scrub playback p ees When the scrub function is on the display indication changes as follows 2 Use the status keys to select the track s for scrub playback Up to four tracks can be selected simultaneously for scrub playback St
276. loop 1 C Ry 04 3B Percussion loop 2 Asian Loops N Ry 05 1A Asian percussion loop 1 1 27 Ry 05 1B Asian percussion loop 1 2 Q A Ry 05 1C Asian percussion loop 1 3 Ry 05 1D Asian percussion loop 2 o Ry 05 1E Asian percussion loop 3 Hardcore Loop C N Sg 01 1A Industrial drum loop Sg 01 1B Industrial break Sg 01 1C Industrial G amp B break A 59 01 10 Industrial guitar A pry Sg 01 2A Big beat drum loop A Sg 01 2B Big beat bass loop A 5 Sg 01 2C Big beat FX loop Control Variations A A Sg 02 1A Hiphop track 1 1 A a Sg 02 1B Hiphop track 1 2 A o Sg 02 2A Hiphop track 2 1 A N Sg 02 2B Hiphop track 2 2 Drum Bass Loops A Sg 03 1A Drum loop A Sg 03 1B Bass loop Reggae Variations a o Sg 04 1A Dub drum loop Sg 04 1B Dub bass loop N Sg 04 1C Dub guitar loop Sg 04 2A Dub drum loop A Sg 04 2B Dub bass loop ai Sg 04 2C Dub guitar solo loop ZOOM MRS 1608 215 Appendix EB 01 1A Old funk loop 1 EB 01 1B Old funk loop 2 EB 02 1A Old school bass loop 1 EB 02 1B Old school bass loop 2 EB 03 1A Old House bass loop EB 03 1B Pops bass loop EB 04 1A Funk
277. ly right TWO SOURCE Fan H NOTE When the destination is a mono track the pan setting will have no effect 9 Adjust the level and panning for the harmony part in the same way by bringing up the indication CHORUS LVL or CHORUS Pan on the display 10 Press the cursor down key to cause the counter indication to flash Then use the cursor left right keys and the dial to specify the start point for Duo Harmony generation You can also use the MARKER M4 gt gt keys ZERO M key and REW 44 FF gt gt keys to locate the point The Duo Harmony part will be added to the range where recording steps were carried out By pressing the PLAY gt key at this point you can check the editing result 60 ZOOM MRS 1608 HINT The manual and automatic punch in punch out functions can also be used at this point 11 To start Duo Harmony generation hold down the REC 0 key and press the PLAY gt key 12 When recording has progressed to the point where you want harmony generation to stop press the STOP W key The indication DUO HARM SURE appears on the display 13 To confirm the operation press the ENTER key The editing result is written to the track When the process is complete the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Reference Track Edi
278. ly selected patch can be edited 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication TOTAL PAT LVL on the display 4 Repeatedly press the cursor down key to bring up the indication PAT NAME on the display The name of the selected patch can now be edited The flashing section indicates the character that can be changed 5 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and turn the dial to select a character For information on available characters refer to page 36 Repeat step 5 as necessary to complete the new name 7 e To confirm the new name press the STORE key in the control section twice The patch is stored under the new name and the insert effect patch select screen appears again NOTE Keep in mind that the name will revert to the previous name if you switch to another patch without storing the edited patch name 145 Reference Effects Applying the insert effect only to the monitor signal Normally when the insert effect is applied to the input mixer the signal processed by the effect will be recorded on the track If necessary however you can apply the insert effect only to the monitor signal and record the unprocessed input signal on the track For example when recording the unprocessed sound of a vocal performance the vocalist may be more comfortable singing if an insert effect suitable for T mic recording is applied to the monitor signal
279. m pattern 101 GOUD asd rop eo n fes Les 114 Changing the drum bass sequence volume Parining turo rota E 29 80 level ceo erbe Dues 101 Patch Copying a rhythm 102 Insert 139 Entering chord information 100 Send return effect 147 Erasing a rhythm pattern 103 Phraseloop 67 Real time input 94 95 Adjusting the parameters of a phrase 71 Selecting a rhythm pattern 89 Copying a phrase 73 Step 96 98 Deleting a phrase 73 Rhythm pattern mode 87 Importing a phrase from another project 71 Rhythm recording 44 Importing a phrase from the current project 69 Rhythm related troubleshooting information 189 Importing a WAV AIFF 70 Rhythm section 10 13 87 Writing a phrase loop toa track 73 Changing the metronome volume 119 Phrase pool 2 0 ce ccd cee tee e Rh RR 67 Changing the pad sensitivity 120 55 Changing the pre count duration 119 Playback related troubleshooting information 188 Checking the remaining m
280. m punch in out to a suitable position 2 Usethe ON OFF key to select the input andthen play your instrument connected to the INPUT jack and use the INPUT control and REC LEVEL control to adjust the recording level 3 Locate the point at which you want to punch in and press the AUTO PUNCH IN OUT key The key flashes This sets the In point at which recording will begin 4 Locate the point at which you want to punch out and press the AUTO PUNCH IN OUT key once more The key changes from flashing to solidly lit This sets the Out point at which recording will end HINT To specify the in out points precisely it is convenient to use the scrub function p 38 to find the locations and assign a mark p 46 beforehand at the desired locations 5 Use the Locate function to go to a spot before the In point 6 Repeatedly press the status key for the track on which you want to perform punch in out until the key flashes red NOTE If the current location is between the In point and Out point the status key and the REC key if during recording will be lit red In this case use the locate function once again to go to a point that is earlier than the In point 7 Torehearse the auto punch in out process press the PLAY P key The recorder will begin playing When you reach the In point the track on which you are punching in out will be muted When you reach the Out point muting will be
281. maintenance Never attempt to manipulate the files in this partition Do not rename the MRS USR files and folders unnecessarily since the MRS 1608 will not recognise the renamed files or folders The MRS USR contains the following files and folders folder Contains various data read when creating a new project PRJDATA INI Project data RHYTHM SEQ Rhythm pattern rhythm song data XXXXXXxx Z SD Drum kits bass program data SAMPLERO ZSP Sample data SYS folder Contains the system related files MAC_PRM INI Number of most recently edited project BURNLIST CDT Album data SEQPLYxx LST Play list data PROJxxx folder Contains various data for each project TRACKx_y DAT or TRACKxxy DAT Audio data for each track V take x or xx 0 15 corresponding to track number 1 16 y 0 9 to V take number 1 10 PHRASExx PH Audio data for each phrase mono or stereo left channel xx 00 99 corresponding to phrase number PHRASExx PHR Audio data for each phrase stereo right channel xx 00 99 corresponding to phrase number LOOPxx LSQ Expression data entered to create phrase loop RHYTHM FST Expression data entered to create rhythm song with FAST method PRJDATA INI Project setting data Appendix RHYTHM SEQ Rhythm pattern rhythm song data XXXXXXxx Z SD Drum kits bass program sampler program data SAMPLERx ZSP Sample data SAMPLER folder Contains sample data SAMPLxxx SP Audi
282. mbols _ underscore 8 Press the ENTER key The indication SAVE SURE appears on the display 9 execute the backup press the ENTER key To cancel press the EXIT key instead When backup starts the indication DISCxxx BURNING where xxx is the disc number appears on the display When the backup is finished the display shows SAVE COMPLETE If the project size is larger than the capacity of one CD R RW disc the disc will be ejected after it has been filled up and the display indication changes as follows ZOOM MRS 1608 161 Reference Creating a CD When this message is shown insert the next CD R RW disc and press the ENTER key The backup operation resumes If more than two discs are required the above steps will be repeated NOTE When a backup spans several discs the discs must be used in the same order for restore Be sure to note the disc number on the case and label of the disc HINT When the disc has been ejected it is possible to abort the backup operation To do this press the EXIT key while the indication CHANGE DISCxxx where xxx is the disc number is shown The indication will change to SAVE CANCEL Press the ENTER key to terminate the process 10 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Saving all projects to CD R RW disc You can save all projects on the hard disk to CD R RW media for backup If the tot
283. me message is transmitted Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Yes Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO x No ZOOM MRS 1608 219 E Symbols and numerals esee Leu peser set le mor a dg ce 74 106 PP tit Mase ata tee otic Rats oa 74 106 pae eee 74 106 Qoi uetus Dele ei et ere 74 106 8x COMP EQ sro ronke aiana nr he Ren 139 8 track recording mode 45 repeat function 37 Adjusting the volume Pad Drum kit 2 0 114 Pad Sampler 129 Phitase oll uere IE een ERE 71 Pre count Recorder 48 Pre count Rhythm section 118 Rhythm 88 93 9 88 103 ns rie ati 29 80 AIFF file Importing a WAV AIFF file Pad sampler 124 Importing a WAV AIFF file Phrase 70 era etas 153 Algorithm eee 139 141 ALGORITHM key 12 141 All initialize s ia a aae 185 Audio CD Analog 157 Creating an audio CD 152 Digital 157 Importing an audio CD into a project 160 Auto punch in out 40 BB Backup i am eiu
284. mpleted the unit automatically returns to the main screen of the copy destination project By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time ZOOM MRS 1608 167 Reference Projects Erasing a project This operation erases the specified project from the hard disk 1 Reterto steps 1 2 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication PROJECT ERASE on the display Then press the ENTER key ERS PRB Project name Project number 2 Turn the dial to select the project and press the ENTER key The indication PRJ ERS SURE appears on the display 3 Press the ENTER key to erase the project When erasing is completed press the EXIT key to return to the main screen NOTE Once a project has been erased it cannot be recovered Use this operation with care A project for which protect is ON cannot be erased Set protect to OFF and then repeat the procedure f you erase a project that is currently loaded the lowest numbered project will automatically be loaded after the erase operation has been completed Changing the project name This operation lets you edit the name of the currently loaded project 1 Refer to steps 1 2 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication PROJECT NAME on the display Then press the ENTER key The current project name is shown on the display
285. mporting a WAV AIFF file 124 Setting various sample parameters 125 Editing a sample 126 Copying a sample 126 Deleting a 5 127 Editing a specified range of a sample 127 Creating sampler programs 128 Creating a new sampler program 128 Assigning samples to pads 129 Editing a sampler program 131 Assigning a name to a sampler program 131 Copying a sampler program 131 Deleting a sampler program 132 Using the pads to play the pad sampler 133 Playing the pad sampler sounds in a rhythm sols 134 Recording pad sampler play on an audio track o domo d b cM s 135 Importing a sampler program from another proJect nexu Sie Get 136 Reference Effects 138 About the effects 138 Insert effect 138 Send return effect 138 Using the insert effect 139 About insert effect patches 139 Contents Changing the insert location of the insert effect 140 Selecting the patch for the insert effect 141 Editing the insert effect patches 142 Storing swapping insert effect patches 145 Editing the n
286. n between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help CATCH US IF YOU CAN ZOOM CORPORATION NOAH Bldg 2 10 2 Miyanishi cho Fuchu shi Tokyo 183 0022 Japan PHONE 81 42 369 7116 FAX 81 42 369 7115 Web Site http Awww zoom co jp MRS 1608 5000 2
287. n screen 8 When you have registered all desired projects in the playlist press the EXIT key several times to return to the main screen HINT The playlist contents are stored automatically NOTE If the master track data for projects included in a playlist have been deleted from the hard disk the playlist returns to the blank state Playlist playback Select the playlist for continuous project playback as follows l From the main screen press the PROJECT key in the display section The project menu appears 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PROJECT SEQ PLAY on the display and press the ENTER key The display shows the screen for selecting a playlist The counter in the bottom of the display shows the total playback time of all projects in the playlist a 1 MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER Total playing time of projects 3 Turn the dial to select the desired playlist 4 Press the PLAY gt key Projects are played in the order as registered in the playlist The display indication changes as follows PLAY PREG Project name Ha 1 Current playback number Use the MASTER fader to adjust the playback volume When a project has played through the next project is 178 ZOOM MRS 1608 automatically loaded and played During project playback the following keys can be used to select a track pause play or locate a cer
288. n sync with rhythm tempo ECHO FIX WAH ARRM PIT Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description EXCITER 0 30 DEPTH Adjusts the depth of the effect Others 0 10 TREMOLO 1 30 T4 T 1 8 RATE FLANGER PHASER Adjusts the speed of the effect The x setting results in sync with the rhythm 1 30 T 4x4 T 1 8 tempo Others 1 30 MIX 0 30 Adjusts the mix amount of the effect FLANGER 10 10 FB Adjusts the amount of feedback DELAY ECHO 0 10 POSTON ARIER BERGHE BEFORE before the PRE AMP DRIVE module Specifies the type of phase tone 4Stage 4 stage phaser COLOR Invert4 4 stage phaser with inverted feedback 8Stage 8 stage phaser Invert8 8 stage phaser with inverted feedback CLIP 0 10 Emphasizes the effect FLT TYPE BPF LPF Specifies the filter type RESONANC AUTO WAH ae Adjusts the effect character intensity STEP 0 10 SENS 10 1 1 10 Adjusts the effect sensitivity SHIFT 24 0 12 0 Adjust the pitch shift amount The value 1 0 corresponds to semitone TONE 0 10 Adjusts the tone BALANCE 0 30 Adjusts the balance between the direct sound and effect sound SLOW ATK 1 30 Adjusts the attack speed TIME ioc Adjusts the delay time in 1 ms steps The T x setting results in sync with the DELAY ECHO rhythm tempo fc PRONUS 1 10000
289. n the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows TRANSPOS B value D Turn the dial to select the transpose setting 6 0 6 and press the ENTER key The default setting is 0 no transpose operation When you select for example a setting of 6 the rhythm song will be transposed by six semitones up When you press the ENTER key the indication TRANSPOS SURE appears on the display Press the ENTER key once more to execute the transpose operation The transpose operation is carried out and the rhythm song edit menu appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Copying a rhythm song You can copy the contents of any rhythm song in a project to any other rhythm song number This is useful to create variations of a song NOTE When you execute the copy the contents of the destination rhythm song will be completely erased and overwritten by the copy source rhythm song Take care not to accidentally erase a song that you wish to keep 112 ZOOM MRS 1608 1 From the main screen press the SONG key so that the key is lit 2 Press the RHYTHM key The key lights up and a rhythm song can be created or edited d Turn the dial to select the copy source rhythm song 4 Press the INSERT COPY key The display indication changes as fo
290. nd end p 52 3 From the main screen press the CD R RW key in the control section The CD R RW menu for various disc related functions appears CTI RE RH cm LE dli 4 Verify that CD R RW AUDIO CD is shown on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows munia Co BURH CD 5 Verify that the indication AUDIO CD BURN CD is shown on the display and press the ENTER key The indication BURN CD TIME is shown along with the duration of the master track V take that is currently selected for writing By pressing the PLAY We key at this point you can listen to the contents of the V take BUR TIME MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER B 327328 Master track duration HINT When you press the cursor down key the second line of the display shows REMAIN and the remaining write time on the inserted CD R RW disc appears on the counter Press the cursor up key to return to the previous indication To change the V take to be used as source material press the EDIT key When the key is pressed the display indication changes as follows NOTE Unrecorded V takes of the master track cannot be selected By turning the dial in this condition you can select the V take To return to the condition of step 5 press the EXIT key If necessary listen to the V take to verify that the correct V take is selected Z Pres
291. ng contains information about rhythm patterns chord tempo beat etc in a matrix configuration as shown at the bottom of this page This is called event information When the rhythm song is in the input condition REC 6 key lit you can move the current position with the cursor keys etc and use the cursor up down keys to call up and enter or edit event information 1 Verify that the SONG key and RHYTHM key are lit 3 4 5 PATTERN 020 7 7 Pattern VALL v Beat 44 Root chord D maj Gmn 7 Tempo 135 7 Drum track volume va X Bass track volume Drum kit number Bass program number As i 0 WAAAY ZOOM MRS 1608 109 Reference Rhythm If a key is not lit press it so that it lights up Use the ZERO M4 key to align the current position with the beginning of the rhythm song 2 Press the REC 0 key The REC key lights up and rhythm pattern input for the rhythm song becomes possible Ji Press the cursor up key repeatedly to bring up the indication on the first line of the display This screen lets you check which event information is entered at the current point The symbol after such as Pt or TS denotes the type of event Entered event type Available events and their symbols are listed in the table below Wee ot Content Rhythm pattern number 0
292. ng the REC key 5 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ZOOM MRS 1608 181 Reference Other Functions Preventing digital copying of a master disc or master tape When mixing down to a DAT recorder MD recorder or similar via the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks you can prevent digital copies third generation copies from being made from your completed master disc or tape onto another digital recorder The procedure is as follows 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY SYSTEM on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows SYSIEM FOOT SH 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY D PRTCT on the display and press the ENTER key The current setting for digital copying will be displayed D The settings have the following meaning OFF default setting Digital copying from your master tape to another digital recorder is permitted ON SCMS Serial Copy Management System data will be added to the digital signal that is output from the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack It will not be possible to make digital copies third generation copies from a master tape or master disc that contains this data 4
293. nning and EQ settings of each channel can be saved as separate scenes A saved scene can be switched automatically at a desired point in a song E Versatile effects In terms of internal effects the MRS 1608 provides an insert effect that can be inserted into a specified signal route and a send return effect that is used via the mixer send return loop The effects can be used in a variety of ways either modifying the tone in real time while recording a track or during track playback E CD R RW drive lets you create audio CDs or backups The MRS 1608 CD model with integrated CD R RW drive lets you write audio data saved on the master track onto a CD R RW disc to produce an audio CD This is convenient to back up data that you have recorded The version of the MRS 1608 without internal CD R RW drive lets you install the optional drive CD 02 later giving you the same functionality as the integrated model In order to take full advantage of the MRS 1608 s versatile functions and to ensure trouble free enjoyment please read this manual carefully Keep this manual in a safe place together with the warranty card ZOOM MRS 1608 Introducing the MRS 1608 The MRS 1608 is internally divided into the following five sections Recorder Records and plays back audio signals Rhythm section Uses the internal drum bass sound source to play rhythms Mixer Mixes the signals from the recorder and the drum bass sound sourc
294. note 8 dotted quarter note e 1 4 quarter note default 3 16 dotted eighth note 1 6 esce quarter triplet note 1 8 sons eighth note ur eighth triplet note dA6 iocos sixteenth note 1 24 sixteenth triplet note 1 32 thirty second note Hla ee tick 1 48 of quarter note ZOOM MRS 1608 91 Reference Rhythm When you hit a pad while pressing the STEP key the pad plays repeatedly at the specified interval roll play For example you can repeat a kick drum at quarter note intervals or play a hihat in sixteenth note units To stop roll play release the pad If you release the STEP key first roll play continues also when you release the pad To stop roll play in this case press the pad once more md Ji dla SYNC quarter note Pad 1 Pad 1 1 1 IARE 9 Release You can also set a different interval for different pads For Hit once more example when you select a quarter note interval for pad and an eighth note interval for pad 2 the following play results m J JJ Jl di i SYNC SYNC quarter note eighth note Pad 1 Pad 2 1 PB Dam 9 Release 9 Release To return to the previous screen press the EXIT key HINT The roll play function is also convenient during rhythm pattern real time input return to the main Screen press the EXIT key Play
295. ntrol or for punch in punch out control ZOOM MRS 1608 16 Installing the CD R RW Drive To install the separately available CD R RW drive into the MRS 1608 model without preinstalled CD R RW drive proceed as follows Cavtion Before installing the drive make sure that all cables and the AC adapter are disconnected numi Front Panel Blank panel 1 d 1 NIE 1 pt s i D B nuntii lt gt ry I e Turn the MRS 1608 over and remove the blank panel from the drive mounting section of the front panel To remove the blank panel pull out the groove in the center 2 Remove the fastening screws of the bottom plate and remove the bottom plate Slide the bottom plate towards the rear to remove Take care not to lose the screws as these will be needed again for reassembly 3 Turn the CD R RW drive over and insert it into the drive mount bay ZOOM MRS 1608 17 Installing the CD R RW Drive 4 Plug the power cable and flat cable from the main unit into the respective connectors on the CD R RW drive N Power cable Flat cable e Rear Panel III 7 5 Push the CD R RW drive all the way into the bay so that the screw holes on the bottom of the a MRS 1608 and the screw holes of the CD R RW as
296. o data for each sample mono or stereo left channel xxx 000 999 corresponding to sample number SAMPLxxx SPR Audio data for each sample stereo right channel xxx 000 999 corresponding to sample number WAV AIFF folder Stores WAV AIFF files Used when importing phrases from the internal hard disk To operate this folder install the optional USB board and copy WAV AIFF files from a computer to this folder SYSTEM ZEX MRS 1608 system file Compatibility with MRS Series The MRS 1608 can exchange project data with the MRS series MRS 1044 MRS 1266 and MRS 802 The following data can be read on all models of the series eAudio data for each track V take eRhythm pattern rhythm song data Other data such as effect patch data and mixer settings cannot be read When a project is loaded the default settings of the destination model will apply ZOOM MRS 1608 217 Appendix MIDI implementation 1 Recognized Messages Status Description 9nH 9nH BnH BnH BnH BnH BnH CnH EnH kk kk 07H OBH 78H 79H 7BH 11 5 3 hh NOTE n MIDI Channel Note Off note number vv velocity will be ignored Note Off kk note number Note On kk note number See NOTE 1 vv velocity Channel Volume vv volume value Channel Expression vv expression value All Sounds Off Reset All Controllers All Notes Off Program Change pp program number Pitch Bend Change hhll
297. o the end when its pad is hit To end the sample earlier proceed as follows Set the LEVEL parameter for another pad to zero and set its MNO MN9 parameter to the same group as the pad whose sound you want to stop Then hit the second pad at the point where you want to stop the sample 11 Repeat steps 7 10 to assign samples to other pads One sampler program can have a maximum total playing time of 22 seconds about 2 megabytes If the indication SPL FULL appears while you are assigning samples the maximum memory capacity is reached In such a case delete unneeded sample assignments as described below 12 To cancel the sample assignment of a pad select the pad and press the DELETE ERASE key Then press the ENTER key When you press the DELETE ERASE key the indication SURE appears on the second line of the display Pressing the ENTER key proceeds with the operation HINT When a sample is deleted the pad reverts to the default settings for each parameter 13 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times The created sampler program is automatically stored on the hard disk HINT You can copy a sampler program to another program number or delete the sampler program For details see the next section ZOOM MRS 1608 130 Editing a sampler program You can change the name of a sampler program or copy it to another program The sampler program editing procedure is des
298. octave higher original 1 octave lower original 11 Perfect 5th lower original perfect 4th higher original 12 Perfect 4rth higher original perfect 5th lower original 13 0 Hz original 1 octave higher 14 1 octave higher 0 Hz original 15 0 Hz original 1 octave higher original 16 1 octave higher original 0 Hz original ZNR module Parameter THRSHOLD Cuts noise during performance pauses Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description THRSHOLD OFF 1 30 Adjusts the sensitivity Set this high as far as the attacks or decays sound natural VOL PDL module Type Parameter MIN VOL You can use expression pedal to control volume Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description MIN VOL 0 10 Specifies the minimum volume ZOOM MRS 1608 194 MIC algorithm COMP LIM module Type Appendix Parameter THRSHOLD ATTACK COMPRESS Keeps the dynamic range consistent THRSHOLD LIMITER RELEASE Controls the signal peeks Parameter description Parameter Setting range Description THRSHOLD 24 0 Adjusts the sensitivity COMP 1 26 RATIO Adjusts the compression degree of the signal LIMIT 1 54 o ATTACK 0 10 Adjusts the compression attack speed LEVEL 0 12 Adjusts the module output level RELEASE 0 10 A
299. of 0 1 1 10 of a semitone e LEVEL Adjusts the output level for the pad The setting range is 1 15 PAN Panning Adjusts the left right stereo position panning for the pad The setting range is L63 far left 0 center R63 far right HINT The panning value set here is independent of the track parameter pan setting When track panning is shifted to left or right the relative arrangement for each pad will be retained while the entire sound is moved left or right e GROUP Selects the type of sound produced when pads are hit in succession PL MN and the group to which the pad belongs 0 7 The setting range is PLO PL7 and MNO MNT For an explanation of this setting see page 114 e REV SEND Reverb send Sets the reverb send level for each pad The setting range is 0 127 This setting is independent from the reverb send level setting made as part of the track parameters NAME Program name Lets you change the name of the sampler program MEMORY REMAIN Indicates the remaining amount of memory for the pad sampler in terms of capacity or play time Use the cursor up down keys to switch between kB kilobytes and ms milliseconds HINT The MEMORY REMAIN parameter is for information only and cannot be changed You can also use the cursor left right keys to bring up the sample name and select another sample Then press the INSERT COPY key again Normally a sample will play t
300. of the following and press the ENTER key TAKE Import a specified range of audio data from any track V take in the currently loaded project WAV AIFF Import an audio file WAV AIFF from a CD ROM R RW disc inserted in the CD R RW drive or from the internal hard disk PHRASE Import a phrase from the phrase pool of another project saved on the hard disk The subsequent steps will differ depending on the type of source selected for the phrase See the sections for the respective commands After the import operation was carried out the phrase menu appears again on the display If desired you can import another phrase Up to 100 phrases can be included in a project with a duration of 1 second 30 minutes per phrase To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times HINT The name PHxxx yy is automatically assigned to the loaded phrase where xxx is the current project number and yy the phrase number ZOOM MRS 1608 Importing a phrase from the current project You can specify a range from any track V take of the current project and use it as a phrase 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic phrase loading steps to select TAKE as import source Then press the ENTER key The indication ImprtSrc TRxx yy where xx is the track number and yy the V take number appears on the display In this condition you can select the import source 2 Use the dial or the status keys to
301. ollows Y Project 1 marker based separation enabled i i Audio CD fo Dg OT track Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Track 4 Track 5 numbers Project 2 marker based separation disabled The subsequent steps for creating the audio CD are as described in the previous section NOTE e f the tracks have not been separated as expected press the EXIT key repeatedly to return to the main screen and check whether marker information has been created properly for the project f marks are too close together the indication ERROR Track is Short appears on the display and marker based separation cannot be enabled for that project The maximum number of tracks per album is 99 If you attempt to enable marker based separation for a project and this causes the number of tracks to exceed 99 the indication ERROR Too Many Track appears and marker based separation cannot be enabled Including a playlist in an album The MRS 1608 lets you register the master tracks of multiple projects in a list playlist for continuous playback in a sequence p 177 Itis possible to include playlist information when creating an audio CD by album HINT You can create up to ten playlists but only one can be included in an album 1 Perform steps 1 6 of Creating an audio CD by album and bring up the album Screen on the display EHD OF ALBUM Track 1 MEASURE BEAT TICK MAR
302. ompleted the unit returns to the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times NOTE If you delete all programs the program number 0 will be automatically created Reference Pad Sampler Using the pads to play the pad sampler You can select a sampler program them play it with the pads 1 From the main screen press the DRUM and BASS keys in the rhythm section simultaneously Both keys light up In this condition the pad sampler can be used NOTE While the pad sampler is active the drum kit and bass program cannot be used By pressing only the DRUM key or BASS key you can return to the normal condition in which a drum kit and bass program can be played 2 Press the RHYTHM key so that the key lights up and then press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The indication UTILITY SPL PRG appears on the display 3 Press the ENTER key twice After you have pressed the ENTER key once the sampler program menu appears When you press the ENTER key once more while SPL PRG SELECT is shown the display changes as follows PRG SEL SFL 1 PRG 4 Turn the dial to select the program to play and press the ENTER key The selected sampler program is loaded into the pad sampler When loading is complete the unit returns to the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen 5 To switch the pad bank
303. onnections 15 Control 170 Control section 13 Copy Copying a drum 116 Copying a phrase 73 Copying a project 167 Copying a range of data Track editing 50 Copying a range of measures Rhythm song 111 Copying a rhythm 102 Copying a rhythm 112 Copying a 126 Copying a sampler program 131 Copying a 62 Preventing digital 182 Creating a CD 151 Creating an audio CD by album 153 Creating an audio CD by project 152 Including playlist information an album 156 Playing an audio 157 Using the marker function to separate tracks 155 BD Delete Deleting a phrase 73 Deleting a rhythm 103 Deleting a rhythm 9 113 Deleting a sample 127 Deleting a sampler program 132 Deleting unneeded parts before and after a section Track 52 Demo song 20 Digital 182 Display s
304. or automatically whenever desired This is convenient to compare various mixes or to automate mix operations A scene contains the following data Track parameters except for stereo link on off and currently selected V take number The state of all status keys play mute Insert effect patch number input source Send return effect chorus delay reverb patch number Fader settings Up to 100 different scenes per project can be stored Scene data stored in memory are saved on the internal hard disk as part of the currently selected project Saving a scene This section explains how to save the current settings as a scene 1 Press the SCENE key in the control section 2 Turn the dial to select the scene number 0 99 in which the data will be saved If you select a number where scene data are already saved the existing data will be erased and overwritten by the new data 3 Press the STORE key The first character of the scene name flashes In this condition you can specify a name for the scene HINT The default name is SCENExxx where xxx is the scene number ZOOM MRS 1608 4 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section and turn the dial to select a character Repeat this until the name is as desired For information on available characters refer to page 36 5 To carry out the store process press the STORE key or the ENTER key The current mixer and e
305. or bass that you want to turn the dial during tuner operation tune to one of the GUITAR BASS INPUT jacks 1 2 Press the ON OFF key for the The reference pitch of the tuner is set to center A 440 input to which the instrument is connected Hz by default The reference pitch can be adjusted over ay the range of 435 445 Hz in 1 Hz steps When the value so that the key is lit in red was changed the original display will return after a 2 Pressthe TUNER key in the effect section while and use the cursor left right keys to select the tuner type CALIE While the tuner function is active the cursor left right 448 keys serve to switch the tuner type Tuner types and notes for each string are listed in the table below HINT Thereference pitch selected here will remain in effect until you return the setting to the original value Tuner type GUITAR BASS OPENA OPEND OPENE OPENG DADGAD String number note name ZOOM MRS 1608 180 For example when you select the tuner type GUITAR the display shows the following information Tuner type LIT TAR E Strinus Target note for string number String number 3 Play the indicated string as an open string and perform tuning 4 Use the cursor up down keys to select other string numbers Tune the other strings in the same way 5 To quit the tuning function
306. or is specified and shift upwards is selected for the Duo Harmony function the following harmony will be created Source track Duo Harmony V7 Write target track eases tt 3155 229 Emm NOTE For the Duo Harmony function to work properly the audio data should represent single notes recorded without applying delay reverb chorus or other effects 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing to select the track V take for harmony generation and press the ENTER key The indication DHmnyDst appears on the display In this condition you can select the target destination for writing the created harmony DHmreazt TR 1 1 NOTE You can only select a single mono track or one track of a Stereo pair as source track for Duo Harmony ZOOM MRS 1608 59 Reference Track Editing 2 Use the cursor up down keys and the dial status keys to select the track V take to be used as destination If you specify the same track V take as the source the harmony data will be added to the original data and the V take will be overwritten You can also specify a stereo track or two mono tracks as destination Press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows From this screen you can set the key to be used as reference for the harmony 4 Turn the dial to select the key
307. ore or after the current location and the length of the scrub playback section 1 e Fromthe main screen hold down the STOP Bi key and press the PLAY gt key This turns the scrub function on and the direction and duration of scrub playback are shown on the display SCELIE Direction of scrub playback Length of scrub playback 2 To change the length of scrub playback use the cursor left right keys to cause the scrub playback length setting to flash and turn the dial You can select 40 80 120 160 or 200 ms as the length of scrub playback 38 ZOOM MRS 1608 HINT You can also use the cursor up down keys to change the scrub playback length 3 To change the direction of scrub playback use the cursor left right keys to cause the scrub playback direction indication to flash and turn the dial If you select TO scrub playback will begin from an earlier point and end at the current location If you select FRM scrub playback will begin from the current location To exit the scrub function press the STOP Bl key default setting i i Current location Current location lt Scrub playback 9 1 Scrub playback 1 S a Ue EAD EO Re recording only a specified region punch in out function Punch in out is a function that lets you re record just a specified region of a previously re
308. ored in any location of the same algorithm You can also store an existing patch in another location to create a copy of that patch Interchanging the position of patches swapping is also possible 1 e Attheinsert effect patch select screen press the STORE key The currently selected patch goes into the store standby condition In this condition you can perform the store or swap operation Ho Patch number 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication STORE TO or SWAP TO 3 Turn the dial to select the number of the patch to store swap 4 To carry out the store swap operation press the STORE key When the store swap operation is completed the insert effect patch select screen appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the STORE key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT Patches that you have stored are saved on the hard disk as part of the project Patch data included in an already existing project can be loaded into the current project p 149 ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Effects Editing the name of an insert effect patch This section explains how to edit the name of the currently selected patch l Use the ALGORITHM keys to select the algorithm which contains the patch whose name you want to change Then use the PATCH SELECT V A keys or the dial to select the patch 2 Press the EDIT key The current
309. other information 109 Playing a rhythm song 111 Editing a rhythm song 111 Copying a specified range of measures 111 Transposing the entire rhythm song 112 Copying a rhythm song 112 Deleting the rhythm song 113 Assigning a name to a rhythm song 113 Creating your own drum kit 114 Changing the sound and settings for each 114 Assigning name to a drum kit 116 Copying drum 116 Adjusting the volume of each pad with the faders sss eel Rem mnm 117 Importing rhythm pattems and rhythm songs from another project 117 Editing various settings of the rhythm Section iue RR ee 118 Basic procedure 118 Changing the length of the pre count 119 Changing the metronome volume 119 Adjusting the sensitivity ofthe pads 120 Checking the remaining amount of memory 120 Swapping the left right pan position 120 Reference Pad Sampler 121 How the pad sampler works 121 Material that can be imported into the sample DOO eee ce ecrit 122 Importing a sample 122 Basic steps for sample importing 122 Importing part of a track V take 123 I
310. ou have finished editing the name press the EXIT key The new name is accepted and the unit returns to the condition of step 2 If necessary you can edit the names of other V takes 8 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key The V TAKE key goes out 36 ZOOM MRS 1608 HINT If the contents of a V take are fully erased the name reverts to NO DATA Moving to a desired point the song locate function You can specify a location within the song in time units minutes seconds milliseconds or in measure units measure beat tick units and move to that location Measures Ticks Hours Seconds HIB IZ66R 587 2 A Minutes Milliseconds Beats HINT If you use the marker function p 46 to set marks for recorder positions you can use the locate function to move among marks l Verify that the recorder is stopped 2 Usethe cursor left right keys from the main screen to move the flashing part to the unit you want to change For example to change the minutes cause the segment marked to flash dj L MEASURE BEAT MARKER Saf 2 B8 E2668 3 Turn the dial to change the value shown for the flashing part When you change the displayed value the recorder immediately moves to the new location Pressing the PLAY gt key starts playback from that point HINT The measure beat tick indication changes according to the current rhythm section tempo
311. ow Timbale Mid Tom 1 High Agogo High Tom 2 Low Agogo Crash Cymbal 1 Cabasa Hi Tom 1 Maracas 214 ZOOM MRS 1608 Drum Loops z o Name Comments Appendix Ry 01 1A Drum loop 1 Ry 01 1B Drum loop 2 Ry 01 1C Drum fill 1 Ry 01 1D Drum variation 1 Ry 01 1E Drum fill 2 Ry 01 1F Drum variation 2 Ry 01 1G Drum end Ry 01 2A Drum intro ojo O N Ry 01 2B Drum loop 1 o Ry 01 2C Drum loop 2 Ry 01 2D Drum break Ry 01 2E Drum variation 1 Ry 01 2F Drum fill A Ry 01 2G Drum variation 2 Beats Variation k a Ry 02 1A Drum loop 1 o Ry 02 1B Drum loop 2 Breakbeats A Ry 03 1A Drum loop 1 E 03 1 Drum loop 2 Ry 03 1C Drum loop 3 Ry 03 1D Drum loop 4 N 03 1 Drum loop 5 Latin Loops N Ry 04 1A Percussion loop 1 Ry 04 1B Percussion loop 2 A Ry 04 1C Percussion loop 3 Ry 04 1D Percussion loop 4 o Ry 04 2A Percussion loop 1 N 04 2 Percussion loop 2 04 2 Percussion loop 3 Ry 04 2D Percussion loop 4 o Ry 04 3A Percussion
312. panel INPUT 1 8 jacks HINT You can use either GUITAR BASS INPUT jack 1 or INPUT jack 1 and either GUITAR BASS INPUT jack 2 or INPUT jack 2 If both jacks are connected the GUITAR BASS INPUT jacks 1 2 are given priority 2 From the main screen press the input 1 ON OFF key so that the key lights up in red ON OFF ON OFF The ON OFF keys 1 8 in the input section control the status of inputs 1 8 When a key is lit the corresponding input is turned on HINT To record the output of a synthesizer or other stereo component in stereo connect the L and R output to a pair of odd even numbered INPUT jacks and press the corresponding ON OFF keys so that both keys are lit 3 While playing the instrument use the GUITAR BASS INPUT control 1 to adjust sensitivity When the instrument is connected to GUITAR BASS INPUT 1 2 use the IGUITAR BASS INPUT control 1 2 When the instrument is connected to INPUT 1 8 use the INPUT control 1 8 to adjust the input sensitivity Adjust the control so that the PEAK indicator in the input 24 ZOOaM MRS 1608 section lights up occasionally when you play the instrument at the loudest level When using the GUITAR BASS INPUT jack GUITAR GUITAR BASS BASS INPUT 1 INPUT 2 Front panel When using the INPUT jack oi May flash briefly 4 while playing the instrument use the REC LEVEL control to
313. plains how to play rhythm patterns how to change the tempo and how to change the drum kit or bass program Selecting a rhythm pattern This section explains how to select and play one of the 511 rhythm patterns 1 From the main screen press the PATTERN key in the rhythm section so that the key lights up The rhythm pattern selection screen appears In this condition the following information is displayed Number of measures in rhythm pattern Rhythm pattern number N A 7 Rhythm pattern name Current pad bank or octave HINT When you press the PATTERN key from the main screen the RHYTHM key in the display section flashes This indicates that the rhythm section is synchronized with the recorder The right side of the display shows the pad bank combination of drum sounds playable with the pads or octave bass program register 2 Turn the dial to select the rhythm pattern that you want to play In the default condition of a project patterns are programmed in rhythm pattern numbers 000 472 509 510 3 Press the PLAY gt key The selected rhythm pattern will begin playing repeatedly If you press the PLAY P key while the RHYTHM key is flashing the recorder also starts to run when you start playback of the rhythm pattern 4 To mute the performance of the drum track or bass track repeatedly press the respective
314. ple where xxx is the sample number NOTE Imported audio files are always played with a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz If resampling was turned off during the import process a file with a different sampling frequency will play back with a different pitch and tempo Reference Pad Sampler Setting various sample parameters Samples imported into the sample pool have parameters such as playback range and sample name that can be set 1 From the main screen press the RHYTHM key in the display section The key lights up and the rhythm section can be used independently 2 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The rhythm utility menu for making various rhythm section settings appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY SAMPLE on the display and press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the sample appears on the display SAMPLE Sample name Sample number 4 Turn the dial to select the sample whose parameters you want to adjust When you press the PLAY gt key the currently displayed sample is played When the sample number is empty the indication EMPTY is shown in the sample name field D Press the EDIT key A parameter of the selected sample is displayed SAMPLER TART Ha MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER B BB Use the cursor up down keys to call up the parameter that you want to a
315. plied AC Warning adapter To prevent malfunction and safety hazards do not use any other kind of AC adapter When using the MRS 1608 in an area with a different line voltage please consult your local ZOOM distributor about acquiring a proper AC adapter About grounding Depending on installation conditions a slight Warming electrical charge may be felt when touching a metal part of the MRS 1608 If you wish to avoid this ground the unit by connecting the ground screw on the rear panel to a good external ground To prevent the risk of accidents never use one of the following for grounding Water pipe risk of electric shock Gas pipe risk of explosion Telephone wiring ground or lightning arrestor risk of lightning stroke Environment Avoid using your MRS 1608 in environments where Caution it will be exposed to Extreme temperature High humidity moisture or splashing water Excessive dust or sand Excessive vibration or shock Handling Never place objects filled with liquids such as vases Warning on the MRS 1608 since this can cause electric shock The MRS 1608 is a precision instrument Do not Caution exert undue pressure on the keys and other controls Also take care not to drop the unit and do not subject it to shock or excessive pressure Alterations Never open the case of the MRS 1608 or attempt to Caution modify the product in any way since this can result in damage
316. power 19 Turning power off shutdown 19 Listening to a Demo Song 20 Selecting the demo song 20 Playing the demo song 20 Let s Record 21 QUICK 22 Step 1 lt 22 1 1 Creating a new project 22 1 2 Selecting the rhythm pattern to use 23 Step 2 Recording the first track 24 2 1 Adjusting input sensitivity 24 2 2 Applying the insert 25 2 3 Selecting a track and recording 26 Step 3 Overdubbing 28 3 1 Making settings for input sensitivity and insert effect zu osipi ante Pace be edet 28 3 2 Selecting a track and recording 28 Step 4 Mixing 29 4 1 Turning off the input and rhythm section 29 4 2 Adjusting volume panning and EQ 29 4 3 Applying the send return effect 31 4 4 Applying the insert effect to a track 32 Step 5 Mixdown 33 5 1 Using the mastering insert effect 33 5 2 Mixdown on the master track 34 Reference Recorder 35 Vetakes en cies reu 35 About 35 Switching 35 Assign
317. ppendix of this manual 7 e Totoggle the effect module or off bring up the indication for the module on the display and then press the ENTER key When the effect module is turned off the indication OFF is shown on the second line of the display Pressing the same key once more returns the module to the active condition FLAHGER an FF HINT In the 8xCOMP EQ algorithm the effects in the respective channels cannot be switched on or off together in a single step However when the setting for the respective effect is shown simply pressing the ENTER key will toggle the effect between on and off NOTE The modules included in TOTAL cannot be turned off 8 Repeat steps 3 7 as necessary to edit other modules 9 To adjust the patch level the final volume of the patch press the TOTAL key use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication TOTAL LVL and turn the dial The patch level can be adjusted in the range from 1 to 30 10 When you have finished editing press the EXIT key The insert effect patch select screen appears again NOTE Keep in mind that if you select another patch without first storing the edited patch the changes will be lost To keep the results of your editing session refer to the following section 144 ZOOM MRS 1608 Storing swapping insert effect patches A patch that you have edited can be st
318. ps fast phrases tight WarmyDly Simulates warm analog delay E N EnhanCho Enhancer using phase shift doubling E Detune For instruments with strong harmonics such as electronic piano or synthesizer A Natural Chorus with low modulation for backing E Whole 4 4 x whole note delay in sync with rhythm tempo E Delay2 3 Half triplet note delay in sync with rhythm tempo N Delay1 4 16th note delay in sync with rhythm tempo EMPTY REVERB 2 1 o Comment TightHal Hall reverb with a hard tonal quality BrgtRoom Room reverb with a hard tonal quality SoftHall Hall reverb with a mild tonal quality LargeHal Simulates the reverberation of a large hall SmallHal Simulates the reverberation of a small hall LiveHous Simulates the reverberation of a club TrStudio Simulates the reverberation of a rehearsal studio DarkRoom Room reverb with a mild tonal quality VcxRev Tuned to enhance vocals Tunnel Simulates the reverberation of a tunnel BigRoom Simulates the reverberation of a gym PowerSt Gate reverb BritHall Simulates the bright reverb of a concert hall E N E BudoKan Simulates the reverberation at Budokan in Tokyo Ballade For slow ballads SecBrass Reverb for brass section ShortPla Short reverb A E E o N RealPlat Spring reve
319. q in step 2 you can check the bass track level on the level meter in the display By using the cursor left right keys during recording you can call up and edit the parameter values set in steps 2 5 If you press the BYPASS key the pitch compensation effect is bypassed This will also be reflected in the recording HINT The manual and automatic punch in punch out functions can also be used at this point 7 When recording has progressed to the point where you want pitch compensation to stop press the STOP W key The indication PitchFix SURE appears on the display 8 To carry out pitch compensation press the ENTER key The audio data of the specified range are overwritten and the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Reference Track Editing Generating a 3 part harmony from a specified range of audio data You can use chord information programmed in the rhythm pattern rhythm song to shift the pitch of the audio data and create a 3 part harmony chord root third fifth Whether the rhythm pattern or rhythm song is used as source of chord information depends on the mode selected for the rhythm section rhythm pattern mode or rhythm section mode The pitch shifted audio data can be either added to the source material or written to another track V take For example when G Major
320. r mic connected to an INPUT jack is not available When instruments mics are connected to jacks with the same number on both the front panel and rear panel INPUT 1 and GUITAR BASS INPUT 1 or INPUT 2 and GUITAR BASS INPUT 2 the front panel jack has priority The recorded sound is distorted e Check whether the input sensitivity setting INPUT and GUITAR BASS INPUT controls and recording level setting LEVEL control are appropriate Lower the fader so that the 0 dB dot of the level meter does not light If the EQ gain of the track mixer is set extremely high the sound may be audibly distorted even if the fader is lowered Set the EQ to an appropriate value When the insert effect is applied to the input check whether the effect output level patch level setting is appropriate 188 ZOOM MRS 1608 Problems with effects Insert effect cannot be inserted When the 8x COMP EQ algorithm is selected the selection of insert points is limited p 140 Insert effect does not apply e Make sure that the BYPASS TUNER key is out Make sure that the insert effect is sent to the desired location p 140 Send return effect does not apply e Make sure that the CHORUS DELAY or REVERB key is lit If it is out press the key several times to make it light Make sure that the send level for each track is raised p 80 Problems with the rhythm section Cannot hear
321. ram in the current project to an unused program number as follows HINT If all program numbers are used up the indication PRG FULL appears and the copy process cannot be carried out Delete unneeded sampler programs before proceeding 1 Fromthe main screen press the RHYTHM key so that the key lights up 2 Press the DRUM and BASS keys in the rhythm section simultaneously Both keys light up In this condition the pad sampler can be used 3 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The display changes as follows IITTI TTLI ii LLL OP OY D pm UL Pp 4 Verify that the indication UTILITY SPL PRG is shown and press the ENTER key The sampler program menu appears ZOOM MRS 1608 131 Reference Pad Sampler SPL PRG SELECT 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SPL PRG COPY on the display and press the ENTER key The sampler program that will be used as copy source appears on the display COPY SPL PRG PRG Copy source program number Copy source program name Turn the dial to select the desired sampler program and press the ENTER key The sampler program that will be used as copy destination appears on the display PRG COPY PRG 1 COPY TO Copy destination program number 7 e Turn the dial to select the sampler program to be used as copy destination and press the ENTER key The indication PRG C
322. rb simulation Dome Reverb of a Domed stadium E E VinSprin Simulates analog spring reverb ClearSpr Clear reverb with short reverb time N Dokan Simulates the reverberation of a clay pipe EMPTY ZOOM MRS 1608 208 Appendix Rhythm Pattern In Song columns No 35 234 normal patterns and fill in ones are gathered up on a style basis to ease rhythm song programming RnBs2VB RnBs2Vb RnBs2FB MTNs1VA MTNs1Va MTNs1FA MTNs1VB MTNs1Vb MTNs1FB FUNKs1VA FUNKs1Va FUNKs1FA FUNKs1VB FUNKs1Vb FUNKs1FB FUNKs2VA FUNKs2Va FUNKs2FA FUNKs2VB FUNKs2Vb FUNKs2FB HIPs1VA HIPs1Va HIPs1FA HIPs1VB HIPs1Vb HIPs1FB HIPs1VC HIPs1Vc HIPs1VD HIPs1Vd HIPs2VA HIPs2Va HIPs2VB HIPs2Vb HIPs2FB HIPs2VC HIPs2Vc HIPs2VD DANCs1VA DANCs1FA DANCs1VB DANCs1FB DANCs2VA DANCs2Va DANCs2FA DANCs2VB DANCs2Vb DANCs2FB HOUSs1VA HOUSs1FA HOUSs1VB HOUSs1FB TECHs1VA TECHs1FA TECHs1VB TECHs1FB Name Measure ROCKs4FA Variation ROCKs4VB 08Beat01 ROCKs4Vb 08Beat02 ROCKs4FB 08Beat03 HRKs1VA 08Beat04 HRKs1FA 08Beat05 HRKs1VB 08Beat06 HRKs1FB 08Beat07 HRKs2VA 08Beat08 HRKs2Va 08Beat09 HRKs2FA 08Beat10 HRKs2VB 08Beat11 HRKs2Vb 08Beat12 HRKs2FB 16Beat01 MTLs1VA 16Beat02 MTLs1FA 16Beat03 MTLs1VB 16Beat04 MTLs1FB 16Beat05 FUSs1VA 16Beat06 FUSs1Va 16Beat07 FUSs1FA 16Beat08 FUSs1VB 16Beat09 FUSs1Vb 16Beat10 FUSs1FB 16Beat11 FUSs2VA 16Beat12 FUSs2Va 16FUSO01 FUSs2FA 1
323. re shown on the display LOAD PRET t Project name FREI Project number to be assigned HINT When being restored to the MRS 1608 an empty project number is automatically assigned to the project Even if a project with the same name already exists on the hard disk it will not be overwritten check the name of the folder from which the project will be read press the cursor down key The second line of the display shows the folder name Press the cursor up key to restore the original display 7 Turn the dial to select the project to load and press the ENTER key The indication LOAD SURE appears on the display 8 To execute the load operation press the ENTER key To cancel press the EXIT key instead When you press the ENTER key the indication Wait appears on the display When the operation is finished the display indication changes to LOAD COMPLETE and the CD R RW disc is ejected If the backup spans multiple discs the CD R RW disc will be automatically ejected after the data have been loaded and the display indication changes as follows CHANGE nIscasz When this message is shown insert the next CD R RW disc and press the ENTER key The load operation resumes Repeat this operation until the last disc of the project has been read NOTE If the backup of the project spans multiple discs be sure to insert the discs in the correct order Otherw
324. ress the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows Turn the dial to set the volume 0 15 VOLLIME 18 Value of pre count volume 5 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the main screen If you initiate the recording procedure in this condition the selected number of pre count beats will be heard at the selected volume ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Track Editing This section explains how to edit audio data contained on tracks 1 16 of the recorder section There are two major types of editing functions specifying a range within a track for editing and editing an entire V take Editing a range of data The procedure for specifying a range within a track and then performing an editing action is explained below Basic steps for range editing When performing editing for a specified range of data some steps are similar for each action These are as follows 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Press the ENTER key The track edit menu containing various editing commands appears on the display 3 Use the cursor left right keys to select the desired command from the following options e COPY Copy a specified range of audio data MOVE Move a specified range of audio data e ERASE Erase a specified range of audio data
325. revious state 7 Recorded data Capture Recorder Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Captured data of track 1 Capture operation for track 1 Swap Recorded data Track 1 x Recorder Track 2 Track 3 Captured data of track 1 Swap operation for track 1 Recorder Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Captured data of ERE track 1 NOTE Capture is performed on a track by track basis Captured track data will be erased from the hard disk when another project is loaded or when the power is turned off Reference Track Editing Capturing a track You can capture the audio data of any specified track 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY CAP SWAP on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows CAPTURE TR1 3 Use the status keys or the dial to select the track to capture The status key for the currently selected track is lit in orange It is also possible to select the master track In this case the indication shows MASTER and the MASTER status key is lit HINT Atrack for which an unrecorded V take is selected cannot be captured 4 Press the ENTER key The indication CAPTURE SURE appears on
326. rn before the current pattern has finished playing 7 To finalize the setting press the ENTER key The rhythm pattern information will be input at the current location and the display reverts to the original screen The EOS indication is moved back by the number of measures that were inserted By pressing the PLAY key while this display is shown you can check the rhythm pattern entered at the current point MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER aad 1 8 Current position measure 1 number 2 3 Song PATTERN 002 End of Song 8 Repeatedly press the cursor right key to move to the measure number for which EOS is shown During step input you can use the cursor left right keys to move the input position in measure units When you reach the end of the song the indication EOS is shown on the second line of the display Reference Rhythm PTH EOS Ms MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER B Current position measure 1 number 2 3 Song PATTERN 002 End of Song HINT e The REW 44 and FF gt gt keys in the transport section can be used to move the current position in beat units e When is shown on the display turning the dial moves the current position in sixteenth note units By bringing up the indication to move to a point within a measure and then using the cursor up down keys to display event information you can enter event information in sixteenth note un
327. rogram The sampler program contains information about assigning samples to pads as well as information about level pan pitch and other parameters In the MRS 1608 you can create up to 10 sampler programs per project The created sampler programs are stored as part of a project Sample pool Audio file Sample pool Project Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sample Sampler programs The pad sampler can also be played by a drum sequence instead of the pads However while the pad sampler is being used the drum and bass program are unavailable The output signal of the pad sampler is sent to the DRUM fader of the mixer Like a regular drum track it can be controlled by the status key and fader and track parameters can be used to modify the signal Rhythm section DRUM Drum sequence 9 4 Pad sampler Audio signal Sample Sample Track V Take Sample CD ROM R RW Sample Sample Sample Projects ZOOM MRS 1608 121 Reference Pad Sampler Material that can be imported into the sample pool The following types of audio material can be imported into the sample pool 1 Any audio track f
328. rom the currently loaded project You can select any track V take from the currently loaded project and specify a range for use as a sample 2 Audio file stored on CD ROM R RW disc A stereo or mono audio file sampling frequency 8 48 kHz 8 bit or 16 bit WAV AIFF file stored on a CD ROM R RW disc can be used as a sample NOTE All audio files will be played at a sampling frequency of 44 1 kHz When using an audio file that was recorded with a different sampling frequency convert it to 44 1 kHz during importing as required Discs not compliant with the ISO 9660 Level 2 standard cannot be used CD R RW discs with unfinalized sessions cannot be used Importing a sample This section explains how to import samples into the sample pool Basic steps for sample importing When acquiring samples for use with the pad sampler some steps are similar for each source 1 Fromthe main Screen press the RHYTHM key in the display section The key lights up and the rhythm section can be used independently 2 Pressthe UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The rhythm utility menu for making various rhythm section settings appears 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY SAMPLE on the display and press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the sample appears on the display SAMPLE SAMPLER Sample name Ha El Sample number 4 Turnthe dial to s
329. s ensemble HevyDrum For hard rock drums EMPTY ZOOM MRS 1608 205 Appendix 8x COMP EQ algorithm Comment Recommended input 1 8 Guitar amp Bass amp Vocal For vocal band For vocal band Chorus Drum Keyboard Guitar amp Bass amp For jazz or fusion band Piano Drum Keyboard Acoustic bass Piano Vocal AcoBand For acoustic band Chorus Acoustic guitar Percussion Guitar Bass Keyboard Vocal 1ManBand For private recording studio Chorus Sequence Bass drum StdDrum Standard sound for recording each sound of drum kit Snare drum Hi hat High tom Mid tom EhcdDrum Punchy compression drum sound Low tom VtgDrum 1970s drum sound with enhanced hi hat Overhead mic Various percussion Cymbal bell Headed percussion Percus Suitable for recording individual percussion sound Overall percussion CompLtr Versatile mellow sound Female vocal Male vocal A Capla For a cappella group Vocal duo Overall vocal lalol ni a N 1 l o 4 Ni ZOOM MRS 1608 206 MASTERING algorithm z Comment Appendix PlusAlfa Enhances the overall power All Pops Conventional mastering StWide wide range mastering DiscoMst For club sound
330. s follows s MEASURE BEAT 213 4 58 he 7 Specify the copy destination start point in the same way as for the copy source and press the ENTER key The indication COPY SURE appears on the display 8 To execute the copy operation press the ENTER key When the copy operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time HINT To paste the same range repeatedly use the phrase loop function p 67 Moving a specified range of data You can move the audio data of a specified range to a specified position on a specified track V take This action will overwrite the existing data at the destination location The move source data will be erased Move source track 7777 Move d Y Move target track 1 Reter to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing to select the move source track V take and press the ENTER key The display indication changes to Move Src START Move Sro TART M MEASURE BEAT TICK Reference Track Editing 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the move start point Press the ENTER key The display indication changes to Move Src END 4 Use the same procedure as in step 2 to specif
331. s on the display 5 To carry out the import process press the ENTER key patches or the specified patch of the selected project will be imported When all patches have been imported the insert effect or send return effect selection screen appears again If a single patch was imported the screen of step 3 appears again By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 150 ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Creating CD This section describes how to use the CD R RW drive in the MRS 1608 to create an audio CD or store a project from the hard disk onto a CD R RW disc NOTE This section does not apply to MRS 1608 models without integrated CD R RW drive Mixed mode CDs or copy controlled CDs cannot be played or read About creating an audio CD The MRS 1608 lets you write the contents of the master track of any project to a CD R RW disc in CD DA audio data format The result is an audio CD that can be played in a CD player There are two ways of writing audio data on a CD R RW disc as described below Writing by project This method writes the master track of a single project to the disc When using this method it is possible to add audio data later until the CD R RW disc has been finalized Writing by album This method involves first creating a list for the audio CD called an album which contains information about master
332. s recommended to regularly back up data from the hard disk onto CD R RW discs 1 Refer to steps 1 3 of Basic maintenance procedure to bring up the indication ScanDisk on the display Then press the ENTER key The ScanDisk menu for selecting the testing method appears 184 ZOOM MRS 1608 2 Use the cursor left right keys to select the ScanDisk function AutoRepr Auto Repair This function tests all files on the hard disk and automatically repairs damaged files ChekFile Check File This function only tests all files but does not automatically repair them If a problem is found a message is displayed on the screen 3 To execute the selected function press the ENTER key ScanDisk starts By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and return to the condition of step 1 NOTE Once ScanDisk has started it cannot be interrupted by the user Never turn power to the unit off while ScanDisk is running Otherwise the hard disk may be destroyed 4 When ScanDisk is completed press the EXIT key The unit returns to the condition of step 1 Returning system file data to factory default Factory Initialize This action restores only the system files and other data necessary for operation of the MRS 1608 Projects created by the user are not affected by this operation Try this procedure if operation of the MRS 1608 is still unstable after runnin
333. s ten switchable virtual tracks called V takes For each track one V take can be selected for recording playback Currently selected V take 9 0 SS 1234567 89 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Tracks Master track The recorder section also provides a set of stereo tracks which are separate from the normal record play tracks 1 16 This is called the master track The master track is dedicated for mixdown and for holding the material used to create an audio CD Rhythm section The MRS 1608 contains a rhythm section that operates in sync with the recorder It offers 511 accompaniment patterns called rhythm patterns that use the internal drum bass sound generator Over 400 patterns are preprogrammed at the factory You can use these patterns as they are modify them in part or create entirely new patterns from scratch HINT The drum bass sound sources can be played with the pads on the top panel or with a MIDI keyboard or similar Recorder Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 Rhythm section Bass sound y To BASS Rhythm Rhythm al rader ormer pattern pattern pattern Hg To DRUM EXE fader of mixer Drum sound You can arrange rhythm patterns in the desired order of playback and program chords and tempo to create the rhythm accompaniment for an entire song This is called a rhythm song Up to 10 rhythm songs can be created among wh
334. s the ENTER key twice When you press the key once the indication CD Trkxx WRITE appears and when you press the key the second time the indication changes to CD Trkxx SURE where xx is the track number When adding to a CD R RW disc this indication lets you check which track of the project will be written 152 ZOOM MRS 1608 CD Trk amp H SURE MEASURE BE B asr 328 8 To carry out the write process press the ENTER key once more By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time During the write process the indication wait is shown on the display The counter indicates the progress status of the write process When writing is complete the display shows CD Trkxx COMPLETE where xx is the track number 9 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times By repeating steps 2 8 you can add audio data to the disc HINT When adding tracks a blank of 2 seconds will automatically be inserted between tracks on the disc e As long as the finalizing operation has not been performed the CD R RW disc cannot be played on an ordinary CD player For information on how to play an unfinalized CD R RW disc on the MRS 1608 refer to page 157 Creating an audio CD by album This method involves creating a list for the audio CD called an album which combines multiple projects saved on the
335. se within a project is called a drum sound set A drum sound set contains over 80 drum percussion sounds and 15 17 drum kits From such a drum sound set you may also select desired sounds and create your own drum kits You can select one of these drum kits and play it manually with the pads on the top panel or you can use it as a sound source for rhythm accompaniment Drum kit example 8 9 X E CRASH EXTRA CYMBAL EXTRA 1 EXTRA 2 4 T 3 TOM 1 RIDE 0 1 2 3 KICK SNARE CLOSED HAT OPEN HAT A bass program is a single bass sound such as an electric bass or acoustic bass which can be played as a scale with the pads on the top panel The MRS 1608 has 13 bass ZOOM MRS 1608 programs You can choose one of these and play a scale with the pads or use it as a sound source for rhythm accompaniment Bass program example 0 1 KICK SNARE The output signal from the drum kit stereo and the output signal from the bass program mono are sent to the corresponding fader of the internal mixer where you can independently adjust the volume panning balance EQ and other parameters and apply send return effects Wm Bass program Drum kit DRUMBASS 1 2 3 Rhythm section E omm aT Mixer section NOTE While using the pad sampler p 121 the drum kit bass program sound is not available 87 Reference Rhyt
336. sed program number as described below 1 From the main screen press the RHYTHM key in the display section The key lights up and the rhythm section can be used independently Depending on the current operation status of the rhythm section the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection screen appears 2 Press the DRUM key and BASS key in the rhythm section simultaneously Both keys light up and the pad sampler can be used 3 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The rhythm utility menu appears UTILITY SPL PRG 4 Verify that the indication UTILITY SPL PRG is shown and press the ENTER key The sampler program menu for various sampler program functions appears RG SFL SELECT HINT The sampler program menu only appears when the pad sampler can be used 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication SPL PRG NEW on the display and press the ENTER key The indication PRG NEW SURE appears 6 To create a new program press the ENTER key When the sampler program has been created the unit returns to the rhythm pattern or rhythm song selection 128 ZOOM MRS 1608 screen To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Assigning samples to pads To assign samples to pads for the sampler program proceed as follows
337. segment indicates the currently selected V take for each track Lit recorded V take Flashing currently selected V take Out unrecorded V take track HINT You can also select the track with the status keys For stereo tracks 9 10 15 16 each push of the status key toggles between the odd and even numbered track Pressing the MASTER status key selects the master track 3 Turn the dial to select the V take For stereo tracks you can select a different V take for the odd and even numbered track 4 Repeat steps 2 3 as necessary to select a V take for each track 5 return to the main Screen press the EXIT key The V TAKE key goes out ZOOM MRS 1608 35 Reference Recorder Assigning V take names A V take that has been recorded will be automatically assigned a default name according to the following pattern xx denotes the track number and yy the V take number GTRxx yy V take recorded through CLEAN DIST or ACO BASS SIM algorithm of insert effect BASxx yy V take recorded through BASS algorithm of insert effect MICxx yy V take recorded through MIC algorithm of insert effect DULxx yy V take recorded through DUAL MIC algorithm of insert effect LINxx yy V take recorded through LINE algorithm of insert effect 8INxx yy V take recorded through 8x COMP EQ algorithm of insert effect MASxx yy V take recorded through MASTERING algorithm of insert effect BYPxx
338. select the track and use the cursor up down keys to select the V take number When track 16 is selected turning the dial further to the right selects tracks in odd numbered even numbered pairs or the master track Pressing two status keys for odd even numbered tracks together selects the tracks as two mono tracks When a stereo track two mono tracks or the master track is selected the phrase can be imported in stereo HINT By repeatedly pressing the status key of a stereo track you can select the odd numbered track even numbered track and stereo track 3 Press the ENTER key The display indication changes to ImprtSrc START In this condition you can specify the start point for the data range to be imported Ms MEASURE 4 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the start point Reference Phrase Looping By moving the flashing section to the MEASURE BEAT TICK or MARKER field on the display you can specify the point as a measure beat tick or as a mark number HINT By holding down the STOP W key and pressing the PLAY gt key you can perform scrub playback of the V take of the specified track p 38 The playback range of the phrase loop can be fine tuned also after importing Therefore it is best to choose a somewhat wider range here f you specify a point where there are no audio
339. sert effect 5 Press one of the ALGORITHM keys in the effect section to select the desired algorithm and then use the PATCH SELECT AT V keys or the dial to select the patch to be used IHSEET While playing your instrument adjust the recording level by turning the REC LEVEL control The REC LEVEL control adjusts the signal level before it is sent to the recording track i e after it has passed through the insert effect The CLIP indicator will light if the level is too high Set the recording level as high as possible but avoid settings that cause the CLIP indicator to light HINT The level of the signal sent to the recording track will change according to the settings of the insert effect parameters If you Switch insert effect patches or edit the parameters you should once again check whether the recording level is appropriate The precise value of the REC LEVEL control parameter can be checked by pressing any key in the track parameter section and then pressing the cursor down key so that the value of REC LVL is shown 7 Repeatedly press the status key for the recording destination track until the key is lit in red The input signal from the input mixer will be sent to the recording track You can select record mode for up to two mono tracks 1 8 or one stereo track 9 10 15 16 When selecting two mono tracks only odd even pairs can be selected 1 2
340. setting for real time input If you change one setting the other will also change 6 Toentera note hit the pad corresponding to the note and then press the STEP key The note is recorded and the unit advances by one step corresponding to the quantize value set in step 5 Before hitting the pad you can also use the BANK OCTAVE key to switch the pad bank for a different sound Ms MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER 0012 Theintensity with which you hit the pad is also recorded the drum sequence f you hit several pads during input multiple sounds will be recorded at the same position 7 Toentera rest press only the STEP key If you press the STEP key by itself the position advances by one step duration of quantize value but no play information is recorded Drum sequence step input Quantize quarter note Y Quantize sixteenth note 2L H ZOOM MRS 1608 97 Reference Rhythm MEASURE BEAT 8 Repeat steps 6 7 while changing the step length as necessary to enter the desired rhythm pattern When you reach the end of the pattern the unit automatically returns to the first measure letting you enter more instrument sounds When you use the STEP key to move step by step through a recorded rhythm pattern the pad recorded at the respective position lights up 9 To erase an entered note repeatedly press the STEP
341. sing the option board UIB 02 it is possible to directly import SMFs from a computer into a project To do this the SMF must be copied to the PROJxxx folder where xxx is the project number ZOOM MRS 1608 174 Selecting the SMF output destination When playing an SMF you can select whether to send the entire playing information to an external sound source or to play certain channels with the internal sound sources of the MRS 1608 The SMF output destination is specified using the following two parameters SMF ChToDrum Selects which MIDI channel 1 16 of the SMF playing information is directed to the internal drum kit of the MRS 1608 Information for the channel selected here will not be present at the MIDI OUT connector When this parameter is set to OFF no playing information is sent to the drum kit SMF ChToBass Selects which MIDI channel 1 16 of the SMF playing information is directed to the internal bass program of the MRS 1608 Information for the channel selected here will not be present at the MIDI OUT connector When this parameter is set to OFF no playing information is sent to the bass program The diagram below shows a setting example for using the MRS 1608 as an SMF player and using external sound sources In this example the SMF playing information is sent only to the MIDI OUT connector SMF CHi1 16 MIDI OUT Rhythm son Internal 3 I
342. specific track input to an external effect HINT For the audio tracks and drum bass track the signal immediately before the fader is sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack e For inputs 1 8 the signal after the REC LEVEL control is sent to the STEREO SUB OUT jack 1 Connect a monitor system or external effect to the STEREO SUB OUT jack Use the STEREO SUB OUT control to adjust the signal at the STEREO SUB OUT jack to a suitable level HINT For connection to a system with stereo inputs use a Y cable stereo plug x 1 mono plug x 2 If you connect the two mono plugs of the Y cable to separate effects the STEREO SUB OUT jack functions as two AUX OUT jacks In this case you can set the panning value of the signal sent from the track input to the STEREO SUB OUT jack fully to L or R to select the send target 2 Press the MASTER status key and then the SUB OUT SEND key in the track parameter section The indication MASTER SUB SEND appears on the display In the default condition of a project the master track SUB OUT SEND ON OFF parameter is ON so that the STEREO SUB OUT jack carries the same signal as the MASTER OUTPUT jacks In this condition the signal from other tracks or inputs cannot be sent directly to the STEREO SUB OUT jack 82 ZOOM MRS 1608 MASTER SUE SEHD OM While the SUB OUT SEND ON OFF parameter of the master track is ON the indication xxx SUB SEND MASTER where xxx
343. specified for the rhythm song are different the bass sequence phrase will be transposed according to the root input for the rhythm song If the original chord type of the rhythm pattern and the chord type specified for the rhythm song are different the bass sequence phrase will be converted according to the chord type input for the rhythm song Depending on the phrase there may be no change l Verify that the SONG key and RHYTHM key are lit If a key is not lit press it so that it lights up Use the ZERO M4 key to align the current position with the beginning of the rhythm song 2 Press the REC 0 key The REC key lights up and rhythm song step input becomes possible 3 Use the cursor up down keys to bring up the indication ROOT on the first line of the display At a point where rhythm pattern information is already input the chord information root E chord type no conversion is automatically assigned MEASURE BEAT TICK B MARKER i EXE Chord root Chord type 4 Turn the dial to specify the note name C B that will be the root of the chord The following screen shows an example of changing the chord root to A ROOT A 5 To specify the chord type press the cursor down key once to bring up the indication CHORD on the first line of the display 6 Turn the dial to select the chord type You can choose from the followin
344. split into multiple tracks and set marks at the points where the tracks should be separated Marker based track separation can only be enabled or disabled for the entire project Delete any unnecessary marks beforehand 2 Perform steps 1 6 of Creating an audio CD by album select the disc at once DAO write method and bring up the album screen OF ALBUM B Track 1 MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER 3 Use the cursor left right keys and the dial to register projects for the album 4 Use the cursor left right keys to select a project that is to be divided into multiple tracks 5 Press the MARK key in the control section Marks contained in this project will be used as PQ subcodes The indication PQ and a marker icon appear in the MARKER field on the display By pressing the ZOOM MRS 1608 155 Reference Creating a CD MARK key again you can return to the previous condition The marker enable disable selection can be made at any time while the album screen is shown If the mark function is enabled for the project registered as track 1 of the audio CD the following indication appears Track 1 MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER ae When you divide a project the number of tracks on the album will increase and tracks corresponding to subsequent projects will be renumbered For example four marks are set for the project the tracks on the audio CD will be allocated as f
345. ss the EXIT key several times NOTE If you record on the audio tracks while listening to the rhythm pattern and then later change the tempo the audio track content and the rhythm pattern will no longer be synchronized Be sure to decide on the tempo first Changing the drum kit bass program You can change the drum kit bass program used by the rhythm section Changing the drum kit 1 Press the DRUM key You can now use the pads to play a drum kit 2 To change the drum sound set press the RHYTHM key and then the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The rhythm utility menu appears UTILIT Souncdsel 3 Verify that the indication UTILITY SoundSel is shown on the display and then press the ENTER key The display changes as follows Souncdsel 5 TAMDARD Sound set name NOTE This screen will not appear when the pad sampler is being used 4 Turn the dial to select a drum sound set from the following choices then press the ENTER key Available drum sound sets are e STANDARD Dry drum and percussion sounds suitable for a variety of styles ANALOG Drum percussion sounds for hip hop techno house and other styles that use analog rhythm machines CLASSIC Drum percussion sounds in the style of ZOOM stand alone rhythm machines When you press the ENTER key the respective drum sound set is loaded and a screen for selecting a rhythm pattern or rhythm song appears D
346. ssages Turning Timing Clock messages on or off This setting specifies whether the MIDI synchronization message Timing Clock will be transmitted Refer to steps 1 4 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication MIDI CLOCK on the display and press the ENTER key Then turn the dial to select one of the following settings CLOCK OH ON Transmission Timing Clock information will be transmitted when the MRS 1608 is running default setting OFF Transmission off Timing Clock information will not be transmitted Timing Clock will be output according to the tempo of the rhythm pattern rhythm song that is playing In order for the external MIDI device to play back in synchronization at an appropriate tempo you will need to specify the tempo of the rhythm pattern rhythm song Also to synchronize the measure indication at the MRS 1608 and the MIDI device the time signature of the rhythm pattern rhythm song must be set NOTE Timing Clock information will be transmitted even if the drum bass tracks are muted DRUM BASS status keys are out HINT When using MIDI Timing Clock messages transmitted from the MRS 1608 to synchronize the operation of an external MIDI device you should also turn on transmission for Song Position Pointer and Start Stop Continue messages as well as Timing Clock When transmitting Timing Clock from the MRS 1608 it is recommended to turn the drum kit b
347. status key so that it goes out Reference Rhythm The corresponding track will be muted To defeat muting repeatedly press the same status key again until it is lit in green 5 To stop rhythm pattern playback press the STOP W key The PLAY We key goes out 6 To play the rhythm pattern by itself press the RHYTHM key in stop mode so that the key is lit The recorder section and rhythm section are disconnected 7 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times HINT During rhythm pattern playback it is also possible to play rhythm section sounds by hitting the pads Changing the tempo You can change the tempo of the rhythm pattern HINT The tempo set here applies to all rhythm patterns A rhythm song for which no tempo information is programmed also will use this tempo 1 Press the PATTERN key so that the key lights up The rhythm pattern selection screen appears HINT You can change the tempo in playback or stop mode 2 Press the TEMPO key The display indication changes as follows TEMPO EPM ZOOM MRS 1608 89 Reference Rhythm 3 Turn the dial to adjust the tempo The tempo can be adjusted over a range of 40 0 250 0 BPM 4 change the tempo manually hit the TEMPO key repeatedly at the desired tempo The average of the key press intervals is determined and set as the new tempo 5 To return to the main Screen pre
348. t Quantize quarter note Beat Duration half note 1 2 3 4 1 Pad 1 Pad Pad Pad 1 Atthe rhythm pattern screen select an empty rhythm pattern number 2 Press the BASS key and select a bass sequence Bass sequence step input Quantize quarter note Quantize 8th note Duration quarter note Duration 8th note Y Y Quantize quarter note Duration quarter note Quantize 8th note Duration 16th note Pad Pe we phe Eee ZOOM MRS 1608 3 As necessary press the BANK OCTAVE key to select the octave for step input When the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the previous screen 4 Press the REC 0 key The display indication changes as follows In this condition step input is possible Duration value Quantize value TOES E Measure Beat Tick MEASURE BE MARKER The first line of the display shows the quantize value and the second line the duration value 5 Use the cursor up down keys to select the quantize value The value selected here becomes the duration of 1 step Turn the dial to select the duration value as listed below The duration is specified as J x yy i e as multiples of a quarter note Depending on the value of the actual duration becomes as follows 1 8 quarter notex 1 8 3 2 dotted quarter note 3 4 dotted 8th
349. t effect E Step 3 Overdubbing Shows how to record further tracks while listening to a track already recorded overdubbing E Step 4 Mixing Shows how to adjust the level panning and EQ of each track apply the send return effect and mix the recorded tracks down to a pair of stereo tracks E Step 5 Mixdown Finally the completed stereo mix is recorded on the master track to create the finished song Step 1 Preparations 1 1 Creating a new project On the MRS 1608 song data are managed in units called projects To start recording with the MRS 1608 you must first create a project l Connect the instrument to record and the monitoring system to the MRS 1608 15 2 Turn power on in the order MRS 1608 monitoring system When the MRS 1608 starts up the last handled project is automatically loaded 3 Press the NEW PROJECT key in the control section When you press the NEW PROJECT key at the main screen the display indication changes as follows and a new project can be created J EEMU IE DE You can create a new project You can also assign a name to the project HINT When creating a new project the lowest free project number is automatically selected e t is also possible to create a new project from the project menu gt p 166 4 Press the ENTER key A new project is created and the main screen appears While this screen is display
350. t number and the indication BURNING Disc number AMEN aoe Project currently being saved When the backup is finished the display indication changes to ALL SAVE COMPLETE If the backup size is larger than the capacity of one CD R RW disc the disc will be ejected after it has been filled up and the display indication changes as follows Number of project that has been only partly backed up The right side of the display shows the number of the project that has been only partly backed up Insert the next CD R RW disc and press the ENTER key The backup operation resumes If more than two discs are required the above steps will be repeated NOTE When a full backup spans several discs restoring a single project requires you to first insert the disc on which it is saved Be sure to note the disc number and the projects saved on the disc on the case and label of the disc HINT When the disc has been ejected it is possible to abort the backup operation To do this press the EXIT key while the indication CHANGE DISCxxx where xxx is the disc number is shown The indication will change to ALL SAVE CANCEL Press the ENTER key to terminate the process Reference Creating a CD 7 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key several times Loading a project from CD R RW disc To restore a project saved on CD R RW disc to the hard disk of the MRS 1608 proc
351. tain point PLAY gt key Starts playback from the beginning of the current project e STOP W key Interrupts project playback and returns to the start of the current project ZERO M4 key Returns to the project registered for playback position 1 e FF gt gt key Playback stops and the system jumps to the beginning of the next project REW lt lt key Playback stops and the system jumps to the beginning of the previous project When playback of the last project is completed the recorder stops 5 To return to the main Screen press the EXIT key several times Reference Other Functions Using the tuner function The MRS 1608 incorporates a versatile tuner that can also accommodate 7 string guitar and other unconventional tunings This section explains how to use the tuner function Using the chromatic tuner The chromatic tuner which can automatically detect pitch in semitone steps operates as follows 1 Connect the instrument that you want to tune to one of the INPUT jacks 1 8 or the GUITAR BASS INPUT jacks 1 2 2 From the main screen press the ON OFF key for the input to which the instrument is connected so that the key is lit in red HINT If two or more inputs are activated the respective input signals will be mixed and sent to the tuner You should set all inputs not required for tuning to OFF 3 Press the TUNER key in the effect section The insert effect and send ret
352. te SDHigh1 SDHigh2 SDBrush SDAnalgM SDAnalgS SDDgAnaS SDPower SDSnap1 SDSnap2 SDFunk1 SDFunk2 SDStndrd SDRegae TMLive1 TMLive2 TMLive3 TMDry1 TMDry2 Global High Q Sticks MtrClick MtrBell Tambrin Vibslap SDDryHi SDAnalgM SDAnalgS SDDgAnaM SDDgAnaS SDAttack SDPower SDRoom HiBongo LoBongo MtHiCong HiConga1 LoConga HiTimbal LoTimbal HiAgogo LoAgogo Cabasa Maracas Claves TMDry3 TM808_1 TM808_2 TM808_3 TMAco1 TMAco2 TMAco3 TMSynth TMPopHi TMPopHi2 TMPopMid TMPopLo2 CHH 14 CHH 14 2 OHHLive CHHClear OHHClear CHHAnalg CHHDgAna OHHAna FHHAco Gamelan TM808_1 TM808_2 TM808_3 TMGate1 TMGate2 TMGate3 TMElect1 TMElect2 TMElect3 TMSynth TMPopHi TMPopMid TMPopLo Odaiko ChuDaiko Oedo Temple Engine Sonar Minor Major CHHLive OHHLive CHHClear OHHClear CHHAnalg OHHAnalg CHHDgAna OHHDgAna FHHAco CYMCrsh1 CYMCrsh2 CYMCrsh3 CYMSpls1 CYMSpls2 CYMRide2 212 CYMCup1 ZOOM MRS 16
353. ted 11 Press the ENTER key The indication CREATE SURE appears on the display 12 To carry out the phrase loop writing process press the ENTER key once more The phrase loop is written When the process is completed the display reverts to the phrase screen By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time 13 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times 76 ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Mixer This section explains the functions and operation of the two mixer types built into the MRS 1608 About the mixer The mixer of the MRS 1608 is divided into two sections an input mixer that processes the input signals from the INPUT jacks and a track mixer that processes the signals from the audio tracks and the drum bass track of the recorder section Details of each mixer are described below Input mixer Adjusts the sensitivity for signals from the INPUT jacks and GUITAR BASS INPUT jacks and assigns these signals to the recorder tracks Recorder section INPUT jacks Track 1 pul 1 Track 2 2 Track 3 Ww Track 4 INPUT 2 Input mixer Track 5 REC LEVEL Track 6 Track 7 INPUT 3 Track 8 Tracks 9 10 Tracks 11 12 INPUT 8 Tracks 13 14 ST Tracks 15 16 The input mixer serves to adjust the following par
354. ted into one track is shown in hours h minutes m and seconds PRJ SIZ MB units This shows the size of the currently loaded project in MB megabyte units 75i TE PRJ SIZ h m units This shows the size of the currently loaded project converted into one track in hours h minutes m and seconds Reference Projects To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times NOTE These screens are for display only and contain no items that can be edited The remaining recordable time is an approximation Use it for general reference only Duplicating a project This operation copies a specified project that is saved on the hard disk 1 Refer to steps 1 2 of Basic procedure to bring up the indication PROJECT COPY on the display Then press the ENTER key The name and number of the project to copy is shown on the display PRJ COPY IB Project number 2 Turn the dial to select the copy source project and press the ENTER key The screen for selecting the copy destination project appears on the display FRI COPY FY TO d Copy destination project number 3 Turn the dial to select the copy destination project number and press the ENTER key The indication PRJ COPY SURE appears on the display 4 Press the ENTER key to copy the project When copying is co
355. the CD R RW key in the control section The CD R RW menu appears 4 Verify that CD R RW AUDIO CD is shown on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication AUDIO CD ALBUM on the display and press the ENTER key In this condition you can select the write method ALBUM Burn yee ZOOM MRS 1608 153 Reference Creating a CD Turn the dial to select disc at once or TAO track at once and press the ENTER key The screen for registering projects for the album appears Tesal e TL P MEASURE BEAT TICK MARKER The indication END OF ALBUM denotes the end of the album list of projects When the album display is first called up no project has been registered therefore the indication END OF ALBUM appears 7 Turnthe dial to select the project to be used as track 1 of the album The indication END OF ALBUM moves up to the next track track 2 in this example and the screen changes as follows Project number Project name Number and name of project to write as a track Track number Number of track to write on CD R RW disc 81 PROJET Track MEASURE BEAT TICK B V take duration Length of V take selected for master track of project in hours H minutes M seconds S and milliseconds MS Pressing th
356. the SUB OUT SEND key repeatedly so that the key goes out This is useful to temporarily take that track input out of the mix Pressing the key again turns it ON and restores the original condition 7 e Toreturn to the main screen press the EXIT key ZOOM MRS 1608 Reference Mixer Using the solo function If desired you can mute all other tracks except one during playback of the recorder section This is called the solo function It is convenient to fine tune the parameters for a certain track 1 From the main screen perform playback of the recorder section and press the SOLO key The key lights up NOTE Also when the SOLO key is lit the input signals are always mixed If necessary turn inputs off by pressing the respective ON OFF key 2 Press the status key except MASTER status key for the track that you want to monitor alone The status key lights up in green and only the corresponding track is heard You can use the fader of the track to adjust the volume HINT For stereo tracks both tracks are monitored While the SOLO key is lit two mono tracks that are stereo linked will be played individually 3 To cancel the solo function press the SOLO key once more The key goes out Saving recalling mixer settings scene function The current mixer and effect settings can be saved as a so called scene in a special area of memory and recalled either manually
357. the pad The setting range is 7 9 0 reference pitch 7 9 in steps of 0 1 1 10 of a semitone LEVEL Adjusts the output level for the pad The setting range is 0 15 HINT When you press the DRUM MIXER key at the drum kit selection screen you can use faders 1 8 and 9 10 15 16 to set the LEVEL parameter p 117 PAN Panning Adjusts the left right stereo position panning for the pad The setting range is L63 far left 0 center R63 far right HINT The panning value set here is valid regardless of the track parameter pan setting When you set the track parameter pan to left right the left right volume balance changes while the positioning of each pad is retained e GROUP Pad group Selects the type of sound produced when pads are hit in succession PL MN and the group to which the pad belongs 0 7 The setting range is PLO PL7 and MNO MN7 When PL is selected hitting same pad in succession will produce overlapping sound i e the previous sound continues while the next one starts When MN is selected the previous sound stops when the next one starts GROUP PL GROUP MN Reference Rhythm The numbers 0 7 specify the group to which the pad belongs 0 no group 1 7 respective group Pads in the same group cannot produce sound at the same time For example if you assign an open hi hat sound and closed hi hat sound to two pads in the same group the open h
358. the PLAY gt key while holding down the REC 0 key A pre count of four beats is heard and then rhythm pattern recording starts 7 e While listening to the metronome tap the pads Your performance of the pad sampler will be recorded as a drum sequence By pressing the REC key during recording you can pause the recording to rehearse and switch pad banks Press the REC key again to continue HINT Instead of tapping the pads you can also use a MIDI controller connected to the MRS 1608 s MIDI IN connector 8 To edit the recorded contents during real time input proceed as follows To erase the performance of a specific pad While holding down the DELETE ERASE key press the pad whose assigned sample sound you want to erase While you are holding down both keys the information for the corresponding pad is erased from the rhythm pattern To erase the performance of all pads While holding down the DELETE ERASE key press the DRUM status key While you are holding down both keys the performance of all pads is erased 9 When you have finished real time recording press the STOP W key The rhythm pattern stops 10 To play the resulting rhythm pattern press the ZERO M4 key to return to the beginning of the rhythm pattern and then press the PLAY gt key When the contents of the pattern are as desired press the STOP ll key to stop the rhythm pattern and then press the EXIT key se
359. the finish or damage the surface Backup The data of MRS 1608 can be lost because of malfunction or incorrect operation Backup your data Copyrights Except for personal use unauthorized recording from copyrighted sources CDs records tapes video clips broadcast material and so on is prohibited ZOOM Corporation does not bear any liability for injunctions regarding the copyright law infringement Please keep this manual in a convenient place for future reference ZOOM MRS 1608 USAGE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS MIDI is a registered trademark of Association of Musical Electronics Industry AMEI All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners All trademarks and registered trademarks mentioned in this manual are for identification purposes only and are not intended to infringe on the copyrighted properties of their respective owners USAGE AND SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 2 Introduction 7 Introducing the MRS 1608 9 Recorder mecra kermi ea Senate sce eee 10 Rhythm section 10 11 Effecis o n RIRs 11 Parts of the MRS 1608 12 Top panel eene LER ERR nte 12 Rear panel 14 Front 14 Connections 15 Installing the CD R RW Drive 17 Power On Off 19 Turning
360. the patch to store swap 4 To carry out the store swap operation press the STORE key When the store swap operation is completed the send return effect patch select screen appears again HINT Patches that you have stored are saved on the hard disk as part of the project Patch data included in an already existing project can be loaded into the current project p 149 148 ZOOM MRS 1608 Editing the name of a send return effect patch This section explains how to edit the name of the patch that is currently selected for a send return effect I e Press the REVERB key or CHORUS DELAY key in the effect section then use the PATCH SELECT V A keys or the dial to select the patch to edit 2 Press the EDIT key and repeatedly press the cursor down key to bring up the indication NAME The name of the selected patch can now be edited The flashing character can be changed 3 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section to the character to edit and turn the dial to select the new character For information on available characters refer to page 36 4 Repeat step 3 as necessary to complete the new name 5 To confirm the new name press the STORE key in the control section twice The patch is stored under the new name and the send return effect patch select screen appears again Reference Effects Importing patches from another project If r
361. the rhythm pattern playback Make sure that the DRUM BASS status keys are lit in green Make sure that the DRUM BASS faders are raised If the faders are already raised lower them and then raise them once more Make sure that you have not selected a blank rhythm pattern pattern name Make sure which is selected as playback sound a drum kit bass program or the pad sampler A sound that is not selected will not play f the pad sampler is selected as playback sound make sure that samples are assigned to the pads Cannot hear the rhythm song play back n the case of a new project all rhythm songs will be empty so you will hear no sound Either create a new rhythm song or load a project for which a rhythm song has been created When using Control Change signals sent from an external MIDI device the drum or bass volume may be lowered Set the MIDI channels for drum and bass to OFF or check the setting at the external MIDI device No sound when you tap the pads If the pad sensitivity has been set to SOFT loud sounds will not be produced even when you tap the pad strongly Change the pad sensitivity setting p 120 ZOOM MRS 1608 Troubleshooting Cannot record or edit a rhythm pattern rhythm song When the RHYTHM key is out or blinking it is not possible to record or edit a rhythm pattern or rhythm song Press the RHYTHM key so that the key is lit e I
362. ting Editing using V takes Recorded audio data can also be edited in V take units This is convenient to exchange the data on two V takes or delete a V take that is no longer needed The procedure is explained in this section Basic steps for V take editing When editing audio data in V take units some steps are similar for each action These are as follows 1 From the main screen press the V TAKE key in the track parameter section The key lights up and a screen for selecting the V take appears on the display While this screen is shown the level meter section of the display indicates the V take selection and the presence or absence of audio data by the segment flashing lit out status Lit recorded V take Flashing currently selected Out unrecorded V take 2 Use the cursor left right keys and the dial to select a track and V take The status key for the currently selected track is lit in orange Alternatively you can press a status key to select a track It is also possible to select the master track In this case the track number indication shows ZOOM MRS 1608 61 Reference Track Editing HINT Pressing the status key for a stereo track repeatedly selects the odd numbered track and even numbered track in sequence 3 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section A menu for editing audio data in V take units appears on the display 4
363. tion as necessary The following possibilities are available Display Insert position Input mixer One of the input mixer inputs All of the input mixer inputs Drum track output Bass track output Any output of track 1 8 Any output of stereo track or mono track x 2 All outputs of track 1 8 All outputs of track 9 16 Immediately before MASTER fader NOTE One of the input mixer outputs IN1 IN8 can only be selected if the 8 track recording function is enabled e TR1 8 and TR9 16 are only available when the 8x COMP EQ algorithm is selected IN1 8 can only be selected when the 8 track recording function is enabled and the 8x COMP EQ algorithm is selected f you switch to the 8x COMP EQ algorithm after selecting the insert position the position will change to IN TR1 8 or TR9 16 depending on the immediately preceding setting Insertion to input mixer recording on one or two tracks l On the main screen verify that the ON OFF key for the desired input is lit in red Then press the INPUT SOURCE key in the effect section The current insert position is shown on the display Current insert position 2 verity that IN is selected If another position is selected turn the dial to select IN You can also do this by pressing an ON OFF key When the input mixer is selected as insert position all ON OFF keys are l
364. tions shown in the table on the previous page are for the condition where the effect module is on When the effect module is off the indication OFF is shown on the second line The 8x COMP EQ algorithm does not include a ZNR module 4 To change the effect type of the currently selected effect module turn the dial For effect modules which comprise multiple effect types the name of the currently selected effect type is shown on the second line of the display When you turn the dial in this condition the effect type changes EDIT FLAHGEFR Effect type name HINT If the contents of a patch have been changed the EDIT indicator in the upper part of the display will change to EDITED When the setting is returned to the original condition the indicator reverts to EDIT 5 Use the cursor up down keys to select the effect parameter that you want to edit The following diagram shows an example of what appears on the display when you have selected the DEPTH parameter of the FLANGER effect FLANGE EDIT BEFTH c Setting value HINT To reselect the effect type repeatedly press the cursor up key to bring up the effect type name and then turn the dial 6 Turn the dial to change the setting value For details on the effect types that can be selected for each effect module and on the effect parameters of each type refer to the information in the a
365. to bounce the contents of tracks 1 16 and the drum bass tracks onto V take 10 of tracks 15 16 1 Refer to Making bounce settings and set the bounce target track to PLAY 2 Refer to Making bounce settings and select V take 10 for the bounce target track 3 From the main screen press the status keys of tracks 15 16 repeatedly so that the keys are lit in red Tracks 15 16 are now ready for recording 4 Press the BOUNCE key in the control section The key lights up and the bounce function for the target tracks is turned on Other tracks and effects function normally 5 Set the recorder to playback and adjust the mixing balance of the various tracks The individual track level settings as well as the insert effect and send return effect settings all have an influence on the mixed signal that is sent to the bounce target tracks Adjust levels while watching the L R level meter and make sure that no signal clipping occurs 6 Move the recorder to the beginning and start recording Recording on tracks 15 16 starts 7 When recording is complete press the STOP W key HINT To check the result of the bounce operation select the V take for the bounce target tracks and mute the other tracks Note that the track parameters will continue to be valid To monitor the unprocessed sound return the track volume and EQ settings for the bounce target tracks to the default condition When bouncing in
366. tput of any track so that it post processes the output signal of the track Changing the algorithm insert position of the insert effect l Use the ALGORITHM key in the effect section to select the algorithm you want to use When applying the insert effect to a track the selected algorithm determines the number of tracks for which the effect can be used When 8x COMP EQ is selected The effect can be used on the output of eight continuous tracks 1 8 or 9 16 When an algorithm other than 8x COMP EQ is selected The effect can be used on a maximum of two mono tracks or one stereo track 2 Press the INPUT SOURCE key in the effect section The currently selected insert position appears on the display IM IH INPUT BYPASS TUNER OURCE 3 Turn the dial to bring the track to which you want to apply the insert effect on the second line of the display The status key of the selected track lights up in orange When 8x COMP EQ algorithm is selected You can select eight continuous tracks TR 1 8 or TR 9 16 as insert location Also if you have selected track TR 9 16 you can set different high pass filter compressor and EQ values for odd even numbered tracks SRC TR1 8 When an algorithm other than 3x COMP EQ is selected You can select one of eight mono tracks TR 1 TR 8 or two mono tracks one stereo track TR 1 2
367. track 1 ZOOM MRS 1608 67 Reference Phrase Looping Loading a phrase This section describes how to load a phrase into the phrase pool Basic phrase loading steps When loading phrases some steps are similar for each type 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key in the display section The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY PHRASE on the display and press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the phrase appears on the display Phrase number Phrase name HINT The phrase number 0 is preprogrammed as a rest of 1 measure 4 4 beat This phrase cannot be overwritten 3 Turn the dial to select a number into which the phrase should be loaded If you select an empty phrase number the display shows EMPTY NOTE If you select a number into which a phrase is already loaded the previous phrase will be erased and replaced by the new phrase 4 Press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key once more The phrase utility menu for loading phrases and creating phrase loops appears on the display 5 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication PHRASE IMPORT on the display and press the ENTER key The menu for selecting the import source appears on the display 6 Use the cursor left right keys to select one
368. transport section keys except for the REC 6 key operate normally ZOOM MRS 1608 41 Reference Recorder 2 Press the ZERO 4 key to return to the beginning of the song and then press the PLAY gt key Playback of the master track starts You can use the MASTER fader to adjust the playback volume 9 To stop recorder playback press the STOP Bi key 4 Tocancel the master track playback mode press the MASTER status key so that the key goes out Muting for all tracks is canceled and the unit returns to normal operation Status keys that were automatically turned off are returned to the previous condition Combining multiple tracks on one or two tracks bounce function How bounce works Bounce is a function that mixes the sound from the audio tracks and drum bass tracks and records them on one or two tracks This is sometimes called ping pong recording For example you might bounce the contents of tracks 1 14 onto tracks 15 16 and then switch the V takes of tracks 14 to record new versions of your performance TRACK RECORDING MASTER 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1112 1314 15 6 17 18 fal sad clad cad u a i
369. u make a mistake or want to change the information the events can be edited in the following ways To change an event setting Display the event you want to change and turn the dial to alter the setting To delete event information Display the event you want to delete and press the DELETE ERASE key 8 When you have finished press the STOP Bi key The REC 0 key goes out and the rhythm song selection screen appears again To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ZOOM MRS 1608 110 Playing a rhythm song This section explains how to play one of the 10 rhythm songs that were created by inputting rhythm pattern and chord information 1 From the main screen press the SONG key The key lights up and the rhythm song selection screen appears SOMG Mok teen 1 eH 2 Turn the dial to select the song and then press the PLAY gt key The rhythm song will begin playing If something has been recorded on the audio tracks those tracks will play back simultaneously The display shows information about the rhythm pattern number chord type and other information at the current location SOMG E Current chord 4 t Rhythm pattern number 3 To stop the rhythm song press the STOP Bi key 4 To play the rhythm section independently press the RHYTHM key while stopped so that the key lights up The rhythm s
370. um kit pitch of the bass program are flashing You can also tap the pads to play the drum sounds bass notes ZOOM MRS 1608 23 Quick Tour 5 To change the tempo press the TEMPO key in the rhythm section and then turn the dial to change the tempo value shown on the display The tempo value can be set in 0 1 BPM steps BANK octave step 9 X EXTRA CYMBAL EXTRA1 EXTRA 2 TEMPO BPM 8 CRASH 136 4 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key to return to the previous screen HINT You can also set the tempo by tapping the TEMPO key repeatedly p 89 Use the DRUM BASS faders to adjust the volume of the drum bass track If bass sound is not desired turn the BASS fader all the way down 7 e To stop playback press the STOP W key Je 8 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times ems Step 2 Recording the first track In this step you record the first track while listening to the guide rhythm of the rhythm section As an example we describe how to record an electric guitar on track 1 with the insert effect 2 1 Adjusting input sensitivity 1 Connect an instrument to the GUITAR BASS INPUT jack 1 p 15 To connect a guitar or bass use the front panel GUITAR BASS INPUT jacks 1 2 To connect a synthesizer or other component with line level stereo output use the rear
371. unt recording on track 2 will begin Record your instrument playing while listening to the guide rhythm and track 1 4 When you have finished recording track 2 press the STOP W key The indication wait is briefly shown on the display and then the main screen reappears 5 To listen to the recorded content press the ZERO 4 key to return to the beginning of the song and press the PLAY gt key The guide rhythm of the rhythm section and tracks 1 2 will be played back Adjust faders 1 2 as necessary to adjust the level balance To stop playback press the STOP W key HINT To redo the recording repeat steps 3 5 You can also start rerecording from partly into the track and use the punch in punch out function to redo a limited passage only p 39 7 e When you satisfied with the recorded content press status key 2 until it is lit in green You can now record more tracks in the same way HINT The maximum number of tracks that can be recorded is 16 But even when all 16 tracks have been filled you can still use the bounce function also called ping pong recording to move the contents from multiple tracks onto 1 or 2 tracks Then you can select another V take for the bounce source tracks and record more gt p 35 28 ZOOaM MRS 1608 Step 4 Mixing When you have finished recording all tracks you can use the built in mixer to adjust parameters such as volume level E
372. urn effect are bypassed and the built in tuner is activated If this is the first time that the function is used the chromatic tuner will be selected Currently selected tuner type CHROMATE 4 Play the note that you want to tune The pitch is automatically detected and the display shows the nearest note name C C D D E The display also indicates by how much the current pitch is different from the correct pitch ZOOM MRS 1608 179 Reference Other Functions When you change the reference pitch of the tuner the pitch of the rhythm section bass program will also change ixi flat D H accordingly The reference pitch setting is saved individually for each project 7 When you have finished using the tuner function press the EXIT key The tuner is turned off and the insert effect and send Gorrectipiteh return effect will revert to the original condition oO lt mq oo Using other tuner types Y Pitch is sharp The MRS 1608 allows various other tuner types besides chromatic tuning including standard tuning for guitar and bass and various special tuning functions 5 Adjust the pitch until the lt gt indication For these types it is necessary to first select a string encloses the desired note number and then tune the strings one by one To change the reference pitch of the tuner 1 Connect the guitar
373. us delay each have an effect type that determines the general sound of effect and various parameters that let you adjust the sonic character Settings for the effect type and parameters together with a name are collectively called send return effect patches A newly created project contains 30 reverb patches and 30 chorus delay patches You can instantly switch reverb or chorus delay settings simply by choosing the effect and then selecting a patch The number of patches available for each effect is as follows Effect Patch number preprogrammed patches REVERB 30 22 CHORUS DELAY 30 18 Selecting a send return effect patch This section explains how to select a reverb or chorus delay patch I e Press the REVERB key or CHORUS DELAY key in the effect section When you press a key a patch select screen for the respective effect appears For example when you have selected a reverb effect patch the following indication appears Reference Effects SEHI FEW Ti Au 1 Ho Patch number Patch name 2 Use the PATCH SELECT V A keys or the dial to select the patch As you turn the dial new patches will be recalled immediately If the track mixer REVERB SEND LEVEL or CHORUS DELAY SEND LEVEL parameter settings are raised you can press the PLAY P key to play back the song and listen to the result of the newly selected patch HINT For details on track mixer operations
374. veral times to return to the main screen HINT Creating a rhythm pattern using drum sequence step input is also possible Reference Pad Sampler Recording sampler play on an audio track You can record your pad sampler play on an audio track This is useful to add effect sounds in real time while listening to other audio tracks NOTE When a programmed rhythm pattern rhythm song is selected while recording is carried out the contents will be played back and the pad sampler sounds will be activated by the rhythm pattern or rhythm song To record only your pad play select an empty rhythm pattern rhythm song The pad sampler and drum kit bass program cannot be used concurrently To use a rhythm pattern or rhythm song with drum bass together with the pad sampler record the rhythm pattern play on an audio track first p 44 1 From the main screen press the UTILITY TRACK EDIT key The indication UTILITY TR EDIT appears on the display 2 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication UTILITY BOUNCE on the display and press the ENTER key The display indication changes as follows REC TAKE 3 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication BOUNCE REC SRC on the display and press the ENTER key In this condition you can select the bounce recording source 4 Turn the dial to change the setting to DRUM TR and press th
375. ving all projects on CD R RW disc 162 179 5 ee tye 184 Using 1 1 180 Fai feta aE R siden 84 Using the chromatic 179 Automatically switching scenes 85 Calling Scene 85 BU Eliminating a specific parameter from a scene 86 Nr E 183 Saving a scene 84 SOMS NEVER r u AS ne Oe 182 BE 183 Scrub preview function 38 T PONE IN DOET risen edi M TNF RNC MERETUR 35 changing the name ora send return Assigning a name to 36 eifect pda E 199 Copying V take 62 Editing send return effect patch 147 Erasing a V take 62 Patch Ne UM D E 147 Exchanging 63 Selecting a send return effect patch 147 Importing a V take from another project 64 Store swap a send return effect patch 148 Maving 63 Shutdown ern ie ek 19 Switching the V tako aeania nme ar anan 35 SMF Standard MIDI File Importing SMF into a project 174 BW Playback uu oe ee ke pean ee 176 Selecting output destination 175 LOr me SMF
376. w frequency range boost EQ LOW EG LOW Key 40 1600 Hz Adjusts center frequency for low FREQUENCY frequency range boost cut CHORUS DELAY CHORUS DELAY 0 100 Adjusts signal volume sent to chorus SEND LEVEL SEND key delay effect REVERB SEND REVERB SEND 0 100 Adjusts signal level sent to reverb LEVEL key effect Selects whether the STEREO SUB OUT jack carries the same signal as SEND ON OFF the MASTER OUTPUT jacks This parameter can be selected only for the master track Adjusts the level of the signal sent from tracks 1 16 drum bass track SUB OUT SEND 0 127 and input to the STEREO SUB OUT LEVEL SUB OUT SEND jack This parameter is not shown key when the SUB OUT SEND ON OFF parameter for the master track is ON Adjusts the panning value of the signal sent from tracks 1 16 drum bass track and input to the STEREO BARS BEND L100 0 R100 SUB OUT jack This parameter is not shown when the SUB OUT SEND ON OFF parameter for the master track is ON Adjusts panning for the track For PAN PAN key L100 0 R100 stereo tracks this adjusts the left right balance Selects V take to use for the track x V TAKE V TAKE key is the track number and y is the V di take number FADER 0 127 Adjusts the current volume STEREO LINK ON OFF Links the parameters for two mono None tracks p 82 Selects whether the output signal INVERT ON OFF phase is inverted OFF means normal phase and ON means inverted p
377. wing keys and pads can be used for numeric input D key Enters the closing bracket used for linking several patterns 1 key Enters the opening bracket used for linking several x pad Enters the x that specifies the repetition patterns of a pattern Me D 8 9 CRASH EXTRA CYMBAL EXTRA 1 EXTRA2 4 5 6 7 TOM 1 TOM2 TOM3 RIDE 0 1 2 3 KICK SNARE CLOSED HAT OPEN HAT Pads 0 9 pad Specify pattern numbers and repetition count Enters the for lining up patterns The basic rules for creating a rhythm pattern sequence are as follows Line up patterns Use the symbol to line up rhythm patterns For example entering 0 1 2 will result in the following rhythm pattern play sequence PATTERN 0 PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 Repeat patterns Use the x symbol to specify pattern repetitions x takes precedence over For example entering O 1 x 2 2 will result in the following rhythm pattern play sequence gt PATTERN 0 PATTERN 1 PATTERN 1 PATTERN 2 Repeat multiple patterns Use the and symbols to link a group of patterns for repetition Formulas enclosed in brackets take 106 ZOOM MRS 1608 precedence over other formulas For example entering 0 1 2 x 2 will result in the following rhythm pattern play sequence
378. y MEASURE BEAT TI 1 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of the counter and turn the dial to specify the fade in or fade out start point Press the ENTER key The display indication changes to Fade Src END Reference Track Editing 4 Use the same procedure as in step 2 to specify the fade in or fade out end point 5 Press the ENTER key The indication Fade Src CURVE appears on the display 6 Turn the dial to select the fade in or fade out curve Curves IN 1 to IN 3 are for fade in and curves OUT 1 to OUT 3 are for fade out The three different kinds of curves look as follows Fade in IN 1 A IN 3 Fade out OUT 1 OUT 2 OUT 3 5 5 Z Press the ENTER key The indication FADE I O SURE appears on the display 8 To execute the fade in fade out operation press the ENTER key once more When the fade in fade out operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time ZOOM MRS 1608 53 Reference Track Editing Reversing a specified range of audio data You can reverse the order of a specified range of audio data Reverse BDE p c B 4 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing to select the track V take for
379. y The indication ERASE SURE appears on the display 2 To execute the erase operation press the ENTER key once more When the erase operation is completed the unit returns to the V take selection menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time Copying a V take You can copy the audio data of a specified V take to any other V take This action will overwrite any existing data on the destination V take The data on the copy source V take will be unchanged Copy source track Copy target track 1 Refer to steps 1 5 of Basic steps for V take editing to select the track V take to copy and to bring up the indication COPY on the display Then press the ENTER key A screen for selecting the copy destination track V take appears on the display 62 ZOOM MRS 1608 CORY TO TR 4 1 2 Use the cursor left right keys and the dial to select the destination track V take and press the ENTER key The indication COPY SURE appears on the display If audio data exist at the copy destination the indication OverWrt is shown When the copy operation is performed these data will be overwritten 3 To execute the copy operation press the ENTER key once more When the copy operation is completed the unit returns to the V take se
380. y and press the ENTER key This screen allows you to specify the root for the selected rhythm pattern rakoot E Chord root 5 Turn the dial to select the root for the chord The available range is C B default setting E When setting chord information for a rhythm song the root specified here will become the default 6 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key The setting is entered and the rhythm pattern edit menu appears again 7 Use the cursor left right keys to bring up the indication EDIT OrgChord on the display and press the ENTER key This screen allows you to specify the chord type for that rhythm pattern ae 8 Turn the dial to select the chord For the chord type you can select MAJOR or MINOR For example if you have entered a bass phrase with an E minor chord in mind set the root to E and the chord type to MINOR 9 When the setting is complete press the EXIT key The setting is entered and the rhythm pattern edit menu appears again 10 To return to the main screen press the EXIT key several times 100 ZOOM MRS 1608 Changing the drum bass sequence volume level The playback volume of the drum sequence and bass sequence can be adjusted with the DRUM and BASS faders If necessary the volume levels can also be individually programmed for each rhythm pattern 1 Fromthe main screen press the PATTERN key so
381. y the move range end point If you press the PLAY gt key at this point the specified range will be played D Press the ENTER key The display changes to let you specify the move destination track V take Specify the move destination track V take in the same way as when selecting the move source track V take and press the ENTER key The display changes to the screen for specifying the move destination start point Move st TU B42238 m32 41 7 Specify the move destination start point in the same way as for the move source and press the ENTER key The indication MOVE SURE appears on the display 8 To execute the move operation press the ENTER key once more When the move operation is completed the unit returns to the track edit menu By pressing the EXIT key instead of the ENTER key you can cancel the operation and back up one step at a time ZOOM MRS 1608 51 Reference Track Editing Erasing a specified range of data You can erase the audio data of a specified range and return the range to the non recorded condition gt 1 Refer to steps 1 6 of Basic steps for range editing to select the track V take for erasing and press the ENTER key The indication Ers Src START appears on the display s MEASURE BEAT 1 agde 2 Use the cursor left right keys to move the flashing section of th

MRS-1608 Operation Manual (English)

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents